Home

- Carlson Software

1. 296 Field To Finish 300 GIS Data Collection 305 Depth Sounder 317 Depth Sounder 317 Settings 317 Starting Out 318 Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 319 Apache Lightbar 320 CSI GBX Pro 320 Geodimeter 321 Impulse Laser 322 InnerSpace Tech depth sounder 323 Laser Atlanta 323 Leica Disto
2. 271 Monitor GPS Position 272 Benchmark 273 Resection 274 Building Face Surface 275 Pattern Point Survey 275 Point Check By Robotics 275 GIS Commands 276 Input Edit GIS Data 276 GIS Data Inspector 277 GIS Inspector Settings 278 GIS Query Report 279 Create Links 281 Erase Links 282 Audit Links
3. 17 Align 18 Trim 18 iii Scale 19 Extend 19 Break 21 Change Properties 21 Change Elevation 23 Rotate 24 Text 26 Polyline Utilities 26 Offset Polyline 29 Join Nearest 30 3D Entity to 2D 30 Image
4. 323 Leica GPS System 500 323 Leica TC Series 325 Manual Total Station 326 Mikrofyn Lightbar 327 Navcom GPS Setup 327 Navcom Con guration Guide 331 Nikon Total Stations 333 OmniStar Otto 334 Simulation GPS 335 Sokkia 335 Topcon Total Stations 337 Trimble 340 Contents ix Contents x Introduction 1 1 Introduction Carlson Field is an
5. 49 Inquiry amp Settings Commands 49 List 49 Point ID 50 Layer ID 50 Bearing amp Distance 50 Curve Info 51 Polyline Info 51 Drawing Setup 52 Text Style 52 Units Control 53 Object Snap 54 Set Environment Variables 57 Points Commands 57 Point Defaults
6. 140 Cut Sheet 142 DTM Commands 145 Elevation Difference 145 List Elevation 148 Assign Contour Elevations 148 Make 3D Grid File 149 Plot 3D Grid File 153 Two Surface Volumes 154 Final surface contours with a closed polyline 156 Triangulate amp Contour 159 Plot Triangular Mesh 164 Road Commands 164 Centerline Position 164 Offset Stakeout
7. 57 Draw Locate Points 59 List Points 62 Import Text ASCII File 63 Contents v Export Text ASCII File 65 Set Coordinate File 66 CooRDinate File Utilities 66 Coordinate File Utilities Options 66 Edit Points 76 Erase Points 76 Move Points 77 Edit Point Attributes 77 Scale Point Attributes 77 Convert Points to Softdesk 78 Convert Softdesk to Points
8. 31 Image Clip 31 Image Adjust 32 View Commands 32 Window 33 Dynamic 33 Previous 33 Center 33 Extents 34 Zoom In 34 Zoom Out 34 Pan 34 3D Viewer Window 35 Viewpoint 3D 35 Zoom Point s
9. 283 Import SHP File 284 Export SHP File 285 Image Inspector 285 Attach Image to Entity 286 De ne Template Database 287 De ne Note File Prompts 288 Note File Utilities 290 Help Commands 292 On Line Help 292 Training Movies 293 About Carlson Software 293 Contents viii Chapter 3 Field User Guide 295 Introduction 296 Introduction 296 Slope Staking
10. 78 Convert Points to Eagle Point 78 Convert Eagle Point to Points 78 Convert LDD MDB to CRD 78 Convert CRD to LDD MDB 79 Convert CRD to TDS CR5 TDS CR5 to CRD 79 Convert Wild Leica to Points 79 COGO Commands 79 Inverse 79 Occupy Point 80 Traverse 81 Side Shots 82 Enter Assign Point 83 Locate at Intersect 83 Bearing Bearing Intersect 84 Bearing Distance I
11. 167 Slope Staking 171 Slope Inspector 176 Prepare Story Stake 177 Story Stake By Points 179 Story Stake By Polyline 180 Input Edit Centerline File 181 Polyline to Centerline File 192 Draw Centerline File 193 Centerline Conversion 193 Input Edit Pro le 193 Draw Pro le 194 Design Template 197 Draw Typical Template 205 Template Transition 207
12. 36 Redraw 37 Regen 37 Set UCS to World 37 Twist Screen Standard 37 Twist Screen Line 37 Twist Screen Surveyor 38 Restore Due North 38 Layer Linetype Control 39 Set Layer 39 Change Layer 39 Contents iv Freeze Thaw Layer 40 Isolate Layer 40 Restore Layer 40 Draw Commands 41 L
13. 2515 Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite A triangulation le t Road Commands Centerline Position Function This function determines the station and offset relative to a centerline for a point The centerline can be de ned by a centerline le CL a points or by a polyline The centerline le can be created with commands in the Roads menu One advantage of centerline les is that it allows you to use pro le les which can report cut lls For the points method you can either give two points or a starting point and azimuth The points can be de ned by a point number from the current coordinate le or by simply entering the northing and easting The rst dialog for Centerline Position has the choice for centerline le or points method With the centerline le option the dialog shows the last centerline le name used If this le is correct then click OK Otherwise use the Select button to choose the centerline le name Light bars are useful for left right guidance To enable the light bar option go to Con gure Field then to Centerline Position Settings and pick Use Light Bar Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 164 Centerline Position with GPS Carlson Field will continually read your current position from the GPS receiver A dialog box appears displaying your current position Carlson Field nds and displays in the dialog the station offset for this point An arrow icon Road Comman
14. Drawing Metric Section Sheets First be sure that you are set to metric mode in Drawing Setup under the Inq Set menu Then set the scales and spacing as shown in the dialog below This example is 1 1000 scale When the rst dialog is set click OK to reach the second dialog There is a different block name for metric sections called schsht2 dwg This le is located in the Carlson SUP directory Choose the parameters for the second dialog as shown on the next page In this case the sheets will have two rows and two columns of sections Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite An SCT le Section Conversion Function These command converts from other formats to Carlson SCT format The formats that can be imported include Agtek RoadCalc SMI and Softdesk Pull Down Menu Location Roads Section Conversion gt Prerequisite A le to import Field Commands The Field menu contains the commands for interfacing to total stations GPS and lasers Carlson Field Icon Menu Function The Carlson Field Icon Menu lets you select Carlson Field functions by pressing a function key F1 F10 or by picking the icon button The set of commands that are available in this menu depends of the type of survey equipment that you are con gured to Before running these Carlson Field functions you need to run Con gure Field to set the equipment type and communication parameters There are two ways to bring up the icon menu One way is by
15. Increment Station Labels from Beginning Station Without this option the program increments the station labels from zero For example if the station interval is 100 and the polyline starting station is 145 then the program will label 2 00 3 00 etc With this option active the station labels are incremented from the starting station In this example the program would then label 2 45 3 45 etc Locate Centerline Points When checked the command will locate points and store them in the current CooRDi nate le Locate Radius Points When checked the program will locate the radius points of any arc segments Locate Offset Points This option will create points at the speci ed left and right offset distances from the center line Label Station Text When checked this command places station text along the polyline at the angle of the corre sponding segment The text is plotted with the current style and on the current layer Label intermediate stations If the intermediate distance is the same as the station distance then no intermediate station ticks or labels will be drawn For example with the above entries and 0 00 for the rst station the stations will be labeled COGO Commands 137 with descriptions as follows 0 00 0 50 1 00 1 50 and so on Station at Tick Mark labels the station text along the polyline with the of the station text at the station s location on the polyline Centerline By This chooses betwee
16. Click the Display button that appears at the bottom of the Report Formatting Options dialog to obtain the report File Commands 11 Shown here is a summary of our data les by size with reporting of the found status In this case the Estates Lot le has been moved or deleted A deleted or missing le such as Estates Lot will appear in Drawing Explorer with a special red no entry symbol as shown here Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 12 Pull Down Menu Location File Project Prerequisite None Project Explorer Function This tool is used for management of a complete project A project can contain numerous drawings and each drawing within that project can contain numerous related les Think of the Project Explorer as the trunk of the hierarchical tree structure that develops into a project While within each drawing the program keeps track of the les that you create such as grids and coordinates These are related to the drawing and you can use the Drawing Explorer to manage them When management reaches the top level the Project Explorer is used to tie these together Prompts When you initiate the Project Explorer you will be prompted to select an existing or create a new Project File Project les end in the PRJ extension Once a project le is open the following dialog will appear Add When you choose the add button you will be presented with a dialog to select a drawing to add to
17. Cut vol 83570 89 cubic ft 3095 22 cubic yards Fill vol 73024 56 cubic ft 2704 61 cubic yards Contours from the Draw Depth Difference Contours option This is a good way to check that both surfaces are modeled correctly and to verify the volumes The cut contours are red ll contours are blue and Sample Two Surface Volumes report calculation it is a good idea to check the grd les either by drawing them with Plot 3D Grid File and viewing them with Viewpoint 3D or by contouring the grids with the Contour Grid File command Prompts Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none Select objects Pick a closed polyline for the limits of disturbed area Select objects Press Enter Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or Volumes by elevation zone Zone 20 00 to 30 00 Cut volume 0 30 cubic ft 0 01 cubic yards Fill volume 107 90 cubic ft 4 00 cubic yards Zone 30 00 to 40 00 Cut volume 4 88 cubic ft 0 18 cubic yards Fill volume 73021 14 cubic ft 2704 49 cubic yards Running total Cut volume 5 18 cubic ft 0 19 cubic yards Fill volume 73129 05 cubic ft 2708 48 cubic yards Zone 40 00 to 50 00 Cut volume 65044 26 cubic ft 2409 05 cubic yards Fill volume 0 25 cubic ft 0 01 cubic yards Running total Cut volume 65049 44 cubic ft 2409 24 cubic yards Fill volume 73129 29 cubic ft 2708 49 cubic yards Zone 50 00 to 60 00 Cut volume 17786 85 cubic ft 658 77 cubic
18. le SMH GIS Step 9 Have the rodman setup over the point and sight the point with the total station Press Read amp Store F5 The total station takes the shot Point number 1 plots as a sewer manhole Step 10 A group of pop up dialog boxes appear that are all titled Enter GIS Data and prompt for the SMH GIS GIS information SMH Size Type Brand and Comments 10 Plot List and Edit GIS Notes in Carlson Survey Field Note le GIS and survey information can be plotted reviewed and edited in Carlson Field Plotting Note Point Data The command in Carlson Field that can plot Notes with points is Draw Locate Points In the Draw Locate Points dialog toggle on check Notes The Point Numbers toggle in the Draw Locate Points dialog controls two output formats for plotting Note informa tion The one shown above is plotted with the point number point elevation point description and point symbol The second format shown to the right plots the Note information with point number elevation and description turned off The point Note information is plotted with the point symbol only Every line of notes is a separate AutoCAD text entity Listing Point Note data for Review To list the current coordinate CRD le including Note data pick List Points in the Points drop down menu Enter the range of points to review or type all to review all points Pick check List Point Notes to display Note data with coordinate points Pick OK The p
19. les SaveAs is for saving the pro le under a different pro le le name Save File will save the pro le using the current pro le le name The current pro le le name is displayed in the top title bar of the dialog box Quit exits the routine without saving anything Draw Pro le Function Draw Pro le is a exible routine for drawing a pro le anywhere in the drawing The pro le may be drawn with or without a grid or with just tick markers The vertical curve annotations for a road pro le and manhole annotations for a sewer pro le may also be drawn Draw Pro le uses the pro le information that is stored in PRO les Once the pro le is drawn using Draw Pro le the design and labeling routines of the Pro les dropdown are applicable to the pro le The rst step in Draw Pro le is to choose a PRO le from the data directory e g C SCAD DATA After selecting what to draw a Pro le Settings dialog box appears which de nes how to draw the pro le The range of the stations in the selected PRO le is shown at the bottom of the dialog and you may specify a subset of this range if you wish to draw only part of the pro le Otherwise the default is to draw the entire range At the top are toggle buttons to choose between drawing the pro le from left to right or from right to left whether to draw a grid or not and whether to draw the grid lines as ticks only or completely across Then there are ed
20. nition Basically it uses a code table which holds information on types of points i e Man Hole or Edge of Pavement When the settings Use Code Table For Symbols For Layers and For Descriptions are selected Carlson Field will look to the code table for how to draw points of a particular code description The le containing the active code table appears after Code File You can change this with the button Select File The Split Multiple Codes option will draw multiple points from the same point when that point description has multiple codes For example a point with description EP DR will draw the point twice once with the properties of code EP and a second time using code DR When this option is off the program will use the rst code and draw the point once The Check Descriptions With Code Table option will display a warning before storing a point if that point description is not found in the code table With this option off the program will go ahead and store the point and the point will be drawn using the default point properties Stakeout Settings Display GPS RMS in Stakeout causes Carlson Field to report the constantly updating horizontal RMS accuracy Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 226 values while staking a point The only disadvantage to having this option active is that it slows down a little the stakeout position update Draw Trail displays a line in the stakeout screen showing where you ve been as you move towar
21. 2D Polylines Lines Inserts These are the standard entities that contain elevations Carlson Survey Point Inserts This option will include Carlson Survey point inserts such as the insert SRVPNO1 with the point number elevation and description attributes Bottom Elevation Inserts This option will read the elevation in text entities that start with X These text entities are created by the Bottom Elevation routine in the Mine module From File This option allows you to triangulate from the points in a CRD or ASCII le Value to Process This allows you to choose what value to contour from the coordinate le The available keywords are Z for the coordinate elevation DESC for the point description and NOTE for the point note elds The NOTE keyword can be followed by a note line number For example to contour the third line from the note eld use NOTE3 Equations can also be entered in this eld For example Z DESC 2 0 Index Contour Options This dialog is activated if the Draw Index Contours option is set The settings here specify the contour interval line thickness and layer name for the index contours Contour Label Options This dialog appears if the Label Contours option is on Prompts Pick the clip edge polyline pick a polyline This must be a closed polyline It serves as the trim edge when drawing the contour lines This prompt only appears if the Use Inclusion Perimeter option is set Select
22. 305 5 90 IRON PIN 19105 19104 19106 5 5 4 4 7 215 15 140 35 90 IRON PIN 19106 19105 19107 5 5 05 4 7 215 15 200 90 TACK IN FENCE 19107 19106 19108 5 5 2 4 7 300 23 400 90 Part of SurvCOGO Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 96 raw le Process gt No Adjust This routine processes the raw le and stores the calculated coordinates to the CRD le The No Adjust means that no angle balance or traverse adjustment will be applied First a dialog prompts for some options For any direct reverse raw data there is the option to process the direct reverse shots and use only the foresight direct shot The Report Angle Format setting speci es the angle format for the report The By File format makes the report use the angle format in the RW5 le The Calculate Elevations option controls for which points elevations will be calculated For example if the traverse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need to recalculate the sideshot elevations then use the SideShots Only option The Report SideShots is an option whether to include the sideshot data in the process results report The Point Protect option will check the coordinate le for existing point data before processing If the foresight point number for any traverse or sideshot record already is a stored coordinate in the CRD le then the program shows a list of con icting point numbers You can either continue proce
23. 79 Command Entry 4 Command Prompt 16 Compare Points 74 Compass 109 111 112 115 Compress CRD File 67 Con gure 15 41 57 59 66 77 142 177 195 220 221 235 236 238 241 255 256 313 318 324 328 331 333 336 342 Con gure Field 221 233 236 241 247 252 256 258 261 270 300 303 305 306 309 311 317 318 322 324 325 334 337 339 Contouring 163 Convert CRD to LDD MDB 79 Convert CRD to TDS CR5 TDS CR5 to CRD 79 Convert Eagle Point to Points 78 Convert LDD MDB to CRD 78 Convert Points to Eagle Point 78 Convert Points to Softdesk 78 Convert Softdesk to Points 78 Convert Wild Leica to Points 79 CooRDinate File 24 25 CooRDinate File Utilities 66 Coordinate File Utilities Options 66 Copy Move 17 Create Links 281 284 Create Points from Entities 88 CSI GBX Pro 320 321 Curve Info 51 Curves 45 47 cut ll values 267 344 Cut Sheet 142 145 cut treatment 201 De ne Note File Prompts 288 308 312 313 De ne Template Database 287 de ection angle 41 81 82 92 Degree Symbol in Reports 15 Delete Layer 16 delta angle 182 183 211 Depth Sounder 317 Depth Sounder Settings 228 Description for Points 74 Design Template 197 199 Direct Reverse 104 105 226 Direct and Reverse 263 Display Edit File 14 Distance Distance Intersect 86 Draw Locate Points 59 79 315 Draw Centerline File 193 Draw Commands 41 Drawing Explorer 8 10 12 Drawing
24. For GPS receivers that support GLONAS satellites Skyplot will show these satellites with a G symbol For some types of GPS receivers the receiver will report which satellites are being used for calculating the position and which are only being tracked A satellite might be only tracked and not part of the solution if the satellite is too low on the horizon or when the signal is not clear The skyplot will highlight the satellites that are part of the calculations Monitor GPS Position Function This command reports the current GPS Lat Lon local coordinates and GPS solution status The latitude and lon gitude are reported in the DD MMSSSSSS format In this example the latitude is 42 degrees 21minutes 46 4414 seconds north The longitude is 71 degrees 8 minutes and 31 5699 seconds west Negative longitudes indicate longitudes west The next three items are state plane or local coordinates depending on the transformation in the Align Local Coordi nates command The HRMS and VRMS are measures of the reliability of the position that the receiver has calculated They correspond to the position horizontally and vertically respectively If the receiver is autonomous not receiving corrections from a base the RMS can be up to a few hundred feet If this rover is computing a Fixed position the RMS values should be less than one foot probably close to a tenth of a foot If the receiver looses the x and becomes Float the RMS values w
25. Linework for breaklines should always be 3D polylines with elevations unless you select the No Elev option 2D polylines are always drawn at zero elevation and their linetype is de ned in the Field to Finish code table 2 4 5 6 7 Special Characters and Conditions When collecting points with additional description information besides the code use a forward slash after the code and before the additional description All text after the forward slash is appended text that does not affect the Chapter 3 Field User Guide 304 code table e g UP 531 BLD COR PIPE 24 14D OAK When drawing the point in the CAD drawing the forward slash disappears and UP 531 will plot as POLE 531 The original code with forward slash and appended text is stored in the coordinate and raw le Mulitple codes are allowed in Point Store In collecting a point such as a T intersection in a fence the point can be collected once but with two codes seperated by a space as the Desc e g FP1 FP2 This also applies when storing a point that contains two or more distinct ground features e g Edge Of Pavement and Catch Basin Here also you can collect one point and store this point with two codes seperated by a space e g EOP CB The point plots twice once in the EOP layer and a second time in the CB layer The point is plotted on two layers in the drawing but is stored only once in the coordinate le Points collected in this fashion
26. Points Prerequisite Points Edit Point Attributes Function This command will edit the features attributes of a Carlson point such as the symbol type point number elevation and description The command prompts for the user to Select Objects The user could select the point symbol by picking the rst and second corners of a window that should include the symbol point number elevation and description You can also select these entities by picking each one The command then displays prompts for any attributes you would like to change For example if you want to change the description of the point but not the symbol number or elevation then just press Enter to these prompts and input the new description Though you are not prompted for a new label size or attribute locations If these values are set differently the edited point will take on the new settings Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Points Scale Point Attributes Function This command will scale point attribute text number elevation and descriptions and point symbols up or down in size The routine prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of objects If you want to enlarge enter a value greater than one If you want to reduce enter a decimal fraction such as 5 This would reduce the text size by 50 This command is very useful if you have set up your drawing for one plotting scale and decide to change to a new plotting scale This command has the
27. Prompts Here is an example of a highway interchange ramp that involves a starting tangent and a spiral curve that goes abruptly into a simple curve and then a nal tangent Starting Dialog You start by entering a starting Northing and Easting and starting Station The Start Point is optional Then the concept is that you click Add to add each subsequent element line curve or spiral Line Tangent Segment We want to enter the tangent segment length up to the TS tangent to spiral Enter in the length 200 0 bearing 88 0732 and then the bearing quadrant NW Since the next spiral element has a PI station it is not necessary for this line segment to go up to the TS point The purpose of this line segment is to establish the tangent in direction When OK is clicked the routine will add the Line element as the rst in the list of complete centerline elements Next up is Spiral Click Add Spiral Segment Though the dialog is complex for total exibility enter the four items shown which can be done in the clockwise order shown The key on a typical spiral curve is to enter four things 1 the radius of the simple curve 2 the spiral in and out lengths 3 the tangent bearing and 4 the PI station Everything else will calculate when you press Enter for the PI station Curve Segment Add the next element and select curve The Curve dialog appears The key is to enter the Radius Length 255 the Arc Length 150 and the Curve
28. Software Pulldown menus are sometimes also referred to as dropdown menus You can also start commands by typing the command name at the Command gt prompt The command names can be listed by type at the command prompt This command prompt is not always active To turn on the command prompt choose Command Prompt from the File menu Carlson Field File Types CL Centerline le CRD Coordinate le point number northing easting elevation description in binary form DCL Program dialogs Chapter 1 Introduction 4 DWG Drawing les EXE Executable programs FLT Triangulation mesh GFU Grid File Utilities macro command recorder le GRD Grid le a DTM surface model INI Program user preferences settings LSP Lisp programs MNC Compiled menus MNR Compiled menus MNS Compiled menus MXS Cross section alignment NOT Note le additional descriptions for points in corresponding CRD le PLN Plan view polyline le for Dozer 2000 PRO Pro le station elevation descriptions RW5 Raw le of traverse data SCT Cross section data station offset elevation descriptions SLB Slide library SLD Slide image Standard Report Viewer Many Carlson Field routines display the output in a report viewer as shown below The report can be edited from the report viewer To draw the report in the drawing click the Screen button The program will then prompt you for the starting
29. The second method uses different prompting for every type of point It looks for a corresponding GIS prompting le to match the description of each stored point The method to use is set by the Select GIS File Automatically by Point Description toggle Chapter 3 Field User Guide 306 GIS Data Collection Page 5A One ASCII GIS Prompting File for All Collected Points Step 1 Pick the check box for Store Data in Note File ASCII method Step 2 Hit Select File This brings up a pop up dialog box titled GIS File Name Step 3 Choose one GIS lename for prompting Browse to the drive and subdirectory where the GIS prompting les reside and highlight one Pick Open to load the selected GIS lename and close the pop up box The GIS lename selected should be displayed in the GIS Options dialog pop up box after GIS File This ASCII method will prompt for the same GIS information for every point stored regardless of description For example a FH GIS Fire Hydrant le selection would have the prompting for re hydrant GIS elds for every point stored 5B Select ASCII GIS Prompting File Automatically by Point Description Step 1 Pick the check box for Store Data in Note File Step 2 Pick the check box for Select GIS File Automatically by Point Description The GIS le name displayed after GIS File will change to AUTOMATIC GIS prompting will only appear if the stored point s description corresponds exactly to an existing
30. The degree of precision for numbers can be selected Whether a binary Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 14 le needs to be used can also be selected These DXF les can be used by other CAD systems to open up Carlson Software drawings Toolbars Function This command brings up a list of all the toolbars available classi ed under various menu sections When a toolbar is selected a dialog box appears that gives the option to have the toolbar hidden or available to the user during the drawing session through a toggle box Pull Down Menu Location File Prerequisite None Preferences Function This command allows the user to set up a number of options pertaining to the directory le system color combina tions for the display screen text fonts workspace utitlities like shortcut keys etc Pull Down Menu Location File Prerequisite None Con gure Function This command allows you to set up the default settings used each time you start a new drawing or load an existing drawing These settings are stored in les called SURVCADD INI and COGO INI in the Carlson Survey root directory Con gure will restore the current drawing settings to these default settings The Report Print Speci cations settings apply to the Standard Report Viewer Use Degree Symbol in Reports chooses between using the degree circle symbol and a d for degree angles in the report The d can be used for printers that don t handle the degree
31. The state plane coordinate is speci ed by a point number from the current coordinate le The Calculate State Plane Scale Factor At Each Setup option will calculate the scale factor for each shot as the combined grid and elevation factors see above equation The scale factor is calculated at both the occupied and foresight points and then averaged To use this option you must be working in state plane coordinates and set the state plane zone in this dialog The Correct For Earth Curvature option adjusts the horizontal distance and vertical difference to the foresight point to account for the earth curvature Depth Sounder Settings Carlson Field can use depth sounders in combination with GPS to collect points of underwater surfaces Carlson Field supports depth sounders that output standard NMEA data the Odom Digitrace model and the Hydrotrac model For the Odom Digitrace you also need to specify the depth unit mode that the instrument is set to The depth sounder must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS The Baud Rate between the computer serial port and the depth sounder is also speci ed here The Store Depth In Notes option will record the water depth in the current note le NOT when a point is stored to the coordinate le The Debug number can be used when contacting technical support if the depth sounder is not communicating to Carlson Field Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 228 Elevation Difference Setti
32. To register your serial number for your license of Carlson Field click on the Change Registration button You will then be prompted for a change key for which you must call Carlson Software A demo copy of Carlson Field cannot be registered Instead there is an Extend Demo button that will give you another 500 functions calls and 14 days To change a demo to be registered Carlson Field must be reinstalled Help Commands 293 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 294 Field User Guide 3 295 Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Carlson Field is an AutoCAD based data collection software package that runs in Windows It creates maps as you survey directly in an AutoCAD drawing The program collects data by interacting directly with a total station impulse laser or real time kinematic Global Positioning System RTK GPS equipment Carlson Field runs with AutoCAD v14 2000 and standalone AutoCAD OEM In the eld Carlson Field is typically run on a ruggedized laptop computer This user s manual covers applications for Carlson Field including eld to nish cut sheet stakeout slope staking laser offsets depth sounders and GIS data collection This manual also includes speci c setup procedures for the various equipment supported by Carlson Field There is a separate Carlson Field Reference Manual that describes all the Carlson Field commands in detail Slope Staking Slope Staking 1 There are four methods for sl
33. Use Inclusion Exclusion Areas When this box is activated the program will later prompt you for inclusion and exclusion polylines which are used to trim the contours The inclusion and exclusion polylines must be closed polylines and must be drawn before starting Triangulate amp Contour Only the parts of the contour lines that are within the inclusion polylines will be drawn For example an inclusion could be the perimeter of the site The parts of contour lines that are inside the exclusion polylines are not drawn Exclusion polylines can be used for areas where you don t want contours such as within buildings Contour Layer This setting is the name of the layer in which the contour polylines will be drawn Contour Interval This value determines the increment between contour lines Minimum Contour Line Length Contour lines whose total length is less than this value will not be drawn Draw Index Contours This option allows you to highlight contours at a speci ed interval The dialog box shown here will be activated Label Contours This selection leads to the Labeling Options dialog box shown below after OK is selected on the current dialog box Hatch Zones This option will hatch the area between the contours sequentially Draw Triangulation Network This selection toggles between drawing and not drawing the triangulation network While the program always calculates a triangulation network you have the choice of no
34. backsight and instrument height For robotic total stations there is also a Joystick button to turn the instrument search for the prism and set tracking or standby mode Carlson Field can shoot points with offsets To shoot a point with an offset check the Offset button on the Point Store dialog box Click Read or press F1 A window appears to let you choose the type of offset to shoot The choices are Distance Angle and Enter Offset Distances The Offset Vertical option will prompt for an elevation difference to apply to the point To do a Distance Angle offset you rst take a distance shot and then angle shot For the distance measurement have the rodman stand to the side of the point The prism and the point Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 262 should both be the same distance from the total station Carlson Field takes the rst shot and gets the dis tance from it It then prompts you to read the angle Turn the gun so that it is aimed at the point The prism is not needed for this step Click OK and Carlson Field reads the horizontal angle from the gun and combines this with the distance from earlier to calculate the coordinates of the point Also for combining these shots there is an option whether to use the vertical angle from the distance or from the angle shot With the Enter Offset Distances method you can supply both a left right offset and an in out offset To do a In Out offset have the rodman stand a measured distance
35. c formats or User De ned For User De ned Points Commands 63 the format of the text le is speci ed in the Coordinate Order eld where the value identi ers are listed with the appropriate delimiters For example For a text le with northing easting elevation and comma delimiters 5100 0 5150 5 485 1 5127 1 5190 3 487 3 The Coordinate Order would be Y X Z For a text le with point number easting northing elevation description and space delimiters 1 5000 0 5000 0 490 3 TRAV 2 5030 4 4930 5 495 5 TRAV The Coordinate Order would be P X Y Z D Common formats can be selected from the Common Format List All the lines in the text le should contain only point data and any header lines should be removed To read the text le pick the Select Text ASCII File button and choose the le to read Then the selected le is displayed in the Preview Window to help with lling out the Coordinate Order When the Coordinate Order is set click OK to read the text le The Wild Card Descriptions Match allows for only point with matching descriptions to be imported With Point Protect active the program will check if a point number already exists in the CRD before importing the point If a point con ict is found you can either assign a new point number or overwrite the old point The Value to Add to Point Numbers allows you to renumber the points as they are imported The Header Lines to Skip value is the n
36. ed points to de ne a polygonal boundary Specify rst point Specify a point Edit Commands 31 Specify next point or Undo Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Undo Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Close Undo Specify a point or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to de ne a polygon If the image already has a clipping boundary de ned Carlson Field displays the following prompt Delete old boundary No Yes lt Yes gt Enter n or press ENTER If you choose Yes Carlson Field redraws the entire image and the command continues if you choose No the command ends Rectangular Speci es a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners Carlson Field always draws the rectangle parallel to the edges of the image Specify rst corner point Specify a point Specify opposite corner point Specify a point Pull Down Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite An Image in the drawing Image Adjust Function This command controls the image display of the brightness contrast and fade values of images The Image Adjust dialog box controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness contrast and fade settings of the selected image Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the image le itself Brightness Controls the brightness and indirectly the contrast of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater th
37. gure Field go to Equipment Setup and make sure the radio channel or radio frequency matches the channel and frequency in Carlson Field Press Ok when done Topcon 800A Quick Lock 1 Dismount the handle from the Topcon and mount RC 2H Secure it with the xing screw 2 Attach RC 2R to the prism and turn it on Topcon Total Stations 339 3 Using the Y cable attach the RC 2H to the radio and Carlson Field 4 In Joystick click on Quick Lock and Topcon will do angle turn until it nds a prism in which it will lock to and will start tracking 5 If RC 2H is not attached to the radio with Y cable when Quick Lock is pressed the big yellow button on RC 2H needs to be pressed in order for the Topcon to search for the prism Trimble Trimble NT300D 1 In order to properly con gure the NT300D to work with Carlson Field it must rst be powered up in Setup mode by holding down the Setup button on the front panel of the receiver while powering it on so that the advanced setup options are available Once the NT300D is powered up in this mode bring up the Setup menu via the Setup button Page down using the More menu option until the I O menu item is available and select it a In the I O menu select whichever port is to be used to interface the receiver with the computer running Carlson Field Port 1 by default Next set both the input and the output to transmit receive in NMEA at 9600 baud rate The nal option Remote Se
38. le Input Edit Super Elevation Function This command is an editor for super elevation stationing The super elevation data is stored in new or existing super elevation les These les have a sup extension When creating a new super elevation le there is an option to read a centerline le and build the super elevation stationing based on the curves and spirals in the centerline by using either the Aashto based stationing or the Virginia DOT method The main superelevation dialog displays a list of each super elevation transition These entries should be sequentially entered from lowest to highest stations To edit the super elevation stationing highlight the entry line and click Edit The Add button creates a new entry below the current highlighted row or at the top of the list if no row is highlighted The Delete button removes the highlighted row from the list The Save button saves the super elevation le To exit the program without saving click the Cancel button Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 210 The super elevation stationing is entered in the Input Edit Superelevation dialog The View Table button shows a table of the super elevation slope for the delta angle and radius at different design speeds The Calc Super button calculates the slope of full super given the design speed The station entries are de ned as follows Station to begin transition where normal crown rate begins to transition Station to begin super
39. le consists of x y z points with text description elds The description elds contain codes for the Field to Finish processing The data le can be either a CRD le or an ASCII le The code le de nes the layer symbol size and other actions to apply with each code These le names are displayed at the top line of the Field to Finish dialog box Field to Finish can translate the eld points into Carlson points with a symbol layer and size de ned by the code The point settings of whether to label the description point number and elevation and whether to locate the point at zero or at the real Z are de ned in the Point Defaults routine under the Points menu The Locate Point command is another method for drawing points that is more simple than Field to Finish There are two different methods for connecting linework One method creates line work by connecting points with the same code The line type is de ned by the code as either points only no line work lines 2D polylines or 3D polylines barrier lines Distinct lines with the same code are de ned by adding a group number to the end of the code name in the data le With this method all points with the description CODE1 will be one line while points with CODE2 will be another line Both CODE1 and CODE2 use the de nition for CODE For example the code EP could be a code for edge of pavement that is to be connected as 3D polylines If there are two Chapter 2
40. then point 1 will be used as the rst symbol insertion point and the next two points with the CAR description will be used as the second and third symbol insertion points COGO Commands 125 Two point symbol example Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 126 Multi point symbol example drawing PointNo Northing Y Easting X Elev Z Description 1 5110 680 4931 807 0 0 CAR ROT SCA 2 5073 786 4873 500 0 0 CAR 3 5045 884 4887 552 0 0 CAR 4 5120 388 5147 544 0 0 TREE ROT 5 5133 788 5167 829 0 0 TREE 6 5040 777 5019 268 0 0 CAR ROT 7 4968 932 5021 212 0 0 CAR 8 5034 951 5151 431 0 0 TREE ROT 9 5029 126 5184 472 0 0 TREE 10 5122 330 5046 478 0 0 TREE 11 5175 120 4998 846 0 0 TREE ROT 12 5161 731 4976 121 0 0 TREE Multi point symbol example source points Code De nitions Category This is an optional eld that can to used to help organize your codes A category is not used for processing and only is useful in viewing and printing Sequence This speci es a sequence type code COGO Commands 127 De ne Code Sequence This sets the code names that make up the sequence Processing ON This toggle controls whether this code will be processed Code Name This is the key name that identities the code and is matched with the eld data descriptions Layer The point and line work for the code will be created in this layer Full Name This is an optional eld that describes the code for view
41. you can have one with the description EP and the other with EP2 The PC and PT options are for drawing curves If you want to plot a curve check the PC box before recording the rst point on your curve Shoot as many points along the curve as you need Carlson Field can handle compound curves as well as simple curves with this function Before shooting the last point on the curve check the PT button If you don t specify a PT Carlson Field will assume a three point curve The Undo button will remove the last point number created The point is removed from both the coordinate le and the drawing For GPS and tracking total stations there is a Start Continuous button which makes Carlson Field continuously read from the instrument The coordinates are displayed in the dialog and your position is shown with an arrow icon in the graphics view To store a point you can use the Store button without using the Read button rst Once continuous reading is active the button changes to Stop Continuous which will put you back in standard reading mode Point Store with GPS When using GPS equipment Carlson Field will also report the RMS values and solution status when you take a reading If Carlson Field gives you a message that your RMS values are too high when you try to read a point you can click on the Monitor button to bring up the Monitor window which will give you information on how accurately your position is determined and how many
42. 250 instead of 2 50 The elevation is optional The Read File option is a quick routine to convert a station offset data le into coordinates Offset Prompt With Both Left Right the program will prompt for left and right offsets When prompted for the left and right offset distances and you respond with a zero value no point will be located in that direction The Single Offset option will prompt for one offset per station Enter a right offset with a positive value and a left offset as negative Prompts COGO Commands 139 Offset Point Settings Dialog Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations Select Polyline near endpoint which de nes rst station nea on Select Polyline to Station Measure select polyline 5309 0 4845 0 Station 0 00 5526 0 4917 0 Station 228 63 Distance from beginning station along centerline Enter to end 110 Starting Segment Station 0 0 Ending Segment Station 228 633 Working Line segment 5413 4 4879 64 0 0 Left offset distance lt 10 0 gt 15 Right offset distance lt 15 0 gt 20 Distance from beginning station along centerline Enter to end Enter Pressing Enter with a blank response ends the command Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite If locating points off a polyline the polyline must be drawn prior to execution Calculate Offsets Function Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 140 This command calculates the station and
43. 302 3 Point Curve 46 3D Entity to 2D 30 3D Polyline 42 151 167 169 171 173 175 297 302 3D Viewer Window 35 4 Sided Building 134 135 About Carlson Software 293 Adjust 97 104 106 110 111 115 252 Align 18 20 68 72 73 224 225 241 243 250 252 254 256 261 262 272 312 Align GPS To Local Coordinates 252 alphanumeric point numbers 66 Angle Bearing Code 81 82 Angle Balance 93 98 102 107 110 Apache Lightbar 320 arc length 45 182 Assign Contour Elevations 148 Attach Image to Entity 286 Audit Links 283 Automatic Point Numbering 58 60 86 Auto Points At Interval 146 269 backsight check 230 Backsight Point 81 106 230 barrier polylines 151 Baud Rate 222 228 241 324 342 Bearing Bearing Intersect 84 85 Bearing Distance Intersect 85 Bearing amp Distance 50 80 Beep 225 Benchmark 273 Berm Grades 202 Bezier smoothing 161 Break 21 28 29 217 Building Face Surface 275 Calculate Offsets 140 Carlson Field Con guration 4 343 Carlson Field Directory Structure 2 Carlson Field File Types 4 Carlson Field Icon Menu 220 Carlson Field Registration 4 Center 33 42 44 55 59 102 137 138 141 143 146 164 169 181 185 189 190 192 193 Centerline Conversion 193 Centerline Position 164 166 Change Elevation 23 66 70 Change Layer 39 Change Properties 21 chord length 46 182 Circle 42 43 106 217 Clip 31 Closing Shot 93 94 COGO Commands
44. 4800 respectively The default baud rate for the Impulse 9600 is 9600 and the baud rate for the Impulse 4800 is 4800 The baud rate is set in Con gure Field under Communication Settings To take a shot with the Impulse press the button that is closest to you With the Impulse 4800 Carlson Field will prompt for an azimuth after reading the distance If you do not get data with the Impulse 4800 make sure that the Impulse is con gured for the correct format To check the format press the far key twice The screen should show SYS at the top Then press the close key Keep pressing the middle key to view the different settings until you see IP 200 or Cr 400 Carlson Field needs Cr 400 format So if the Impulse reads IP 200 press the near button once Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 322 InnerSpace Tech depth sounder The communication settings for the InnerSpace Tech depth sounder are 9600 N 8 1 Laser Atlanta To setup Laser Atlanta select Menu on the instrument then Serial and set Baud rate to the same as Carlson Field s and Format to Laser Atlanta Leica Disto The communication settings for the Leica Disto are 9600 E 7 1 Leica GPS System 500 Setting Up a 500 Series Receiver InnerSpace Tech depth sounder 323 1 Connect the antenna cable to the ANT Port on the front of the receiver and to the antenna 2 If you are using the PacCrest radio module screw it in place over Port 1 on the receiver and attach its antenna cabl
45. 5230 63 117 37 19 AR289 3456 91 4405 112 45 5 40 6 00 4471 29 5260 91 113 36 6 AR277 4829 90 2926 223 98 5 40 6 00 4586 51 5245 68 114 85 7 AR92 4137 90 2746 233 88 5 40 6 00 4613 18 5013 33 112 36 8 AR261 2750 91 4405 387 25 5 42 6 00 5000 02 4999 90 100 06 Close P1 Closure Results After Angle Balance Traverse Lines gt 7 SideShots gt 1 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 110 Starting Coordinates N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 Closing Reference Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 Ending Coordinates N 5000 02 E 4999 90 Z 100 06 Azimuth Error 280d13 52 North Error 0 01720 East Error 0 09528 Vertical Error 0 05953 Hz Dist Error 0 09682 Sl Dist Error 0 11365 Total Hz Dist Traversed 2712 29051 Total Sl Dist Traversed 2712 62000 Closure Precision 1 in 28015 Compass Closure Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Distance Bearing 2 5038 44 5710 27 5038 44 5710 29 0 025 S 79d46 08 E 3 4587 91 5791 22 4587 91 5791 26 0 042 S 79d46 08 E 4 4397 32 5726 47 4397 31 5726 52 0 049 S 79d46 08 E 5 4363 04 5230 63 4363 03 5230 69 0 067 S 79d46 08 E 6 4586 51 5245 68 4586 50 5245 75 0 075 S 79d46 08 E 7 4613 18 5013 33 4613 16 5013 42 0 083 S 79d46 08 E 8 5000 02 4999 90 5000 00 5000 00 0 097 S 79d46 08 E Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR2
46. 6 Try increase the RTK Max Age constraint 7 Under Navigation Status verify that the Navigation is valid on both units If either unit does not have a valid position solution correction wills not work 8 Under Monitor Corrections verify that the corrections you re using are arriving regularly If they aren t you may need to reset both units 9 Try con guring the BASE and ROVER again 10 If all else fails Soft Reset both units through the Reset Unit menu After doing so you will have to recon gure the port settings of each device through the Con gure Ports menu and wait a few minutes for the devices to recalculate their position 11 If none of these steps work contact Carlson Software Technical Support Nikon Total Stations Nikon A Series Nikon A Series includes the A5LG A5 A10LG A10 and A20LG A20 Also the C 100 and D 50 have the same communication as the A Series and should be used in the SET mode Nikon Total Stations 333 Nikon 500 Setup 1 Turn on Nikon 2 Turn it Horizontally and Vertically to set it 3 Connect Nikon to Carlson Field NOTE 9 pin serial cable from Nikon to Carlson Field should be NGT type and not SOKTOP 4 In Field go to Con gure Field and under equipment type put Nikon 300 400 500 series 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Field menu go to Con gure Field and click on Communication Settings and check the baud rate On Nikon press MENU then 3 for sett an
47. Communication Status checks the radio port operation and reports the status as working or not communicat ing Con gure Base Station initiates the receiver connected to be a base and begin broadcasting its stationary position and satellite corrections to the rover See Con gure Base Station for All GPS Brands at end of this section Trimble Controls Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 240 Carlson Field works with the following Trimble receivers 4000 series 4700 4800 7400 NT300D GeoExplorer and Path nder The type of receiver is set in the Con gure Field command The options available in the GPS Setup dialog depend on the current type of receiver For the Path nder and GeoExplorer the Altitude Measurement Type chooses between using Ellipsoid or Mean Sea Level as the elevation model in the receiver With the Path nder Carlson Field will activate the receiver when the rst Carlson Field command is run and the receiver will stay active until Carlson Field is exited The reason is that the Path nder will turn off as soon as the COM port is turned off If you need to make Carlson Field turn off the receiver then use the Close Communication With Path nder button With the Path nder DGPS Correction Source selects whether the Path nder will get its Corrections from a local Coast Guard Radio Beacon or from the Racal Satellite Correction ser vice Note that the Racal option must be enabled on the receiver in order to use
48. Cut Sheet Centerline Polyline Starting Point N 4974 232 E 4937 148 Coordinate File d scdev data pile crd Grid File D scdev DATA pile grd Pt Station Offset Elevation Grade Cut Fill Desc 16 0 44 1045 R6 937 570 200 569 333 C 0 867 24 0 89 8227 R32 104 573 100 573 401 F 0 301 34 1 37 3988 L9 167 597 200 596 772 C 0 428 Example Cut Sheet Report note le This results with the as staked coordinate stored in the CRD le and the target coordinate stored in the associated note le The Cut Sheet report can display this stakeout data using the Stakeout Point Comparison report option The horizontal difference between the staked point and the target point can be reported in Bearing Distance Delta X Y or North South East West format Also the elevation difference routines can record the design grade elevation and station offset to the note le when a point is stored to the CRD le This grade data can be reported using the Grade Elevation Report option COGO Commands 143 Survey Survey Design Design Pt Elevation Pt Elevation HzDiff Bearing Cut Fill Desc 4 1002 810 21 587 300 3 877 S54d59 35 E C415 510 Pick Cut Sheet Report Example from Note File by Stakeout Point Comparison Pt Station Offset Elevation Grade Cut Fill Desc 5 5 79 128 R27 215 1006 460 972 296 C 34 164 ROW 6 5 86 466 R24 029 1004 160 972 975 C 31 185 ROW Cut Sheet Report Example from Note File by Grade Elevation Report The Template Design op
49. Drawing 70 73 77 79 UTM 68 223 253 255 View Commands 32 Viewpoint 3D 35 153 157 161 164 Wild Leica 95 Wildsoft 70 94 Window 33 47 64 285 287 296 321 WORK 2 Zeiss 65 Zero Hz 230 313 Zoom In 34 Zoom Out 34 35 Zoom Point s 36 Index 348
50. Drawing Explorer 9 Project Explorer 13 Display Edit File 14 Import DXF File 14 Export DXF le 14 Toolbars 15 Preferences 15 Con gure 15 Command Prompt 16 Edit Commands 16 Undo 16 Erase 16 Delete Layer 16 Copy Move 17 Explode
51. Elevation edit box de nes the beginning elevation that each section grid will start at when the Vertical Stack plotting option is used The Plot Grid toggle determines whether grid lines and labels will be drawn If set to Off the toggle and edit boxes explained below will be grayed out For example you may have derived nal sections with the Earthworks command on the Pro les pulldown menu and want to plot these overlaid on the existing ground sections that you have already plotted with a grid Use this toggle to turn off grid plotting so you don t get duplicate lines and text The Vertical Blank Space edit box allows you to specify the amount of blank space you want between each section that it is plotted with the Vertical Stack Option The Vert Datum Subtractor is the distance that will be subtracted from the lowest elevation of the section before it is rounded by the Vertical Rounder The Vertical Grid Adder is the distance that will be added to the highest elevation of the section for the sheets and pick location options Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 216 The Circle Station Label option will draw the station number with a circle around it on the left and right sides of the section grid The Draw Break Pt Elevations Offsets Descriptions options will label these values along the section line above each point in the section The Draw Elevation at Zero Offset will label the section elevation at offset zero The label is drawn on
52. Equipment Setup and for Connection Mode check remote 11 When done click on OK To put Leica in Tracking On Gun press FNC then ATR and LOCk TCA 1800 1 Turn on Leica 2 Connect Leica to Carlson Field 3 In Field go to Con gure Field and under equipment type put Leica TC Leica TC Series 325 4 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Field menu go to Con gure Field and click on Communication Settings and check the baud rate When Leica is turned on press F3 for conf then enter 3 The baud rate can be changed by pressing F6 for list when done enter CONT In addtion to baud rate parity char length and stop bits should also match NOTE Default in Carlson Field is not the same as default in Leica Leica 1100 To set up the Leica 1100 total station select the following commands on the instrument Main Menu gt Con guration gt communication mode gt GSI parameters In the GSI parameters command copy the following settings baud to Carlson Field s protocol GSI parity to Carlson Field s Terminator CR LF Data Bits to Carlson Field s Stop Bit 1 Geocom Param baud Field s RCS Param baud Field s Also make sure RCS mode is OFF Leica 700 To set commutication settings for Leica 705s go Shift key then Prog Menu key and then to All Settings and last to PC Comm Manual Total Station This method allows you to run Carlson Field in total station mode without being connected to equipment
53. Lon Step 2 Enter Lat Long Ellispsoid Height Input the Latitude Longitude and Ellispsoid Height for the base position Pick North or South for the Latitude and East or West for Longitude Important Note The Latitude and Longitude entered must be within 100 meters of its true location on the globe Ideally the entered base position should be a Latitude Longitude and Ellispsoid Height from an accurate post processed static GPS point or a published NGS monument Step 3 Station ID Optional If you plan on doing post processing you can input a Station ID for the base GPS Antenna location Otherwise just hit OK Reminder Pop Box You are reminded to connect the radio to the proper port Base s Lat Lon Hgt position The Lat Long and Ellispsoid Height for the base position are displayed These will be used for corrections and broadcast to the rover If your radio has a TX light it should begin ashing Step 4 Save Settings to File You have the option to save this base position as a le You ll be able to use this le if you set up in the same spot in the future Field Commands 245 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 246 Method 3 Enter State Plane Coord Step 1 Pick Enter State Plane Coord Reminder Pop Box Current Zone amp Datum You are reminded what State Plane Zone and Datum is loaded If this is incorrect exit Equipment Setup and input correctState Plane Zone and Datum in Con gure Field gt GPS Set
54. MOVE command can be used to translate points on the screen but this does not update the coordinate le To update the coordinate le using the points on the screen use the Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities Rotate Points This command rotates points in a coordinate le The degrees of rotation can be entered directly or calculated from original and destination bearings or azimuths The bearings and azimuths can be entered directly or speci ed by point numbers Any points in the drawing will be updated automatically in addition to updating the coordinate le The rotate commands under the Edit menu can be used to rotate points on the screen but this does not update the coordinate le To update the coordinate le using the points on the screen Points Commands 71 use the Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities Align Points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 72 This command translates based on a source point and destination point and then rotates to align the rst source point and a second source point with the rst destination point and a second destination point The Align command in the Edit menu can be used to align points on the screen but this does not update the coordinate le To update the coordinate le using the points on the screen use the Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite points in a coordinate
55. No Label No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Elevations No Real Z Yes Picked Point Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate of picked point Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate from le symbol point number elevation and description use the layer names PNTMARK PNTNO PNTELEV and PNT DESC With this option the layers for these attributes will start will the current point layer followed by the attribute name For example if the point layer is UTIL then the attribute layers will be UTILMARK UTILNO UTILELEV and UTILDESC This option applies when new points are drawn with commands such as Locate Point and Traverse Another commands that for attribute layers is Change Point Layer Color The Automatic Zoom Center for New Points option will zoom center when a new point is drawn This is useful for keeping the display centered around the current working area The default value for this option can be saved in Con gure under General Settings The Layer Name for Points is the layer assigned to points drawn by any command The Field to Finish Table option allows you to use the code de nitions from Field to Finish for the point symbols and or layers when creating new points with commands such as Traverse For example when creating a point with description EP this option will lookup EP in the Field to Finish table and will use the symbol and layer de ned in this code table instead of the symbol and layer set in Point De
56. PDL s which are being used For most jobs set RTK Dynamics to Dynamic Kinematic unless you are sure that static is more appropriate even small uctuations from wind on the pole can cause problems in Static mode Set motion dynamics to Foot Walking and then select Con gure Base Station 9 In the menu dialog that opens there are a few buttons a Read from GPS Read a position from the GPS and x to that position b Enter Lat Lon Fix to a manually entered Lat Lon position c Enter State Plane Coord Fix to a manually entered State Plane Northing Easting position d Read From File Fix to a position read from a ref le e Cancel Cancel base setup If Read From GPS is selected the software will read once from the GPS receiver and then x to that position If Enter Lat Lon is selected a dialog box will open and a Latitude and Longitude must be input manually If Enter State Plane Coord is selected a dialog box will open allowing the input of a set of Northing Easting coordinates by hand Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 336 Read from File will open a File gt Open dialog and ask for the le name of the le to open Regardless of which option is selected after the position is determined this position will be displayed and dialog boxes will open to enter a station id and the measured base antenna height Once these values are entered base setup is complete and the Exit and Save button can be selected t
57. RD 108 5009 831 5000 750 0 0 RD 109 5018 446 4981 633 0 0 RD 110 5025 000 4959 706 0 0 RD 111 5047 659 4967 765 0 0 RD COGO Commands 123 112 5043 539 4990 254 0 0 RD 113 5034 925 5009 746 0 0 RD 114 5024 438 5032 423 0 0 RD 115 5013 390 5056 599 0 0 RD Resulting points and linework showing Zorro style template Original eld points for template RD can be de ned with up to three points To de ne the symbol insertion points choose the Symbol Pts button in the Edit Code De nition dialog box By default the symbol insertion is de ned by one point at the symbol center 0 0 A one point insertion de nition can be used to insert a symbol offset from the center With a two insertion point de nitions the program will rotate and scale the symbol For example two insertion points can be used to insert a tree symbol to size the tree where the rst point is for the tree center and the second is for the drip line With three insertion point de nitions the program will rotate and scale the symbol in both X and Y For example three points can be used to insert a car symbol with the rst point being the front drivers side the second point as the back driver side to rotate and scale the length and the third as the back passenger side to scale the width Besides the insertion point coordinates you can de ne a description for each point which is used for the drawn point description and is used for prompting in the Insert Multi Point
58. Racal satellite corrections See your dealer for details as to how to do so If Racal Service is selected as the correction source the Racal Region selection will be enabled The region corresponding to the relative location of the receiver should be selected to ensure proper reception of corrections The Path nder and 4700 4800 also feature the ability to select a Satellite Elevation Cutoff All satellites with elevations below this setting will not be used in the nal position calculations even if they are otherwise visible to the reciever For 4700 4800 series receivers the Receiver Type option must be set to the correct model in order for Carlson Field to communicate with the receiver RTK Correction Type selects what format of RTK corrections between the Base and Rover receivers CMR and RTCM formats are available Radio Baud Rate should be set to the same setting as the communication port of the radio connected to the reciever 4800 bps 9600 bps 19 200 bps and 38 400 bps rates are supported Con gure Base Station will con gure the reciever as a base and begin transmitting corrections via the radio Con gure Base for All RTK GPS Brands Within Equipment Setup the Con gure Base Station button is the command that starts the base receiver broadcasting GPS corrections to the rover You must click the Con gure Base Station button in Equipment Setup while your are connected to the base receiver The base needs a set of coordinates
59. Raw File uses a spreadsheet for editing the raw data as shown below Each row of the spreadsheet represents one record of data There are 14 types of data records The type of data record is shown in the rst column Different record types use different numbers of columns Whenever the data record type changes between rows a record header is added to the spreadsheet that describes each column of data in the following row To edit the raw data simply highlight the cell and type in the new value To change the type of record pick on the down arrow in the rst column and choose a new data type from the list To delete a row highlight any cell in the row and hit the Delete key or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu Records can be added pressing the Insert key pressing the down arrow key from the last line in the spreadsheet or by choosing one of the add records from the Add menu The types of records are the following COGO Commands 91 TR Traverse The traverse record contains the occupied point number foresight point number angle mode horizontal angle distance vertical angle and description When processed this record will calculate and store the coordinates for the foresight point Traversing also moves the setup by making the traverse foresight point the next occupied point and the traverse occupied point becomes the next backsight point The different angle modes are NE for northeast bearing SE for southeast SW for southwest NW
60. Resection Function This command calculates point coordinates given the angle and distance measurements to two or three reference points This command only applies to total stations The reference points are speci ed by point number These reference points need to be stored in the current CRD le before running this command This function can be used when setting up the Total Station on an unknown point The command starts with a dialog to choose between using two or three reference points Then for each reference point there is a dialog to enter the reference point number instrument height and target height After entering this data and sighting the target pick the Read Gun button to take a measurement The measurement angles and distance are reported for a check in a dialog When all the measurements are done the results are show in a dialog The results include the calcuated coordinates and the residuals The program calculates the coordinate by averaging the distance distance and angle angle solutions Since there is redundant data the nal calculated coordinate will differ slightly from the individual measurements For example in a 3 point resection there are two different distance distance solutions between the rst second point and between the second third points The program reports the difference between the nal coordinate and the individual solutions as the residuals which act as an indicator whether the data is good High resi
61. Symbol command and in Carlson Software s SurvStar and Carlson Field data collection The coordinates for the insertion point de nitions are for the symbol at unit size To gure these coordinates you will need to open the symbol drawing dwg By default the symbols are located in the Carlson SUP directory For example to make an insertion point for the tree drip line open the tree symbol drawing and nd the coordinate at the edge of the tree symbol Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 124 Three point symbol example in this case 0 5 0 0 Not all of the symbol insertion points need to be used when drawing the points If a code de nition has a three insertion points it is possible to use just the rst two or rst one There are special codes to associate multiple points to the same symbol The rst code point is used as the rst symbol insertion point The ROT code is used to specify the second symbol insertion point A point number can follow the ROT to identify a speci c point Otherwise without the point number the program will use the next point with the current code The SCA code is used to specify the third symbol insertion point and similar to the ROT code a point number after the SCA is optional The ROT and SCA codes should be assigned to the rst point For example consider a code of CAR with a three point symbol insertion de nition If point 1 has a description of CAR ROT SCA
62. The program will prompt you to enter the horizontal angle zenith angle and slope distance This method can be used for demonstration purposes or to work with total stations that cannot connect to Carlson Field For these total stations instead of the automatic connection you can take a shot read the instrument and then manually enter the data into Carlson Field Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 326 As with other total stations the rst step is to run Equipment Setup to establish the occupied point backsight and instrument rod heights before running Carlson Field functions Then in Carlson Field functions when you pick the Read button the program will bring up a dialog for entering the angles and distance The angles should be entered in dd mmss format degrees minutes seconds Mikrofyn Lightbar Carlson Field can use an external Light Bar for determining elevation differences and centerline offsets Light Bars can indicate whether your current position is in cut ll or on grade when set vertically When set horizontally Light Bars can give centerline left right offsets Currently Carlson Field supports a light bar made by Mikrofyn named RD 4 1137551 as well as by Apache that has arrows for up down or left right and a row of lights for on grade The Light Bar must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS Navcom GPS Setup Carlson Field supports Navcom s NCT 2000D GPS message protocol rmware versions 2 6 and later I
63. Triangulation will triangulate all the selected points and the only end points of the lines and polylines Then a Steepest Intersection method is used to assign the grid node elevations from the linework of the triangulation lines and the selected lines and polylines This Steepest Intersection method is described in the Grid from Contour Maps section The Auto Detect method automatically DTM Commands 149 chooses between the Triangulation Only and Intersection with Triangulation methods If the selected surface entities are primarily made of polylines then the Intersection with Triangulation method is used Otherwise the Triangulation Only method is used The Intersection Only method goes directly to the Steepest Intersection method using the selected lines and poly lines The triangulation step is skipped and any selected point data is not used This method can be used for making grids out of polylines such as a contour map as long as the surface is de ned just by contour polylines without needing spot elevation points Skipping the triangulation step makes this method a lot faster especially for large les No elevations are calculated on grid cells that extend beyond the extent of the data Extrapolation can be used to calculate elevations for the grid cells that are beyond the data limits Extrapolation lls in all the grid cells The method to extrapolate uses a safe calculation that tends to average out or level the extra
64. Undo Close lt Pick point or point numbers gt 16 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 16 4582 00 4538 00 100 00 IP1 Undo Close lt Pick To point or point numbers gt Enter Press Enter to end the command Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None 2D Polyline Function This command draws a POLYLINE entity You can provide points numbers from the current CooRDinate le or pick points on the screen to de ne coordinates Basically a PolyLINE is a series of line and or arc segments joined together in one entity or object The polyline is always created at zero elevation Prompts Pick point or point numbers pick point Undo Arc Length lt Pick point or point numbers gt 3 Undo Arc Close Length lt Pick point or point numbers gt An additional prompt line option is provided that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree de ection angle from the last line This can be very useful for plotting buildings Similarly a response of at the above prompt would have drawn a line at 90 degrees to the left of the current line Perpendicular Distance Right 50 Arc Length Close Undo lt Pick To point or point number gt C This closes the polyline and ends the command Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Draw Commands 41 3D Polyline Function This command draws a 3D POLYLINE entity You can provide points numbers from the current CooRDinate le or pick p
65. a reference le ref that can be used later in Con gure Base Station The purpose is to allow moving the base station based on the current base setup In this case Create Base REF File would be run from the rover receiver while in xed position Then the base could be moved to this point without having to redo the local coordinate alignment Con gure Base Station initiates the receiver attached to be a base and begin broadcasting its stationary position and satellite corrections to the rover See Con gure Base Station for All GPS Brands at end of this section Leica GPS Setup Carlson Field works with the following Leica GPS receivers System 500 GS50 MC1000 and MK31 The type of Leica receiver is set in the Con gure Field command The options available in the GPS Setup dialog depend on the current type of receiver Leica Radio Port is the port on the receiver where the radio is attached usually 2 or 3 Port 1 is usually the one attached to the computer For the System 500 receivers you can also set the Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 236 radio baud rate stop bits and parity parameters For the system 500 receivers you need to specify the antenna types used at both the base and rover receivers This antenna type sets the phase center offsets for the antennas which can effect the reported elevations by as much as 0 25 foot if not set properly Field Commands 237 Cell phones can also be used with Leica GPS equipm
66. adjust the offsets and elevations If for example you want to shift the centerline but not the elevations enter the plus or minus amount you want to translate and when prompted for the elevation enter zero The Delete Stations option will remove a station or range of stations from the in memory Stations List When prompted by the dialog above enter a single station or enter a range by entering the smallest or lowest station number separated by a dash or any non numeric character and the largest or highest station number After specifying the range select the OK button to proceed with the removal or select the Cancel button to abort the deletion process Since the station editor data is stored in virtual memory if you accidentally delete a range Quit the editor with out saving the stations to disk Then recall the original le Select the Sort button option to sort the station numbers into ascending order and sort the offsets and elevations in the individual station records offsets are sorted from left to right When sections are derived from the Sections from Surface Model command they are already sorted but when sections are digitized or input manually they occur in the order that you digitized them so for proper plotting and earthworks you may want to run the sort option before processing The Combine button option is used to bring together in one record slot multiple occurrences of the same station number This can occur when using the Digi
67. adjusted using sky and sun control in the middle of the controls window This control represents position of the sun in the sky if looked from above Therefore the position of the sun in the center means sun in a zenith and position near the edge of the circle means the sun near horizon To move sun simply drag it to new location or just click there To return to the AutoCad screen click on the Exit button Pull Down Menu Location Display Prerequisite Entities to display Keyboard Command cube File Name lsp cube arx Viewpoint 3D Function This command allows the user to view the drawing from any position in 3D space The command comes up with a dialog box which allows the user to select the point of view This can be de ned by selecting two parameters the View Commands 35 angle of view relative to the X axis and the inclination of view relative to the XY plane The rst parameter can be selected to be an angle between 0 and 360 degrees and stands for the cir cular angle around the W axis from where the drawing is being viewed By default this angle is 270 degrees which means that the default view is from the negative Y axis This parameter can be selected by directly entering the angle in the edit box or by using the pick tool on the pointing device to select the angle The selection will be shown as a line in the selected direction in the dialog box The second parameter that can be set is the position above or belo
68. an unlimited number of lines of text to a point number With Point Notes ON in the Store Point command the program will prompt for notes after collecting a point The notes are stored in a le that uses the name of the coordinate le with a NOT extension For example a coordinate le called JOB5 CRD would have a note le called JOB5 NOT Coordinates in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the point number northing easting eleva tion and description in the point notes as well This may be used as a backup or reference to coordinate data as it Field Commands 225 was originally stored GPS RMS in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the horizontal and vertical RMS values in the note eld for the point This offers a good check on the quality of the shot GPS DOPs in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the DOP dilution of precision values as reported from the GPS receiver Rod Height in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the rod height value in the note eld for the point Project Scaler in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the project scale factor in the note eld for the point Time Date in Point Notes This option will store the time and date that the point was stored in the note le Carlson Field will read the time from the computer Drawing Options control how points are drawn by default It control
69. and press ENT For Measure ref obj press ENT if you want a reference object otherwise press NO Than the instrument is going to say remove keyboard however the keyboard can stay on 9 After Geodimeter display screen turns itself off it s ready for Carlson Field CARLSON FIELD 1 In Con gure Field under equipment type there should be Geodimeter In Communication Settings Baud Rate should be set to 9600 2 After Con gure Field go to Equipment Setup and make sure GeoRadio is checked and the channel station and remote address is the same as it is in the total station NOTE We recommend using channel 3 3 If calibration box is checked the instrument will calibrate to turn of calibration the box should be unmarked 4 In setup there is also an option to turn on off tracking lights Geodimeter 600 For Direct Connection 1 Connect the instrument to the battery pack and the control unit to Carlson Field 2 Under Field go to Con gure Field and place Geodimeter in Equipment type 3 Click on General Settings make sure that the baud rate is set to 9600 Geodimeter 321 4 Exit Con gure Field 5 Go to Equipment Setup and check Connect to Station and click OK Now you are ready Impulse Laser There are two types of Impulse Lasers from Laser Tech One has a compass for horizontal angles The other has only a laser range nder for distance These are refered to in Carlson Field as Impulse 9600 and Impulse
70. and 5C base position which should be arriving every 16 seconds Navcom GPS Setup 329 In CMR Correction Mode the relevant messages are cmr0 correction which should be arriving every second and cmr1 base position which should be arriving every 30 seconds In RTCM RTK Correction Mode the relevant messages are RTCM message 22 and either messages 18 and 19 or messages 20 and 21 depending on your base s RTCM setup Messages 18 21 should be arriving every second Message 22 should be arriving every 6 seconds In RTCM DGPS Correction Mode the age of correction messages 1 and 9 cannot be monitored here Click Refresh to load the latest values from the device Con gure Base Submenu Before clicking Con gure Base rst choose the type of corrections you want to use When you click Con gure Base all steps necessary to con guring a base will be performed You will be prompted for a Base Position and a Radio ID Upon completion the unit status should read BASE If it does not or if an error occurs during base con guration try again or consult the Base Rover con guration troubleshooting section below Con gure Rover Submenu Before clicking Con gure Rover rst choose the type of corrections you want to use When you click Con g ure Rover all steps necessary to con guring a base will be performed Upon completion the unit status should read ROVER If it does not or if an error occurs during rover con g
71. and displayed Step 3 Base Antenna Height Enter the vertical height of the base antenna Step 4 Station ID Optional Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 248 If you plan on doing post processing you can input a Station ID for the base GPS Antenna location Otherwise just hit OK Reminder Pop Box You are reminded to connect the radio to the selected port Base s Lat Lon Hgt Position The Lat Long and Ellispsoid Height for the base position are displayed This position will be used to calculate the correction that are sent to the rover If your radio has a TX light it should begin ashing Field Commands 249 Method 5 Read From Alignment File Step 1 Pick Read From Alignment File Step 2 Select Alignment File to Load Pick the alignment DAT le to be loaded Use the up arrow folder to browse elsewhere for the DAT le Step 3 Select Alignment Point The program will display a list of points in the alignment le Pick the point from this list Step 4 Base Antenna Height Enter the vertical height of the base antenna Step 5 Station ID Optional If you plan on doing post processing you can input a Station ID for the base GPS Antenna location Otherwise just hit OK Reminder Pop Box You are reminded to connect the radio to the selected port Base s Lat Lon Hgt Position The Lat Long and Ellispsoid Height for the base position are displayed This position will be used to calculate the c
72. and grade S Road Commands 203 Example of super elevation of 4 to the right for a divided road with a Max Difference of 7 The normal template is shown above The Normal to Super Pivot Point is MED and the Super to Normal Pivot Point is EP The result is that the EP segment is in super and the SH and MED segments are at normal slope On the left the SH segment is at the normal 10 the EP segment is at the super elevation slope of 4 and the MED segment wants to be at 4 but ends up at 3 because this meets the Max Difference requirement On the right side the MED segment starts at the normal 4 then the EP segment transitions into the super 4 and then the SH transitions back to normal which results in a 3 slope because of the Max Difference requirement will be at normal grade The High and Low Pivot Point options allow for different transition points depend ing on which side is raised by the super elevation The Max Percent Slope Difference is the maximum difference between the super elevation grade and the normal grade at the pivot point For example with a Max Percent Slope Difference of 7 if the super elevation grade is 6 and is followed by grade returns to normal slope then the normal slope will be 1 or higher even if the normal design slope is less than 1 If the grades do not start from the center in super then the Divided Roads option can be used With this option the grades start from the center as normal and then transit
73. and the GPS HRMS VRMS The distance azimuth and cut ll from the current position to the target are also reported Carlson Field also breaks down this distance into how far north south and how far east west to go Finally based on your current heading the program tells you whether to turn right turn left or that you are on line In the graphics view the large X shows the point being staked out and the triangle represents your position A temporary line is drawn between your current position and the target In Con gure Field gt Stakeout Settings there is an option to auto zoom in as you approach the target point Otherwise you can use the arrow keys to pan the display and the Page Up Down keys to zoom out and in Field Commands 267 Total Station Stakeout Before starting the stakeout be sure that the instrument is setup with correct occupied point backsight and instru ment height This setup data is displayed in the third line of the dialog You can pick the Setup button to change the instrument setup After you click Start to begin staking the point Carlson Field changes the dialog box to the one shown below The dialog shows the angle to turn the gun and the horizontal distance to the target Turn the instrument to this angle and position the rodman at this angle and distance Then pick the Read button to take a measurement Carlson Field will then report the horizontal distance and cut ll from the current position to the targe
74. attributes including a description When Field to Finish draws the points the point description from the data le is processed to match a code The code then de nes the description that is drawn with the point For example consider a code of UP with a description of POLE and a data point with the description UP The data point description UP would be matched with the code UP and the point would end up being drawn with the description POLE A special character the divide key can be used for an unprocessed description to append Everything after the is added directly to the point description and is not considered a code For example a data point with the description UP 150 with the same code UP de nition above would be drawn with the description POLE 150 Multiple codes are de ned by including each code in the point description eld separated by a space A single data point can be used in different lines by assigning it multiple codes For instance a point might be part of both a curb line and a driveway line with a description of CURB DRW See point 10 in the example Since Field to Finish processes spaces in the description as multiple codes you should avoid spaces in the descriptions except for where multiple codes are intended or after the character Also codes can t have spaces because they would get spilt into multiple codes For example a code for light post could not be LGT P
75. can specify the range of point numbers to export and lter the output by description matching After selecting the OK button another dialog appears that allows you to specify a new text ASCII le or to append data into an existing le Then the standard le selection dialog allows you to specify the export le name Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite A Coordinate File CRD Points Commands 65 Set Coordinate File Function This command allows the user to set the name of the current coordinate le This le is used by different commands that compute store and recall the coordinates The le has an extension of CRD and by default is stored in the con gured data subdirectory When prompted for the name if you type in a path name the le will be stored in the speci ed path If you don t specify a path then the default path that is con gured in the Con gure command will be used The Existing button is the default and can be selected by pressing Enter note the thicker highlighting around the button or select either button by clicking on it with your pointing device The underlined characters are the short cut keys that can be selected by the character and pressing Enter Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite None CooRDinate File Utilities Function This command allows you to manipulate the coordinates stored in a CRD le One of the most important options is the Update CRD File from D
76. circle symbol The Use Page option will add a page number to the bottom of each page in the report The CRD File Pt Format option sets point number format for coordinate les as either numeric only or alphanu meric Numeric point numbers are numbers like 5 6 7 whereas alphanumeric point numbers can also contain char acters such as 5A 5B 5C The settings under Drawing Setup only apply to new drawings because the Drawing Setup settings are automatically stored in existing drawings in a block called SURVSETV This allows drawings to have individual defaults settings for Drawing Setup Pull Down Menu Location File Prerequisites None File Commands 15 Command Prompt Function The Comand Prompt routine brings up a command prompt so that you can type in commands in the text window This is another method for starting commands besides picking them from the menu or toolbars To list the command names enter at the Command gt prompt To exit command prompting press the Esc key or type Ctrl C Pull Down Menu Location File Prerequisites None Edit Commands Undo Function The Undo command can undo com mands sequentially in the reverse order Erase Function The Erase command erases all objects lying within a user speci ed window The command prompts the user to choose the window to select objects to be erased Delete Layer Function This command will ERASE all the entities on the speci ed layers a
77. coordinate le if one is not already speci ed This is the le from where coordinates of points are taken when point numbers are entered in the program This would also be the le where new point numbers are created and stored in the course of the program Once the CRD le is speci ed the main dialog of the program appears which shows a list of the centerline elements The Load button loads an existing CL le for review or editing The listbox in the dialog shows a list of all the elements in the centerline identifying them as either a line curve or spiral element and reporting the ending station northing and easting of the element The Add button adds a new element after the highlighted element while the Edit button edits the highlighted element The Remove button removes the highlighted element from the centerline The Save button allows the user to save the CL le currently being edited The Save button always prompts you for the le name to save hence it works like the Save As button in most routines The Quit button checks whether the le currently being edited is saved or not and quits the routine When the Add button is clicked the routine prompts the user for the type of the element to be added Currently there are three choices available a Line a Curve or a Spiral The dialog for every type of element shows the point ID the northing easting and station of the start point of the el
78. crd le for processing the vertices of the 3D polyline Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt Specify vertices for the 3D polyline by giving the X Y Z coordinates directly or picking a point on the screen If 3 coordinates are speci ed the vertex will be located directly if a point is picked from the screen and the user had responded Yes at the Prompt for Elevations prompt then the program will give the following prompt Elevation lt 0 0 gt Specify elevation of this particular vertex Note that the program does not accept zero elevations If the user had responded No at the Prompt for Elevations prompt then the polyline is treated as a 2D polyline and will be drawn likewise Undo Close lt Pick point or point numbers gt After two vertices are speci ed the prompt also includes an option where the user can ask the polyline to be closed that is the next vertex which will also be the last will be located at the very rst vertex Specify as many vertices are needed for the polyline and press Enter whenever the polyline needs to be closed Draw another 3D polyline Yes lt No gt The user has the option of drawing another 3D polyline but the settings and options will be the same as for the previous polyline Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Circle Function This command draws a Circle entity by 4 methods 3P 2P TTR Center Point The 3P option prompts for 3 points through
79. create points by picking the point coordinate on the screen For example you could set the Object Snap to EndPoint and pick the end point of a building polyline to create a point at the building corner Carlson points consist of a block insert with attributes a point symbol and an AutoCAD Point entity which is used for picking the point by OSNAP Node in other commands The point insert includes a point number elevation and description These attributes are in the PNTMARK PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC layers The Carlson points are also in an overall layer as speci ed in the dialog This layer setup allows you to freeze a group of points by the main layer name or freeze point attributes for all the points in the drawing For example freezing layer PNTS Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 60 would freeze all the points in this layer Freezing layer PNTELEV would freeze the point elevation attribute for all the points The Symbol Rotation Azimuth is the rotation angle that will be used for the point symbols This angle is used in a counterclockwise direction relative to the current twist screen The Notes option works with the note le not associated with the current CRD le The note le contains unlimited point descriptions in addition to the xed 32 character point descriptions in the CRD le When creating points with Notes on the program will prompt for point notes to be stored with the point When drawing existing point w
80. de ned in the current Template Database Use the GIS Database Settings and De ne Template Database commands to setup the tables Once you select a table to process the elds for that table are displayed in a spreadsheet format Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 276 The bottom portion of the dialog has features for attaching images to the entity Images can be linked by selecting existing image les or photos can taken by using the Capture button if a digital camera is connected Different digital cameras can be used by picking Pick or Set Camera Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisites MDB GIS Prompting must be created in De ne Template Database and points or entites must exist to link GIS information to GIS Data Inspector Function This command displays attached to drawing entities in real time When you move the cursor over an entitiy with GIS data selected data elds are displayed in a tooltip box next to the cursor For data attached to closed polylines you can move the cursor anywhere inside the polyline to show the data The routine starts by prompting you to select entities The entities that you select will be used by GIS Inspector In the case of a large drawing this selection allows you to limit the entities for inspector to a local area instead of having to process the whole drawing Then after reading the entities you can move the cursor around the drawing to inspect the GIS data You can also use the arrow
81. deleted from the hard drive The Add option will add other older or non referenced data les to the list of les associated with the drawing File Commands 9 Example 2 As we do more work in the le Estates dwg data les will begin to proliferate and will appear in Drawing Explorer Shown below is a more comprehensive list of les with occasional examples of multiple les within the same category Categories themselves oat to the top of the list if any of their data les have been used more recently than data les in other categories Note that there is even a Miscellaneous Files category that includes ASCII point les created by the command Export Text ASCII File Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 10 When many data les are involved the Report option becomes very useful Here you can use the Report Formatter to display in any order the File Name File Type Date last modi ed Time last modi ed Size in bytes and whether it is Found i e exists in the speci ed directory For example if a le was created in a certain directory but moved using Windows Explorer to another directory without being further altered in Carlson it would show up here as not found No would appear in the Found column The Report Formatter can be used to move to the right side all items that are desired for reporting with the up down options used to set the report order e g File type rst File name second etc
82. dialog will pop up with options to overwrite the existing point number to use another point number or to cancel storing the new point The Point Number eld will automatically increment after storing the point The Description is an optional eld for identifying the point The maximum length of the description is 32 char acters Besides naming the point the description can also be used to with Field To Finish to draw linework and to determine the symbol of the point in the drawing When the Field To Finish option is set on in Options the program will lookup the description in the current code table If the description matches one of the codes then the code can determine the symbol layer format of the point when it is drawn Otherwise the defaults in the Point Setting section of the Options dialog are used for the point symbol layer and format To store the new point to the coordinate le and draw the point pick the Store button At the time that Store is applied the program uses the point number description linework options and special options currently set in the dialog You can also use the Read amp Store button to do both functions in one step With this method the program will take a measurement and if the measurement is successful then the point will be stored immediately The Code button brings up a list of point descriptions from the current Field To Finish code table You can select a code from the list to set this code as
83. displayed To link all the blocks to one table highlight the table name from the list and pick the Select Second Key button Or to link the blocks to various table names based on a block attribute highlight the attribute name and pick the Select Second Key button This attribute value for the blocks will then need to contain the database table name For example consider a block for electric utility data with two attributes ID and TABLE The ID is a number to use as the rst key and the TABLE is the table name ie POLE BOX Once the key elds are set pick the OK button to create the links Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite Block entities with attribute IDs and a database table with matching IDs Erase Links Function This command removes all the GIS links from the selected entities polylines blocks etc Pull Down Menu Location GIS Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 282 Prerequisite Entities with GIS links Audit Links Function This command checks the GIS links for the selected entities in the drawing to make sure that the template database output database and table exist Any invalid links can be erased from the entities or be xed by selecting another database or table For example if a database le mdb has moved to another directory then you can use this command to specify the new location The routine starts by prompting you to select the entities to check If no errors are found then the routine
84. elevations When you choose not to extrapolate no volume is calculated for the grid cells left without elevations In general extrapolation is not very accurate and should be avoided whenever possible Sometimes you may get small amounts of cut in stockpiles that should only be ll or small amounts of ll in pits that should only be cut These extraneous quantities are due to extrapolation at the border and should be small enough to be ignored When inclusion or exclusion polylines are used the program will automatically extrapolate the grids In addition to writing a volume report to the le printer or screen there are several volume report options Write Difference Grid File will create a GRD le of the elevation difference of the two grid les Draw Difference Con tours will create a contour map of the difference or depth between the two grid les Draw Elevation Difference in Each Cell will plot the elevation difference at the grid corners which is the same as the Elevation Difference routine Draw Volume in Each Cell will plot the calculated volume for each grid cell and is an excellent way to verify the volume calculation If a cell contains both cut and ll both values will be plotted Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes calculates the cut and ll between different elevation ranges The Draw Cut Fill Color Map routine will solid ll color each grid cell with different shades based on the average cut or ll in the cell Red shades
85. here GIS prompting les need to be structured as described in section 5C Add Option brings up a pop up dialog box titled New GIS Option To remove a value in Options for value highlight the value and pick Remove Option To add a GIS prompting line highlight the line above where you want the new line to go Pick Add to bring up the pop up dialog box titled GIS Field Record shown above Enter in the Field Name Prompt Default Value and Options for Values and pick OK Remember to follow the structure in Section 5C The newly added GIS prompting line is inserted below the highlighted line The Move Up and Move Down buttons change the sequence of GIS prompting Remove deletes the highlighted GIS prompting line Save and Save As store the currently loaded GIS le to the default name or to a new name Chapter 3 Field User Guide 308 7 NOT File GIS Data Storage and Structure Note les NOT store the GIS data for the points Note les are created in Carlson Field automatically when Store Data in Note File is toggled on in Con gure Field gt GIS Options Besides the GIS data the note les can also store survey data such as GPS RMS and PDOP The survey data to store in the note le is speci ed in the Con gure Field gt Point Settings command One Note le contains all GIS data and Point Store information for all the eld collected points of a job These Note les always have the same name as the currently loaded coordi
86. if the Projection Type and Zone settings are wrong If you have done survey work and then realize that they are set wrong then your point coordinates are wrong but your work is not wasted Carlson Field records the latitude longitude and height of every point in a RW5 le You can input the correct projection zone settings later and reprocess your data using the Edit Process Raw File command Model For UTM this option sets the ellipsoid constants for converting the lat lon to UTM coordinates The following is a list of the models Field Commands 223 Model Earth Radius m Flattening factor Airy 1830 6377563 396 0 00334085064038 Modi ed Airy 6377340 189 0 00334085064038 Bessel 1841 6377397 155 0 00334277318217 Clarke 1866 ellipsoid 6378206 4 0 00339007530409 Clarke 1880 6378249 145 0 00340756137870 Everest EA India 1830 6377276 345 0 00332444929666 Everest EB Brunei amp E Malaysia 6377298 556 0 00332444929666 Everest ED W Malaysia amp Singapore 6377304 063 0 00332444929666 International 1924 6378388 0 0 00336700336700 Helmert 1906 6378200 0 0 00335232986926 Hough 1960 6378270 0 0 00336700336700 Geodetic Reference System 1980 6378137 0 0 00335281068118 South American 1969 and Australian National 6378160 0 0 00335289186924 World Geodetic System 1972 6378135 0 0 00335277945417 World Geodetic System 1984 6378137 0 0 00335281066475 Transformation The transformation in the Align Local Coordinates command can either be by pla
87. in Distance to have the subgrade have a width of the EP grade Also expressions can be used such as EP 5 to go the distance of the EP segment plus 5 This is especially useful for template transitions so that if the EP grade varies the subgrade width will automatically adjust Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite None Example of Wrap Around Subgrade Draw Typical Template Function This command draws and labels a template The ll treatment is shown on the left and cut on the right All the cut ll slopes are shown for the different depths when multiple slopes are de ned There are options to draw the normal template super elevation or details of different sections First pick a template le to draw Then choose which type to draw and the dimensioning option Next click the Draw button and pick a blank area on the screen to draw the template Prompts Template File to Read Specify a template le Typical Section dialog Choose your options and click Draw Pick Starting Position pick a point Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite A template le tpl le Curb Detail Road Commands 205 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 206 Normal Typical Template Typical Template with Left Super Elevation Template Transition Function This command creates a template transition le tpt le that can be used in the Template Stakeout and Slope Staking commands The template transition is associated wi
88. in front of or behind the point The total station will take the shot and then Carlson Field will ask you how to move the point in or out and the distance If the prism is in front of the point choose out If it s behind the point choose in To do a Left Right offset have the rodman stand a measured distance to one side of the point After taking the shot Carlson Field will ask whether to offset right or left If you are at the total station looking at the prism and the point you are after is to the right of the prism as you re looking at them choose right offset Otherwise choose left offset Choose Store to strore this point after the offset is done The D amp R option stands for Direct and Reverse When this box is checked Carlson Field will take sets of four shots to determine the coordinates of the next point Two shots are taken for both the backsight point and the foresight point one direct shot one shot with the total station reversed This yields a more accurate reading Two options are available for the order of shots when doing a D amp R The rst is Backsight Direct Backsight Reverse Foresight Reverse Foresight Direct The other option is Backsight Direct Foresight Direct Foresight Reverse Backsight Reverse Carlson Field also offers the option of shooting multiple sets of Direct amp Reverse for even greater accuracy The Shoot Distances For Reverse Shots option determines whether to take distance measurements on the foresi
89. is done When there are errors a dialog box appears Each GIS link is de ned by a template database output database and table For each combination of these three settings that have an error this dialog displays the template database output database and table name from the entities The number of GIS link combinations with errors is shown in Table Used for Links eld ie 1 of 2 The template database is shown at the top If the template database link is broken then use the Select New Template MDB button to assign another template database le The output database also has a Select New Output MDB to set the output database le In the lower left of the dialog is a list of the table names from the output database You can choose the table to use for the link from this list The Fix Links for Current Table button will assign the template database output database and table name from the dialog to all the selected entities The Erase Links from Table button will remove these broken links from the entities The Go to Other Table button will process the next GIS link combination with errors Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite Entities with GIS links GIS Commands 283 Import SHP File Function The Import Export SHP le routines convert ESRI SHP les into Carlson GIS links and back The Import SHP command reads database information from ESRI Arcview SHP les and loads these SHP les into Field with the database informati
90. known point 1 and ends at the known point 14 In this case there is no angle balance shot The closing shot is from 3 to 4 with point 4 being the closing point Point 14 is the closing reference point COGO Commands 113 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 114 Process Results Raw le gt d scdev data tsurvey rw5 CRD le gt d scdev data tsurvey crd Compass Closure Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Distance Bearing 2 5013 76 5711 18 5013 78 5711 13 0 047 N 63d21 19 W 3 4560 69 5776 42 4560 72 5776 35 0 078 N 63d21 19 W 4 4372 46 5705 08 4372 50 5705 00 0 091 N 63d21 19 W Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR133 5324 89 4050 711 27 5 32 6 00 5013 78 5711 13 103 29 3 AR262 5506 89 3236 457 74 5 43 6 00 4560 72 5776 35 106 36 4 AR208 5712 89 1803 201 30 5 40 6 00 4372 50 5705 00 108 22 Compass Report from Open Traverse example Pull Down Menu Location COGO COGO Commands 115 Prerequisite None Field to Finish Function This command turns data collector eld notes into a nal AutoCad drawing by matching the descriptions of the eld points with user de ned codes The points are brought into the drawing with attributes de ned by the code including layer symbol size line type etc Two les are used in Field to Finish a data le and a code le The data
91. lt 1st distance gt 46 72 Select 2nd base point Pick point or point number 2 Points lt 2nd distance gt 38 96 Pick near solution or Enter A or B pick a point Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite None A B Interpolate Points Divide Between Points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 86 Function This command divides the distance between two points and inserts one of the point symbols at the speci ed dis tances It can also interpolate elevations To interpolate elevations the points picked must be at their real z axis elevation Prompts Interpolate Elevations lt Y gt Enter Selected points must be 3D points must be at an acad elevation Point w elevation to calculate from Pick point or point number 3 2nd Point w elevation Pick point or point number pick point Number of Segments Divisions 5 The command then locates 4 points Pull Down Menu Location COGO Prerequisite Execute Drawing Setup to set defaults Locate two points to divide between and if you want to interpolate elevation they should have a real Z axis elevation Keyboard Command divlin File Name lsp divlin lsp Interpolate Entity Function This command divides the distance of a LINE ARC or PolyLINE and locates points at the computed distances It also interpolates elevations To interpolate elevations the points picked must have an AutoCad or real Z elevation The gure b
92. magnetic compass for the horizontal angle The magnetic north can vary from the north of your coordinate system The Laser Alignment Azimuth is added to the measured laser azimuth to adjust for the difference To set the alignment azimuth specify a reference backsight direction by either entering an azimuth or by Field Commands 261 point number Then choose the Read Laser For Alignment button and take a laser shot towards the back sight The program will compare the azimuth from the laser with the reference backsight to gure the alignment azimuth When the alignment azimuth is set pick the Go button Carlson Field then listens for measurements on the laser gun port To take a shot sight the target point and press the laser trigger Carlson Field will read the laser measurement and read the GPS position The laser angle and distance are combined with the GPS position for the new point coordinates To return to regular GPS Point Store choose the Exit button Point Store with Total Stations Before taking measurements with total stations you need to specify the occupied point coordinates of the instrument the backsight and the height of the instrument This current setup data is shown in the OC BK HI line in the dialog Also icons are draw to show the occupied point and backsight direction in the drawing view The Setup button at the top of this dialog brings up the Total Station Setup dialog where you can change your occupied point
93. multiple pro les by using the append option in Pro le from 2D Polyline 3D Points Surface Model or Input Edit Pro le File commands Then one call to Draw Pro le will draw all the pro les in this PRO le either on the same grid or on separate grids that Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 196 are drawn one above the other Prompts Pro le File Selection Dialog Select the pro le to draw Pro le Settings Dialog Do your thing Bottom Elevation of Pro le lt 790 0 gt Press Enter This speci es the bottom elevation for the vertical axis Top Elevation of Pro le lt 870 0 gt Press Enter This speci es the top elevation for the vertical axis Pick Starting Point For Axis lt 300 0 790 0 gt Pick a point This speci es the corner point of where the pro le grid will be drawn Pull Down Menu Location Pro les Prerequisite A PRO le Design Template Function This command creates a template de nition le tpl le The template le can then be applied in the Template Stakeout and Slope Staking commands The template is designed using the dialog shown below The top portion shows the template as you create it In the middle is a row of icons which are the building blocks of the template They can be choosen in any order by clicking on the icon In the bottom of the dialog are four list boxes that list the elements of the template The surface elements are listed in order starting from the cen
94. multiple times Prompts Select objects pick object or enclose objects in a selection window press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Base point or displacement pick base point of shift by clicking on the drawing with the mouse Second point of displacement pick base a point so that these two points de ne the distance and direction of shift Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Entities to Copy Move Explode Function The Explode command splits an objects into its components However it has no visual effect For example exploding forms simple lines and arcs from polylines and other grouped objects though there is no shifting of these component objects The properties associated with the complex objects are lost like the width of polylines area of Edit Commands 17 closed polygons etc while the properties of individual lines or arcs may appear like the line colors or lengths of individual lines Prompts Select objects pick object or enclose objects in a selection window press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Complex Entities to explode polylines polygons grouped objects etc Align Function This command aligns objects by mapping points from source point s to destination point s The user is prompted for the object to be aligned Once the object is selected the user needs to specif
95. needed only in the case of three dimansional alignment 3rd destination point pick the point that the third source point is intended to go to Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Text entities to be changed Trim Function The Trim command allows the user to cutoff an object precisely at an intersection or an implied intersection with other objects Prompts Select cutting objects pick cutting edges or enclose cutting edges in a selection window press lt ENTER gt after selecting required edges to end selection Select objects to trim project edge undo pick objects that intersect the selected cutting edge The portion of the selected object will be erased upto its intersection with the cutting edge If more than one cutting edge is selected Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 18 then the portion of the object between the selected cutting edges will be erased The project option allows user to select projection mode UCS View or none The undo option cancels the last action of trimming Select objects to trim project edge undo select e for edge to cut by an implied edge that is at a possible point of intersection of the cutting edge Extend No extend select e for extend option so that the current cutting edge is extended to a possible point of intersection with objects to be cut Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Object to trim and an edge or implied edge where it cuts o
96. of the Street Intersection commands to draw and calculate the intersection use this routine to locate points on the arcs that make up the corner radii of the intersection Prompts Entities to Points dialog Choose the point settings Entities to Process Choose the types of entities to process Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 88 Select arcs points lines and or polylines Select objects select entities Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite Entities Points lines polylines etc to locate points on SurvCE SurvStar Data Trans Before starting this routine the SurvStar or Dozer 2000 program should be in le transfer mode In SurvStar go to File Utilities and choose File Transfer In Dozer 2000 go to Transfer and choose Transfer with Computer COGO Commands 89 When selecting the routine for the rst time the Options dialog will appear From this rst popup window make sure that all of your communication and transfer settings are correct Especially check that your COM Port is set correctly as this is the most critical and most often incorrect setting If you plan to transfer large les you may wish to increase the baud rate setting for faster transfer SurvStar will automatically adjust on the data collector end and reconnect at the new baud rate Be sure to click Save Options before going on so that all settings are remembered the next time and you can bypass this options screen Also keep in mind that
97. offsets of point coordinates from a centerline The points to calculate the offsets of can be stored in a CRD le or picked on the screen When picking points the station and offset of the current position of the crosshairs is displayed in the lower screen menu The centerline can be de ned by either a polyline by two point numbers or by centerline le cl The Display Offsets Ahead Behind Line Segments option shows offsets for points or picked points located before the beginning station and after the ending station of the centerline There are options to store the station and offset values in the point descriptions of a coordinate le and to draw station offset labels The Sort Report by Stations option will report the station offsets in station order no matter what order the points were calculated The Report Point Coordinates option will include the point northing and easting in the report The Report Formatter option allows you to customize the layout of the report elds and can be used to output the data to Excel or Access The Report Grade Elevation From option will calculate an elevation for each point from a 3D polyline grid le grd or triangulation t le To Use this option the Report Formatter must be toggled on The grade elevation is reported and compared with the point elevation to report the cut ll For the 3D polyline option the grade elevation is calculated by nding the elevation at the point on the 3D polyline
98. optical quality of the instrument The Target and Instrument Centering Errors are the distance off the point due to faulty centering The EDM Constant Error is the accuracy of the instrument distance measurements The EDM Scaler Error is entered in parts per million for the increased error in longer measurements The program will calculate the weights for each distance and angle measurement using these measurement errors The control points points to adjust distance and angle measurements with weights are reported You can edit these measurements and weights using the Edit Least Squares Data routine or go directly to the Process Least Squares Data routine Process gt Edit Least Squares Data This routine edits the points measurements and weights stored in the LSQ le associated with the current RW5 le The editor works through the dialog shown You can edit add or remove the control points adjust points angle measurements or distance measurements The program does not check that the editing is valid So you need to make sure that your changes keep a good set of least squares data i e don t delete a needed control point The Distance Error button allows you to set the distance standard error weights for all the distance measurements to the same value Likewise the Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 102 Angle Error button sets the standard error weights for all the angle measurements Process gt Process Least Squares Data This rou
99. options for Stakeout de ned in Con gure Field gt Stakeout Settings These options should be set by Con gure Field before running Stakeout See the Con gure Field section of the manual for a description of the stakeout options There are four ways to de ne the target point for stakeout The rst method is to specify a point number from the current coordinate le To do this click on the Point Number button and type in the point number in the dialog The second method is to give a station and an offset from a centerline The program will prompt for a centerline le CL and then the station and offset You can also specify the station interval for automatically incrementing to the next stakeout point See the Roads section of this manual for how to create centerline les The third method is to graphically pick the point from the drawing Select Pick Point and a dialog box allows you to pick different snaps endpoint midpoint center node point or intersection This will help you pick your desired point more accurately For example you can select endpoint and then pick on a polyline corner to stakeout that the polyline endpoint See the Object Snap command is this manual for more on snaps The fourth method is to simply type in the target point coordinates in the Northing Easting and Elevation elds Once the stakeout point is set click the Start button and Carlson Field begins the stakeout routine The format of the stakeout sc
100. point is known then the tangent out can be entered by bearing instead of by forward tangent point Central PI and forward tangent points are not displayed from the CL le They have to be entered by the user and are valid only for that particular edit session that is they are not remembered the next time the le is loaded The Curve Edit Mode option de nes how the curve is accepted in the centerline If the Hold PC point is checked on the radius is taken as xed and the delta angle of the curve is calculated based on some additional parameter Hence the extent of the curve is unlimited However if the Hold PI points option is checked on the bearing of tangent out of the curve is taken as xed and the radius is calculated based on some other parameter In this case the curve is completely restricted within the central PI point and the bearing of tangent out Hence when the Hold PI points option is checked on the above parameters should also be de ned to carry out the calculations The dialog for the Spiral allows the user to de ne the spiral by entering either the various parameters of the spiral like the angles and lengths or the coordinates or point numbers of its de ning points the TS Tangent to Spiral SC Spiral to Curve Radius point CS Curve to Spiral ST Spiral to Tangent and end point optional While de ning the spiral by its geometric properties the program will accept the data even if the in
101. point of each section or the sheets option which will plot the sections on a block section sheet If you would like to calculate the end areas and volumes of the section le you have selected then toggle the Calculate 1 Surface Earthworks to ON For example if you have cross sections for a stock pile this will calculate the volume from the toe of the cross sections You can choose the Scan File to Set Defaults button if you want the program to set the minimum and maximum parameters If you choose this option the program will automatically set the range of stations vertical spacing distance right and left grid distances and starting datum elevation This option writes a le called sectsort tmp that is read and used to set the defaults the next time you use the program Therefore if you are selecting a different SCT le to plot you should use this option to update the tmp le The Range of Stations to Plot edit box de nes the range of stations from the le which will be drawn The Interval of Stations to Plot edit box de nes whether all the stations in the le will be drawn For Road Commands 215 example perhaps you sampled every 25 feet with the SeCTions from Surface Model command for more accurate quantities but only want to plot 50 foot stations The Vertical Spacing Distance edit box value controls the distance the sections are stacked above the last one plotted when drawing multiple sections The Starting Datum
102. s gravity eld which best ts in a least squares sense global mean sea level Orthometric elevation measurements are used in survey calculations In order to convert ellipsoid heights He as measured by GPS into orthometric elevations Eo you must provide for a correction between the GPS measured ellipsoid reference ellipsoid and a constant level gravitational surface the geoid This correction is the geoid undulation Ug The formula is He Eo Ug The Geoid models are essentially large elevation difference models in grid format Carlson Field has two geoid models available Geoid99 covers the United States at 1 minute grid intervals EGM96 covers the entire globe at 15 minute intervals These Geoid models are huge and take a lot of disk space and memory The Geoid model les are not installed automatically and instead need to be installed by going to the Geoid folder on the Carlson Field installation CD Once installed onto Carlson Field you then need to specify your location by lat lon so that the program only needs to load a local portion of the Geoid model To set your local Geoid area pick the Set Geoid Area button Setting the Geoid area will carve out a Geoid model around the speci ed lat lon covering a square area of 2 degrees by 2 degrees which is about 100 miles by 100 miles Carlson Field applies the Geoid model by subtracting the Geoid undulation from the GPS elevation The resulting elevation is then used and displayed In
103. satellites you are tracking The Skyplot button will bring up the window showing you where in the sky the satellites are For points that are hard to reach directly by GPS you can use the Offset option This option can be used in areas of limited satellite communication such as high walls or under a tree This allows you to setup the rover in a clear area and read the coordinate The point that is actually stored is offset from the rover position To create an offset point Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 260 turn on the Offset toggle and then choose Read The offset direction can be entered as left right or azimuth The left and right offset is relative to the rover position at the previous read The offset distance is entered in the dialog A Vertical Offset can also be speci ed Choose Store to strore this point after the offset is done Offsets can also be done with laser guns when the laser option is setup in Con gure Field gt GPS Settings There are two methods for taking laser offsets One method is to use the Offset toggle and the Read button In the Offset dialog there is button for Read Laser for using the laser measurement for the offset distance and or angle This method creates a single offset point The other method is to use the Laser button which can create many offset points This method brings up another dialog The Setup button can be used to set the Laser Alignment Azimuth This alignment applies to laser guns that use a
104. second CRD le The points to copy are speci ed by numbers one at a time Destination Point Number 55 This is the point number to create in the current CRD le Source Point Number 25 This is the point number to copy from the second CRD le Point Northing Easting Elevation 25 52 516 13 328 0 000 Destination Point Number Press Enter to end Import Text ASCII File This routine converts point data from a text le into the current Carlson CRD le See the page referring the Import Text ASCII File command for more information Export Text ASCII Text File This routine outputs point data from the Carlson CRD le to a ASCII Text le See the page referring the Export Text ASCII File command for more information Edit Header Enter or edit the job information associated with the coordinate le Fields include Job Description Job Number and Job Date Points Commands 67 Compress CRD File Removes unused point numbers by renumbering high point numbers into the unused spaces For example for an original le with points 1 2 105 107 108 109 would be compressed to 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coordinate Transformation Transforms coordinates between local state plane 27 state plane 83 latitude longitude and Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Works on individually entered coordinates by range of point numbers and with on screen entities For converting between state plane 27 and 83 Carlson calls upon NADCON from the Nat
105. several other parameters Enter the rst point number to shoot as well as any desired description for the points and both horizontal and vertical increments These are angle increments given in seconds Once all of the above is entered select OK to begin the survey The total station will now begin turning automatically to the bottom left corner of the area and will begin shooting points Upon reaching the right hand limit of the area it will begin a new row of points starting at the left Point Check By Robotics Function This command works with robotic Total Stations made by Leica Topcon or Geodimeter This function is used to shoot and record a series of known target points Before running this command the instrument setup must be set occupy point backsight with the Equipment Setup commands After selecting Point Check by Robotics you will be prompted with a dialog box Choose the points you want to check and click process The Total Station will Field Commands 275 then go from point to point and take new measurements When it is all done a report will be given with the new measurements and any deviation GIS Commands The Carlson Field GIS menu includes commands for processing data attached to drawing entities and commands for drawing cleanup and conversion Carlson Field supports two methods for attaching additional data to entities Carlson Field GIS links and note les The Carlson Field GIS links use Microsoft Acc
106. slashes Size 4 6 8 10 12 The next is the default value 4 This is followed by the allowed values separated by commas 4 6 8 10 12 Descriptions for each of the four items and naming conventions for GIS prompting les are described in detail below Item 1 Field Name Field 1 is never displayed to the operator in Carlson Field The Field Name is inserted at the beginning of each line in the Note le before the input GIS data This Field Name corresponds to a column name in a Microsoft Access database table If you convert GIS ASCII Note data les to MDB tables the Field Name will become the column name Converting collected Note les to MDB tables is only an option not a requirement The Field Name must be unique for the GIS le and is not allowed to have spaces or special characters Item 2 Prompt This is the prompt that actually appears when storing ASCII GIS information It is usually the same name as Field 1 but can include spaces or special characters Also displayed in the Prompt within parentheses GIS Data Collection 307 are all allowed input options Notice the line shown with a prompt SCO The pound sign in parentheses signi es that a number is expected In the next line the prompt is Size 4 6 8 10 12 When entering GIS information at this prompt only 4 6 8 10 and 12 are expected IMPORTANT Commas are not allowed within the prompt All entries in the Prompt should be seperated by a forward slash inste
107. speci ed value The Right of Way icon brings up the dialog shown which allows you to specify whether to use a retaining wall to keep the cut ll slopes from crossing the right of way The right of way data is stored in a centerline le cl le as stations and offsets for the left and right sides of a centerline When the retaining wall option is active the cut or ll slope will go at the design slope up to the right of way and then the slope will tie into the ground by going straight up or down Without the retaining wall option the cut or ll slope will be become steeper in order to tie into the ground at the right of way For example if the cut slope is 50 but this slope ties into the ground past the right of way then the slope will be modi ed to something steeper such as 65 The Offset ROW options will force the tie in the offset distance before the right of way Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 202 The Shoulder Super Elevation icon speci es where on the template that the slopes transition between super elevation slopes and normal slopes The transition point is identi ed under Pivot Point by the template id for the grade curb or median Starting from the center the template grades will be in super up through this template segment For example based on the template shown in the rst dialog of this command the EOP Pivot Point the the Super Elevation Settings dialog will create the rst EOP grade in super while the curb
108. that is the nearest perpendicular position from the offset point The 3D polyline that is used for elevations does not need to be the same polyline that is used as the centerline for the station offset calculations Prompts Calculate Offset Settings Dialog Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations Select Polyline near endpoint which de nes rst station nea on Select Polyline Centerline select polyline centerline COGO Commands 141 5309 0 4845 0 Station 0 00 5526 0 4917 0 Station 228 63 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 140 4889 13 5410 25 0 00 1 10 00L10 00 Station on Line gt 1 10 00 Offset gt 10 00 Left PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 141 4870 15 5416 55 0 00 1 10 00R10 00 Station on Line gt 1 10 00 Offset gt 10 00 Right before station denotes point is ahead of line segment denotes beyond Pick point or point numbers Enter to End 22 28 Station Offset Description Elev Pt North East 4 95 89 L 15 48 Catch Basin 0 00 22 4811 00 4454 00 5 78 43 L 58 18 Power Pole 0 00 23 4839 00 4548 00 6 77 26 L 57 28 Power Pole 0 00 24 4868 00 4656 00 9 01 55 R 16 81 Catch Basin 0 00 25 4745 00 4887 00 10 50 51 L 25 39 Traf c Sign 0 00 27 4872 00 5043 00 4 03 48 R 22 15 Light Pole 0 00 28 4657 00 4454 00 Pick point or point numbers Enter to End Press Enter Keyboard Command calcoff Pull Down Menu Location COGO Prerequisite A po
109. that location and stores them to the CRD le with the speci ed point number The dialog for a Line allows the user to specify the line primarily by its length or station and its bearing The line can also be de ned by its end point number or its coordinates The bearing of a line can be changed if it s Non tangential to the previous element option is checked By default any line which follows a curve element is defaulted to be tangential to it the check box is turned off otherwise the checkbox is on To use a bearing different than that of the previous element make sure that the checkbox is on and enter the bearing The dialog for the Curve allows the user to de ne the curve primarily by its radius and delta angle The other parameters of the curve that can be edited are the arc length and the bearing of tangent out The curve can also be speci ed by entering the coordinates or point numbers of its end point PT and the radius point Another way to specify the curve would be to enter the chord length or PT point station and chord bearing If the central PI point and a point on the forward tangent are known then the curve can be de ned by entering both of these Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 182 points and at least one other property of the curve like radius arc length delta angle The point on the forward tangent can be any point that de nes the tangent out direction including the next PI point If only the central PI
110. the Desc as a label Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite None DTM Commands 147 List Elevation Function This command displays the elevation of a polyline or line With a 3D polyline the elevation of the 3D polyline at the pick point is reported along with the elevation of each vertex Pull Down Menu Location DTM Keyboard Command LSTELEV Prerequisite a polyline or line File Name lsp lstelev lsp Assign Contour Elevations Function This command changes the elevations of polylines and can be used to set the elevations of contour polylines The routine begins at a speci ed elevation and prompts for a selection set of polylines to set to the elevation Then the routine repeats using the last elevation plus the elevation increment Enter an empty selection set to exit the routine Prompts Starting elevation lt 0 0 gt 500 0 Contour interval negative for down lt 1 0 gt 5 0 Select polylines to set to elevation 500 0 Select objects pick the polylines Select polylines to set to elevation 505 0 Select objects pick the polylines Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 148 Select polylines to set to elevation 510 0 Select objects Press Enter Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite polylines Keyboard Command setcelev File Name lsp poly3d arx Make 3D Grid File Function This command creates a GRD le which can serve as a surface model for the Elevation Difference command Th
111. the Monitor function the Geoid undulation is displayed Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 224 In practice the Geoid model is most applicable to two types of alignment scenarios One of these types is when setting up the base over a known point and having no alignment control points The other is when there is one alignment control point When using multiple alignment control points the Geoid model is not as important because Carlson Field can model the elevation difference which can generally pick up the local Geoid undulation Project Scale Factor After converting the LAT LONG from the GPS to the state plane coordinates and applying the Align Local Coordinates the Project Scale Factor is applied as the nal adjustment to the coordinates This adjustment is used on the X Y and not the Z The Project Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the coordinate and a base point by the Project Scale Factor The coordinate is then set by starting from the base point and moving in the direction to the coordinate for the adjusted distance The base point is the rst point in Align Local Coordinates If there are no points speci ed in Align Local Coordinates then 0 0 is used as base point The Project Scale Factor can be entered directly or calculated using the grid factor and elevation for the current position When using the current position the program will read the LAT LONG from the GPS receiver The scale factor is then calculated a
112. the current point description This function also shows a list of all the descriptions of currently active linework You can end a currently active linework by highlightly the linework description from the Active Linework list and pressing the End Linework button Many of the options for storing points can be set in the Con gure Field gt Point Settings command The Options button in this dialog is a shortcut to these point settings If you want lines or polylines to connect the points that you are about to record select the Start button under Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 258 Linework After the rst point the Linework selection will change itself to Cont meaning continue Leave this selected while you are recording points in the same line Before shooting the last point in your line change it to End If you want the line to close itself onto its rst point check the Close button The Field To Finish Linework option is an automatic way to start linework The program will lookup the point description in the code table If the description matches a code and the code is de ned to create linework then the Start toggle in the Linework options is turned on Otherwise you can begin new linework by toggling on Start manually When a point is stored and Start is on Carlson Field pops up a dialog for choosing between a line 2D polyline or 3D polyline A 3D polyline can contain points with different elevations but a 2D polyline always
113. the layers except the ones you select an entity on The program prompts to see if you would like to retain the PNT layers which keeps the Site Manager point layers from freezing These layers include PNT PNTMARK PNTELEV PNTDESC and PNTELEV Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Isolate the wall layer by picking one wall line Restore Layer Function This command thaws the layers that were frozen by the Isolate Layer command Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 40 Draw Commands The Draw Menu commands allow the user to draw entities in the drawing These commands constitute the basic tools for drawing objects and entities in Carlson Field The commands underthe Draw Menu are described in this section Line Function This command creates a line entity by either picking points on the screen or you can supply the coordinate values by using point number coordinates stored in the current CooRDinate le This command always draws 2D lines with a zero elevation With links active changing a point with a command like Move Points will automatically update the line This option is set under General Settings in the Con gure command Prompts Pick point or point numbers 1 3 At this prompt you can pick a point from the graphics sceen or input a single point number or enter a range of points The above example would draw line segments from point number 1 2 and 3
114. the point and barrier lines to Triangulate Select object select the objects that represent the surface Reading points 53 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 162 Triangulating points 53 Starting contour elevation lt 542 0000 gt Press Enter This value is the elevation to begin contouring at The default is the lowest elevation in the triangulation network This prompt appears if the Specify Starting amp Ending Elevations option is on Ending contour elevation lt 597 2000 gt Press Enter This value is the highest elevation to contour Contouring elevation 597 Inserted 1459 contour vertices Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite Data points of the surface Triangulation network without contouring Original data points with one 3D polyline DTM Commands 163 Contours without triangulation network The contours are smoothed reduced drawn at an interval of 2 and highlighted at an interval of 10 with labeling on the index contours Plot Triangular Mesh Function This command draws 3D lines for a triangulation that is stored in a triangulation le t The triangulation le can be created by Triangulate amp Contour This command can be used to check the accuracy of a triangulation model by plotting the grid and then viewing it in 3D using the Viewpoint 3D command Prompts Select TMESH File to Draw Choose a triangulation le t Layer name lt TMESH gt Press Enter Drawing edges
115. the section grid just above the section line There is an option to draw this elevation on a 45 degree diagonal Otherwise the elevation label is draw vertically The Text Only toggle can be turned On to plot just the cross section polyline and the grid text This can be useful for plotting on a section sheet that has pre plotted grid lines and you want to plot only the section and text The Right Grid Limit edit box value de nes the length the grid lines are plotted to the right from the centerline or zero offset The Left Grid Limit edit box value de nes the length the grid lines are plotted to the left from the centerline or zero offset The Horizontal Axis Spacing Grid edit box de nes the distance the vertical lines of the grid will be spaced The Text edit box controls the interval that text will be plotted below the grid lines The Vertical Axis Spacing Grid edit box de nes the distance the horizontal lines of the grid will be spaced The Text edit box controls the interval that text will be plotted to the left and right of the grid lines Select the OK button at the bottom of the dialog to begin plotting For the Vertical Stack and Pick Location options another dialog appears where you can select additional section les to plot For example you can plot the existing and nal section les at the same time The Pick Location type of plotting has the following prompts Station gt 4000 000 Min Elev gt 462 849 Max Elev gt 47
116. these permissions can cause Carlson Field to perform incorrectly See Windows Help for information about assigning user permissions Chapter 1 Introduction 2 Carlson OEM 2004 based products do not support Windows 95 98 and ME all editions Processor Intel Pentium III IV or AMD K6 III PC 450MHz or higher RAM 128 MB Video VGA display 1024 x 768 Hard disk 500MB free disk space Pointing device Mouse CD ROM Any speed for installation only Optional hardware Printer or plotter Digitizer Modem or access to an Internet connection Open GL compatible 3D video card The OpenGL driver that comes with the 3D graphics card must have the following Full support of OpenGL or later An OpenGL Installable Client Driver ICD The graphics card must have an ICD in its OpenGL driver software The miniGL driver provided with some cards is not suf cient for use with this Autodesk CAD engine Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 Netscape Navigator 4 5 or later Installing Carlson Field Insert the Carlson Field CD into the CD drive Then run SETUP EXE on the CD Select Run under Start button and then enter X setup exe where X is the CD drive letter The install program will prompt for the drive letter to install to The install program will propose different directories to install the Carlson Field les in You can press Enter to use the defaults or type in your preference To co
117. which the circle passes The 2P option prompts for 2 diametric points The TTR option prompts for 2 entities circles lines or Polylines to which the circle must be tangential to The user needs to have the Tangent osnap option on in this case and choose either a line polyline or circle segment at which the circle needs to be tangential to this entity The third prompt is for the radius of the circle The nal method of drawing a circle is the simple Center and radius or diameter option Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 42 Prompts 3P 2P TTR lt Center point gt ttr Enter Tangent spec Requires a TAN object snap and selection of Circle Arc or Line Enter Tangent spec tan to Choose an entity to which the circle must be tangential to Enter second Tangent spec Choose an entity to which the circle must be tangential to Radius lt 36 87 gt Enter the desired radius of the circle Insert Function This command allows the user to insert blocks or entire les at a speci ed location The command comes up with a dialog box where the user can choose whether to insert a block or a le If a block is to be inserted the name of the block to be inserted can be directly entered in the edit box or one of the de ned blocks can be selected by pressing the Block button in the dialog box Similarly a le can be directly entered or selected by pressing the File button The user can choose to specify the positioning and
118. your antenna to your receiver s AN TENNA port This step can be skipped for the RT 3010S and other all in one models Navcom GPS Setup 331 3 Plug your receiver into a power supply or insert fully charged batteries into the battery ports Not all units have battery ports 4 Turn your receiver on by holding down the power button for a few seconds or until the status lights ash on 5 Use the serial port cable to connect your computer to port A of your Navcom unit Make sure the port on your computer that you use corresponds to the one you chose during preliminary setup 6 Under the FIELD menu choose EQUIPMENT SETUP 7 If a PORT SETUP window pops up set CONTROL PORT to PORT A and RTK DATA PORT to RADIO PORT 8 Setup is now complete Steps that follow are optional 9 Click the NAVIGATION STATUS button From here you can monitor the progress of your Navcom unit as it calculates its position Click AUTOREFRESH to view continuously updated status reports 10 It may take a few minutes for the unit to calculate its position if the unit was reset or newly turned on When the calculation is complete VALID NAVIGATION will read YES When this occurs the Navcom unit is ready for use Click CLOSE then click CANCEL WITHOUT SAVING 11 To monitor your position choose MONITOR GPS POSITION from the FIELD menu and you will see your current position All Carlson Field GPS functions should now work C Multi
119. 1 WALL 283 28 L ANG 1002 4 1 38 37 8 15 89 1002 WALL 283 48 L ANG 1008 4 1 27 18 34 123 82 1008 WALL 287 75 Part of PC COGO raw le 50 HAWTHORN 54 19398 23 3222 2 1 37 1000 00 38 5000 00 39 700 000 D052097F04P52I494P01P02 H32473V 0639R016202P03 H06687V 0706R014936P91 H03840V 0483R017380 Part of MDL Laser raw le COGO Commands 95 Part of Geodimeter raw le MP NOR 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 1 CO Temp 111F Press 29 9inHg Prism 666 23 May 2000 10 30 36 ST NOR 1 5 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SS 1 5 0000 131 0605 91 3744 88 4935 10 36 15 CL1 SS 2 5 0000 137 6770 90 2923 88 5236 10 36 50 CL1 Part of Nikon raw le NE 32 10696 4141 10043 5613 SN SET AZ 32 27 0 STN 32 BS 27 AD 27 0 00000 NULL SN SET AD 33 183 23250 183 660 SN SET Part of Fieldbook raw le OCCUPY PNT 621 616 5 140 148 36076 10255015 7245 3790987 2398 87 6695 ir 10255535 8009 3790669 8100 100 3900 ir COMMENT Thu Apr 08 08 14 14 1999 BACKSIGHT 0 00000 90 33400 609 4200 11 900 ir SIDESHOT 1 0 0 18 47550 90 55000 17 4200 5 300 TP gps1 Part of Survis raw le 19100 0 19101 5 5 25 4 7 35 15 550 91 23 START 19101 19100 19102 5 5 15 4 7 35 15 120 23 88 34 19102 19101 19103 5 5 2 4 7 125 1444 180 41 90 19103 19102 19104 5 5 2 4 7 125 15 240 03 90 19104 19103 19105 5 5 3 4 7 315 15
120. 2 091 Change datum elev lt Select point that represents 0 offset elev 460 0 gt C Road Commands 217 Starting Datum Elevation 450 The program scans the station data and determines the minimum and maximum elevations and proposes a datum elevation If you have pre plotted a grid sheet and want to reference another local grid coordinate then change the datum elevation appropriately Change datum elev lt Select point that represents 0 offset elev 450 0 gt pick point Station gt 4025 000 Min Elev gt 463 332 Max Elev gt 472 385 Change datum elev lt Select point that represents 0 offset elev 460 0 gt pick point The program continues to prompt until the last station in the range speci ed is drawn You can use the Cancel function Ctrl C to stop plotting if necessary If you chose the Vertical Stack option you will be prompted for the starting point for the row of sections If you selected the Sheets option and press the OK button the dialog on the next page appears allowing you to set up how you want the section sheets plotted The Rows of Sections Per Sheet controls how many sections will be stacked on top of each other on a sheet The Distance Between controls how much space will be placed between the top of the last section plotted and the bottom of the next section The distance between and other values in this dialog are in AutoCAD units In our above example we are set to 20 horizontal scale so 20 would equal 1 inc
121. 26 297 Right of Way 202 RMS 223 226 234 235 254 260 267 271 272 291 310 311 318 331 341 RMS Tolerance 223 Road Commands 164 Rod Height 58 92 222 226 230 232 311 313 318 Rotate 20 24 25 66 70 71 130 224 253 Satellite SkyPlot 271 Scale 19 48 70 98 102 103 110 196 214 225 228 256 scale point attribute 77 Scale Point Attributes 77 SDR 94 Section Conversion 220 Serial COM Port 222 317 Set Coordinate File 9 36 57 66 91 Set Data Directory 8 Set Environment Variables 57 Set Layer 39 Settings 317 318 321 322 324 327 330 334 337 339 Set UCS to World 37 Setup 15 105 147 166 230 233 235 236 238 261 262 268 311 313 320 324 328 332 334 335 338 341 343 SHP les 284 285 SideShot 92 97 100 110 Side Shots 82 Simulation GPS 335 Slope Inspector 176 Slope Staking 171 172 175 197 207 296 SMI 94 95 Smooth Polyline 27 129 259 Softdesk 78 94 160 220 Softdesk point blocks 78 Sokkia 94 95 193 240 335 337 Sokkia Radian GPS Setup 239 spiral 169 181 185 189 190 193 210 spiral out 184 spiral lengths 184 SRVPNO 162 Stakeout 169 171 175 177 220 226 227 265 267 268 Stakeout Settings 226 Standard Report Viewer 5 14 15 Starting Carlson Field 4 Starting Out 318 State Plane 225 241 243 247 255 324 336 342 343 state plane 68 98 224 225 228 253 255 256 324 331 Station Polyline C
122. 348 240 7923 S 77d32 11 W 173 0496 PP 4958 1461 4908 3635 413 8418 N 16d16 15 W 84 2742 PP 5039 0449 4884 7516 498 1161 Closure Error Distance gt 0 0000 Total Distance Inversed gt 498 12 AREA 14761 5406 SQ FT OR 0 3389 ACRES Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end Press Enter SQ FEET 27247 4 SQ YARDS 3027 5 SQ MILES 0 0 ACRES 0 63 PERIMETER 668 35 Pick area label centering point pick a point Erase Polyline Yes No lt Yes gt Press Enter The command plots a polyline that represents the gure you de ned if you want to keep the polyline respond with No Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Keyboard Command IA Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 136 File Name lsp ia lsp Station Polyline Centerline Function This command will station a polyline or centerline le at a given interval distance The options for this command are set in the dialog shown below After setting the options click OK on the dialog and then pick the polyline or select the centerline le Locate Even Stations This labels the stations at the distance interval i e 2 00 3 00 Locate Odd Stations This labels the non interval stations at the polyline centerline end points and PC and PT points Locate User Entered This will prompt you for individual stations to label
123. 4 Renumber Points This option renumbers points in the user speci ed range starting from a new point number The old point numbers are erased The condense points will renumber such that there are no unused point numbers in the renumbered range Otherwise the spaces between the points is maintained In the example shown renumbering 1 25 with points 1 2 24 25 to starting point number 101 will result in points 101 102 103 104 if condense is on or 101 102 124 125 if condense is off Input Edit Point Enter or edit the coordinate values or the description of a point The Notes section is for adding optional point notes which are additional point descriptions The standard description eld is limited to 32 characters Under notes any number of lines of text can be assigned to the point A list box shows the lines of notes To add a note line pick a blank line in the list box and then type in the note in the edit box belong the list box and press Enter To edit a note highlight the line in the list box and edit the text in the edit box Points Commands 75 Edit Points Function This command edits point data in the current coordinate le The current coordinate le can be set with the Set Coordinate File command Edit Points shows all the points in the coordinate le New points can be added and points can be deleted by using the Insert and Delete keys Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite None Erase Points Function Th
124. 4 0 00 PAT1 49 5217 70 4981 51 0 00 PAT1 50 5217 77 4989 51 0 00 PAT1 51 5133 81 4974 90 0 00 SHD1 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 122 52 5215 27 4989 54 0 00 PAT1 53 5227 61 4995 56 0 00 FPC4 54 5227 51 5010 26 0 00 FPC5 55 5227 51 5014 27 0 00 FPC5 56 5258 17 4902 27 0 00 EL 57 5234 17 4902 27 0 00 ER 58 5233 17 4902 27 0 00 CWL 59 5229 17 4902 27 0 00 CWR 60 5151 84 5064 50 0 00 DWR2 61 5151 78 5074 50 0 00 DWL2 62 5233 26 5064 99 0 00 DWR2 63 5233 20 5074 99 0 00 DWL2 64 5217 71 4983 04 0 00 CWL1 65 5217 85 4988 19 0 00 CWR1 66 5228 69 4983 04 0 00 CWL1 67 5228 66 4988 07 0 00 CWR1 68 5159 10 4974 58 0 00 PAT2 69 5159 17 4982 08 0 00 PAT2 70 5166 67 4982 00 0 00 PAT2 71 5259 63 5067 73 0 00 UP W123 72 5259 63 4986 12 0 00 UP W124 73 5260 12 4905 97 0 00 UP W125 74 5251 86 4890 91 0 00 W 75 5246 52 4989 52 0 00 W 76 5238 76 5085 22 0 00 W 77 5166 60 4974 50 0 00 BLC1 PAT2 78 5166 60 4974 50 0 00 BLC1 79 5129 70 5064 09 0 00 GAR2 80 5130 52 5004 18 0 00 POOL 81 5133 12 4998 30 0 00 POOL 82 5151 75 4997 88 0 00 POOL 83 5230 71 4891 73 0 00 TP 84 5095 18 4880 30 0 00 TL 85 5104 45 4911 84 0 00 TL 86 5110 48 4956 38 0 00 87 5110 48 4956 85 0 00 TL Example Field Notes Point number northing easting elevation description 101 4992 790 4950 148 0 0 RD 102 4983 801 4971 888 0 0 RD 103 4977 247 4992 316 0 0 RD 104 4969 757 5014 056 0 0 RD 105 4961 891 5035 796 0 0 RD 106 4989 981 5047 041 0 0 RD 107 5001 030 5022 302 0 0
125. 45 The type of design surface is set in the dialog shown The Vertical Offset in this dialog can be used to modify the design surface by adding this value to the design surface For example if you have a design surface for the top of a road and you want to get cut ll values to a 1 5 subgrade then enter 1 5 in the Vertical Offset eld The Use Centerline For Station Offset option will report the station offset of your current position in addition to the cut ll When this option is active the program will prompt you for the centerline le CL to reference For GPS and robotic total stations the Auto Store Points At Interval will creates points whenever your position moves by more than the speci ed distance or time interval This option is similar to the Auto Points At Interval command with the addition that the default description will include to cut ll to the design surface When all the options are set pick OK and the program will then prompt you for a grid le or triangulation le if you have selected these types of design surface Elevation Difference with GPS Carlson Field will continually read your current position from the GPS receiver A dialog box appears displaying your current position Carlson Field nds the design elevation for this point and compares it to the elevation being reported by the GPS receiver It then tells you how much cut or ll is required to reach the design elevation from your current position A
126. 68 5326 89 4050 711 34 5 32 6 00 5038 44 5710 29 103 29 3 AR262 5434 89 3236 457 76 5 43 6 00 4587 91 5791 26 106 36 4 AR208 5704 89 1803 201 30 5 40 6 00 4397 31 5726 52 108 22 5 AR247 1657 88 5235 497 09 5 40 6 00 4363 03 5230 69 117 37 19 AR289 3456 91 4405 112 47 5 40 6 00 4471 28 5260 97 113 36 6 AR277 4839 90 2926 223 99 5 40 6 00 4586 50 5245 75 114 85 7 AR92 4130 90 2746 233 88 5 40 6 00 4613 16 5013 42 112 36 8 AR261 2758 91 4405 387 27 5 42 6 00 5000 00 5000 00 100 06 Close P1 COGO Commands 111 Shown above is the resulting process report The angle balance had an error of 39 seconds which was divided among the 7 traverse sides The Compass Closure shows how each traverse point was adjusted and then the resulting adjusted angles and distances Here is another layout of the last example that shows an external backsight setup In this case there are two known points Point 1is the starting point and point 21 is the initial backsight The setup could also use a backsight azimuth ie north azimuth for example instead of a backsight point number The closing record setup has changed from the last example In this example the shot from 7 to 8 is the closing shot with point 8 as the closing point The closing reference point is still point 1 The angle balance shot is from 8 to 9 and the reference angle is from 1 to 21 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 112 Here is an example of an open traverse The traverse starts from the
127. 7d48 35 12 262 5 6 7 92d41 13 15 818 6 7 8 261d27 56 12 991 7 1 S 01d59 18 E 0 001 Least Squares Input Data Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Dist Bearing 2 5038 431 5710 370 5038 431 5710 372 0 002 S 87d33 04 E 3 4587 896 5791 299 4587 893 5791 306 0 008 S 65d24 21 E 4 4397 306 5726 530 4397 297 5726 545 0 017 S 59d17 31 E 5 4363 085 5230 685 4363 045 5230 704 0 044 S 25d10 33 E 6 4586 548 5245 769 4586 505 5245 775 0 043 S 07d59 10 E 7 4613 220 5013 423 4613 164 5013 430 0 056 S 07d16 24 E Adjusted Points Point Northing Easting N StdErr E StdErr 2 5038 431 5710 372 0 012 0 008 3 4587 893 5791 306 0 015 0 010 4 4397 297 5726 545 0 015 0 012 5 4363 045 5230 704 0 012 0 011 6 4586 505 5245 775 0 010 0 008 7 4613 164 5013 430 0 009 0 000 Solution Converged in 2 Iterations Reference Standard Deviation 0 520 Chi Square statistic 0 811 Adjustment Passes Chi Square test at 95 con dence level Least Squares Adjustment Report If this test fails there may be a blunder in the measurement data or the initial estimated standard errors were too low or too high Tools gt Direct Reverse Report This routine creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged shots The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the nal average Tools gt Reduce Direct Reverse Chapter 2 Fi
128. 9600 in general e Satellite Elevation Cutoff All satellites with elevation from the horizon of less than this numeber will not be used in calculating a position This allows less accurate low elevation satellite to be factored out of a position f Con gure Base Station Will con gure the receiver to act as a base See Con guring the Base Station below g Cancel without saving will exit this menu without saving any changes that have been made h Save and Exit Will save these settings to the reciever and to Carlson Field s setup and exit out of this menu Con guring Rover No real con guration is necessary aside from setting up the equipment and setting the appro priate Receiver Type Station Type and Satellite Elevation Cutoff Con guring Base Station 1 After selecting all the appropriate settings in Con gure GPS click on the Con gure Base Station button 2 In the menu dialog that opens there are a few buttons a Read from GPS Read a position from the GPS and x to that position b Enter Lat Lon Fix to a manually entered Lat Lon position c Enter State Plane Coord Fix to a manually entered State Plane Northing Easting position d Read From File Fix to a position read from a ref le e Cancel Cancel base setup Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 342 If Read From GPS is selected the software will read once from the GPS receiver and then x to that position If Enter Lat Lon is se
129. Antenna Height Message Rejected or Set RTK Message Rejected Each indicates which particular facet of the con guration failed If one of these messages is rejected it is likely a momentary transmission error If on the other hand several or all are rejected it is possible there is a problem in the communication line between the computer and the receiver which should be checked Leica TC Series Leica TC Series Instrument Setup On the instrument make sure that the communication settings have CR LF for the terminator Remote Mode 1 Turn on Leica 2 Connect Leica to rover radio and connect the radio to the larger battery 3 Connect the base radio to Carlson Field and the smaller battery 4 In the Field menu go to Con gure Field and under equipment type put Leica TC 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Field menu go to Con gure Field and click on Communication Settings and check if the baud rate is 19200 When Leica is turned on under Main Menu enter 5 for Con guration and 2 for Communication Mode then enter 1 for Gsi parameters and check if the baud rate is also set 19200 6 Line Terminator in Gsi paramiters should be set to CR LF 7 Press F1 for cont when done 8 When back in Communication Mode screen enter 5 for RCS Remote ON OFF and make sure it s NOT set for remote mode 9 In Main Menu press F6 for meas when ready to measure 10 In the Field menu go to
130. As the mouse is moved around the rotated position of the object keeps changing giving an idea of its nal position The user can then click on a point to select the angle of rotation and thereby the nal position of the object The angle of rotation can be also be entered from the keyboard The object is rotated through that angle relative to its current inclination to the coordinate axes Whether the rotation is clockwise or counter clockwise can be set using the Units Control command under the Inq Set pulldown menu Alternatively the rotation can be achieved by reference angle This is done by rst choosing the Reference option after entering the base point The user then has to select the reference angle whose orientation needs to be changed The user can either enter this at the keyboard or choose a line on the object by selecting two points on it The user is then prompted to choose the new angle which can again be entered at the keyboard or selected by choosing two points on an exisiting object This option of rotating by reference is particularly useful when objects need to be aligned by rotation Prompts Select objects pick an objects to be rotated press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Base point pick base point lt Rotation Angle gt Reference 40 objects will be rotated by 40 units about the base point the units and direction depending on the settings in the Units Control di
131. AutoCAD based data collection software package It creates maps as you survey directly in an AutoCAD drawing The program collects data by interacting directly with a total station impulse laser or real time kinematic Global Positioning System RTK GPS equipment Carlson Field runs with AutoCAD v14 2000 and standalone AutoCAD OEM In the eld Carlson Field is typically run on a ruggedized laptop computer Carlson Field Directory Structure The gure below shows the default directory structure for Carlson Field The EXEC LSP and SUP sub directories have les that are accessed by Carlson Field You should never need to access these les directly yourself The DATA and WORK sub directories are the users directories which will contain drawing and data les you will be using and creating ROOT SURV EXEC Executables Programs EXE DTA SUP Support Drawing blocks DWG LSP Lisp amp ADS Programs LSP DLL DCL DATA User data les Survey les RAW CRD etc WORK Startup directory user drawings DWG System Requirements Operating System Windows XP Windows 2000 Professional or Windows NT 4 0 with SP 6 0 or later NOTES It is recommended that you install and run Carlson Field on an English version of the operating system Users of Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Professional must have Administrator permissions to install Carlson Survey Not assigning
132. Base REF File would be run from the rover receiver while in xed position Then the base could be moved to this point without having to redo the local coordinate alignment Con gure Base Station initiates the receiver connected to Carlson Field to be a base and begin broadcasting its stationary position and satellite corrections to the rover See Con gure Base Station for All GPS Brands at end of this section Topcon GNSS Javad GPS Setup Radio Port on the Javad base and rover receiver is usually C Data Port is always A When using Paci c Crest radios Javad recommends the new PDL Paci c Crest radios These must be set to 38 400 baud rate Javad also uses Spread Sprectrum radios which work at 119 200 baud rate Receiver Model selects between Legacy Odyssey and Regency Currently the Receiver Model does not effect the Carlson Field interface except to determine the default Antenna Type Position Update Rate sets the frequency that the receiver calculates and reports position The faster rates are an option that must be purchased for the receiver Antenna Type chooses between an internal and external GPS antennas This option applies to receivers with built in antennas The RTK Message Type determines the format of the GPS correction message that is used from the base to the rover RTK Calculation Mode chooses between Delay and Extrapolate The Extrapolate mode is needed for fast Position Update Rates Satellite Elevation Cutof
133. CM RTK or RTCM DGPS Choose message 18 19 to make your RTCM RTK base broadcast RTCM message types 18 19 Choose message 20 21 to make your RTCM RTK base broadcast RTCM message types 20 21 Choose message 1 to make your RTCM DGPS base broadcast RTCM message type 1 Choose message 9 to make your RTCM DGPS base broadcast RTCM message type 9 Edit Base Position Submenu Note To access this menu rst con gure the unit as a BASE If your BASE already has a GPS position set it will be shown here If you don t see it trying pressing Retrieve To edit this value change the displayed number and press the Lock button Click Survey to read a new GPS position from the Navcom unit Click Empty to clear the GPS position from the unit Reset Unit Submenu Click Soft Reset to send a reset command to the Navcom unit If the command is successful all three status lights on the unit should go solid temporarily After performing a soft reset you will have to go to the Con gure Port Submenu to recon gure the control port Click Factory Reset to send an emergency reset command to the Navcom unit However in nearly all cases it is only necessary to use the Soft Reset button After performing a factory reset you will have to go to the Con gure Port Submenu to recon gure the control port View Firmware Submenu This submenu displays the Navcom rmware version your unit is using along with the hardware serial numbers and the
134. Carlson Field 2006 Carlson Software Inc User s manual July 18 2005 ii Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Introduction 2 Carlson Field Directory Structure 2 System Requirements 2 Installing Carlson Field 3 Carlson Field Con guration 4 Carlson Field Registration 4 Starting Carlson Field 4 Command Entry 4 Carlson Field File Types 4 Standard Report Viewer 5 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 7 File Commands 8 Set Data Directory 8
135. Direction Everything else will calculate Road Commands 185 Final Line Segment All you need to enter in the nal Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 186 Road Commands 187 dialog for the line tangent segment is its length All other items will calculate when you press Enter The completed centerline will appear as shown in the dialog and each element can be edited Pick the Save button to store this centerline data to a CL le Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 188 Here is an additional example of entering a spiral curve using with metric con gurations from a typical set of HWY plans for a DOT The centerline begins at station 17 522 845 with a tangent bearing of 27 2123 dd mmss Begin by picking Imput Edit Centerline File from the Design menu Enter the northing 162024 8614 and easting 475415 4005 and station 17522 8454 in the start dialog then pick Add and choose line See the plan view on the following page to ll in the line element dialog All the information needed is a length a short distance to get the line started exp 100m and the bearing quadrant in dd mmss The northing and easting will automatically be calculated The information on the plans gives the PI station and the bearing in and out of the simple curve Also the spiral curve Road Commands 189 information is posted on the plan Fill out the line Element Dialog as shown Choose OK then Add and click Spiral The Spiral Element dialog wil
136. Dist ZenithAng Desc TR 3 4 AR 208 5710 201 310 89 1803 P4 TR 4 5 AR 247 1657 497 120 88 5235 P5 TR 5 6 AR 277 4835 223 980 90 2926 P6 TR 6 7 AR 92 4113 233 880 90 2746 P7 InstHgt RodHgt 5 42 6 0 OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc TR 7 8 AR 261 2756 387 250 91 4405 CLOSE SS 7 19 AR 289 3456 112 450 91 3423 SS1 Example Printout le If there is no AB record then the Angle Balance routine will prompt for which shot to use as the angle balance COGO Commands 93 CL AB Closing Shot and Angle Balance This record is used as both the closing shot and angle balance records FD Foresight Direct The foresight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set When the program nds one the of direct reverse measurement records it will look for the other three records to complete the set FR Foresight Reverse The foresight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BD Backsight Direct The backsight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BR Backsight Reverse The backsight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set NAME Traverse Name This record acts as an identi er for the group of records that make up a traverse All the records after the NAME record belong to that traverse up to the next NAME record or the end of the le This record allows you to have multiple traverses in one raw le When running one of the Process c
137. Field Reference Guide 116 separate edge of pavement lines on the left and right sides of a road all the points for the left side could have the description EP1 and the points on the right side could be EP2 The second method is the PointCAD format This method also connects points with the same code The difference is that instead of using a number after the code for distinct lines you use the same code with an additional code for starting and ending the line These additional special codes are de ned in the following graphic For example 0 is used to start a line and 0 to end So the coding for a segment of edge of pavement could be EP 0 EP EP EP 0 Another special code that has been added to Field to Finish is 7 7 This 7 code will use the line type de nition of line 2D polyline or 3D polyline de ned by the Field to Finish code For example if EP is de ned as a 3D polyline then the coding EP 7 EP EP EP 7 will create a 3D polyline Otherwise codes like 0 0 which is de ned as start and end line will draw EP as a line The advantage to the PointCad method is that you don t have to keep track of line numbers For example if you are surveying 50 curb lines the rst method would require you to use 50 distinct curb numbers The advantage to the rst method is that you don t have to use the start and end codes Also the Nearest Found connection option applies to the rst method Carlson points in the drawing have point
138. Field Reference Guide 84 Pick point or Point number pick point The point is then located at the computed point of intersection Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite Execute Drawing Setup to set Defaults Bearing Bearing Intersect Bearing Distance Intersect Bearing Distance Intersect Function The Bearing Distance Intersection command prompts the user for a base point from which the known bearing intersects Then de ne the bearing by one of three methods The bearing can be de ned by picking two points selecting a line with the same bearing or by typing in the bearing in the form of Qdd mmss similar to the Locate by Bearing command Next the user is prompted for a base point from which the known distance radiates After entering the known distance a circle is drawn radiating from the selected base point and a line de ned by the bearing is extended to intersect the circle The user then picks the correct point for the solution desired and a point symbol is located at the selected intersection The command then erases the temporary circle and line NOTE Except where noted most of the Carlson routines leave the selection of the appropriate osnap mode up to the user If a command turns on an osnap the prompt line of a command will notate which osnap is on by enclosing it in brackets For example if the MIDpoint Osnap is on mid on will appear in the point prompt line Each of the prede ned poin
139. GIS and NOT le extensions The GIS les de ne the GIS prompting and elds The Note le NOT stores the GIS data for the points Each GIS le de nes the prompting and elds for one GIS feature For example MH GIS could de ne GIS prompts for manholes including elds like size depth condition location etc These GIS les can be created with the De ne Note File Prompts command GIS prompting les are explained fully in section 5C One Note le per job is used to store all GIS information The Note le always has the same lename as the coordinate CRD le but with a NOT le extension For example job5 not would be the le name for the companion note le to job5 crd Note les for GIS data storage are always ASCII les and are explained fully in section 7 Note File Data Structure and File Creation 5 Store Data in Note File ASCII GIS Prompting and Data Storage The GIS Options button in the Con gure Field command brings up the GIS Options pop up dialog box It controls GIS prompting and how GIS information is stored in Carlson Field There are two formats and methods for GIS prompting and storage ASCII or MDB Store Data in Note File is the ASCII method If the ASCII method is selected checked you can choose between two GIS prompting methods The rst method is to have one GIS prompting le for all collected points This method will then have prompting for one type of GIS feature for the points
140. GIS prompting lename excluding the GIS extension For example if the point description is SMH then Carlson Field looks for SMH GIS for the GIS elds If a point s description has no corresponding GIS le name Carlson Field brie y displays No GIS File Found and continues automatically 5C ASCII GIS Prompting File Structure The GIS le de nes the GIS elds and prompting for one GIS feature This le is a ASCII le where each line contains a eld de nition The de nition line has the eld name prompt and default value separated by commas If the eld is a choice of options the de nition line also has each choice separated by commas If the eld s value is to be calculated automatically by an equation the equation takes the place of the default value The eld s value is calculated automatically once the point is stored or edited An example ASCII GIS le for Sewer Cleanout GIS prompting SCO GIS is displayed below for a detailed explanation on ASCII GIS prompting le structure SCO SCO SIZE Size 4 6 8 10 12 4 4 6 8 10 12 TYPE Type L M L L M COMMENTS Comments SCO GIS is an ASCII le It is displayed here as it would appear in any text editor Each line in the GIS le is a GIS prompt in SurvStar and Carlson Field Each line consists of four items separated by commas The rst is Field Name SIZE The second is the prompt including allowed input in parentheses and separated by
141. H gis Using SMH GIS Prompting File for point 1 SMH 123 SMH SMH SIZE 30 SIZE Size 24 30 24 24 30 TYPE STND TYPE Type STND NSTND STND STND gt MANUFACTURER WOMAK MANUFACTURER Brand Richard Dewey gt COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC COMMENTS Comments PT ID 2 GIS FILE SCO gis Using SCO GIS Prompting File for point 2 SCO 78 SCO SCO SIZE 8 SIZE Size 4 6 8 10 12 4 4 6 8 10 12 TYPE M TYPE Type L M L L M COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC COMMENTS Comments GIS Data Collection Page The second example Note le shown here is for two stored points with both GIS prompting and all Store Options Chapter 3 Field User Guide 310 survey information toggled on The user was prompted to enter the GIS information The survey information shown in italics was saved automatically because these options were toggled on in Con gure Field gt Point Options JOB 002 NOT File with GIS amp Survey Data Corresponding GIS Prompting or Store Options Item PT ID 1 GIS FILE SMH gis Using SMH GIS Prompting File for point 1 TIME 17 5 6 gt Time Date in Point Notes DATE 2 15 2000 gt Time Date in Point Notes NOTE1 MISC NOTES LINE 1 gt Point Notes NOTE2 MISC NOTES LINE 2 gt Point Notes SMH 78 SMH SMH SIZE 24 SIZE Size 24 30 24 24 30 TYPE STND TYPE Type STND NSTND STND STND gt MANUFACTURER WOMAK MANUFACTURER Brand Richard Dewey gt COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC COMMENTS Comments HRMS 0 04 gt GPS RMS in Point Notes
142. In this example text and symbols will appear 08 inches high if the drawing is plotted as 1 50 The size of the text and symbols in drawing units will be 5 50 0 08 When working a drawing in English units one drawing unit equals one foot In metric one drawing unit equals one meter The English or Metric button in Drawing Setup tells Carlson which unit mode to use This effects the prompting and reports Drawing Setup also sets the dimension scale DIMSCALE to the Horizontal Scale The drawing linetype scale LTSCALE is set to the Horizontal Scale multiplied by the Line Type Scaler Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite None Text Style Function Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 52 This command allows the user to change the current text style to one of the available text styles The font style can be given any name by the user following which the user is prompted to select the speci c font le to be used and the text orientation inclination height width etc If the option is entered the current text style and its details are listed Prompts Text style name or lt STANDARD gt Roman New style Height lt 0 00 gt 5 Width factor lt 1 00 gt ENTER Obliquing angle lt 0d0 0 gt ENTER Backwards lt N gt ENTER Upside down lt N gt ENTER Vertical lt N gt ENTER ROMAN is now the current text style Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite None Units Con
143. Input Edit Super Elevation 210 Input Edit Section File 212 Draw Section File 215 Section Conversion 220 Contents vii Field Commands 220 Carlson Field Icon Menu 220 Con gure Field 221 Equipment Setup 230 Align GPS To Local Coordinates 252 Typical Alignment Scenarios 256 Point Store 257 Stakeout 265 Auto Points At Interval 269 Track Position 270 Satellite SkyPlot
144. Notes area an up down scroll bar will appear to the right of this box After editing the displayed values selecting Next Previous or OK automatically stores the edited values Cancel will exit without storing the displayed edited values Pick OK to save the edited values and exit 11 GIS Data MDB method To use the Access Database method for storing GIS data run Con gure Field gt GIS Options and turn on Store Data Direct to Database This method uses one MDB Microsoft Database le as a Template File to create the GIS prompting and a second Output File MDB Microsoft Database le to store the GIS information directly into Despite uses the MDB le format this routine works entirely in Carlson Field and doesn t require Microsoft Access to be installed on the computer Depth Sounder Depth Sounder Settings Starting Out Depth Sounder Carlson Field data collection can be used in conjuction with a depth sounder to survey the beds of rivers and lakes Carlson Field takes input from both a GPS receiver and a depth sounder to determine and record the elevation of the terrain directly below the surveying boat or barge All of Carlson Field s routines work with the depth sounder to let you collect points on the underwater terrain The elevation stored for each point is the elevation of the bed Modelling of the bed surface works as easily as modelling any surface using Carlson Software Carlson Field can be a powerful tool for
145. OST but instead could be LGTPOST When Field to Finish detects spaces in the descriptions at start up there is an option of whether to process the multiple codes COGO Commands 117 There are the following special codes that can be added after a code PC PT CLO NE OH OV SZ ROT SCA AZI DIST and COAL A special code comes after the regular code A space separates the codes The special code PC begins a three point arc The point with this special code is the rst point on the arc The next point with the code is considered a point on the arc and third point with the code is the arc endpoint For example in point number X Y Z description format 10 500 500 0 EP PC start curve 11 525 527 0 EP second point on curve 12 531 533 0 EP end point of curve PT is a special code that can be used with PC to de ne a curve with more than three points Starting at the point with the PC the program will look for a PT If the PT is found all the points between the PC and PT are used for the curve which is drawn as a smoothed polyline that passes through all points and only curves the polyline between points If no PT is found then the regular three point arc is applied as explained above The special code CLO forces the lines drawn between a series of points with the same code to close back to the rst point with the same code For example shots 1 4 all have the bld descriptio
146. Options dialog box Step 3 The GIS Options pop up box allows you to choose from the two GIS methods The two methods are Store Data in Note File ASCII method and Store Data Direct to Database MDB method These two GIS prompting and data storage methods are decribed fully in the two sections 4 and 5 When storing points in Carlson Field using Point Store or Auto Points at Interval you can toggle GIS prompting and data storage on and off by picking Options to access Point Settings gt GIS Options GIS Data Collection 305 3 Storing GIS information using the ASCII or MDB method The recommended method for GIS data storage in Carlson Field is the MDB method The MDB method stores GIS information directly to a Microsoft Access Database Only the MDB method can attach digital photographs to points Carlson Field can create display query input and edit the MDB information Another important feature that only the MDB method can accomplish is maintaining database connectivity when importing and exporting ESRI Arcview 2D or 3D shape les The ASCII Note File method was developed to work with our DOS based data collection package SurvStar There are conversion routines to convert between MDB data les and GIS Note les The only limitation with the ASCII method is that digital photographs cannot be linked to points or entities 4 Two File Types are used by the ASCII method GIS amp NOT The two le types for the ASCII method have
147. Redraw Function This command redraws the graphics window This will clear out any blip marks on the screen Regen Function This command makes the program regenerate the graphics view by re processing all the drawing entities This will completely update the graphics for any drawing change such as freezing thawing layers changing linetype scaling or changing zoom levels Set UCS to World Function This command sets the User Coordinate System to world coordinates Site Manager needs to work in world coordi nates Other programs that use AutoCAD may set the drawing to another coordinate system This command can be used to bring the drawing to world coordinates from these other systems Twist Screen Standard Function This command will twist the screen s orientation to where something other than the north direction is toward the top of the screen drawing It does not do a coordinate rotation and leaves the database unchanged The ROTATE and MOVE commands in the Edit pulldown or Side bar menu can be used to do a coordinate rotation and translation This routine prompts for the twist angle then adjusts the screen and cross hairs to that angle The twist angle is always measured counterclockwise with 0 degrees being to the east right Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Twist Screen Line Function This is a variation of the previous command that allows you to select a line in your drawing that you want to be a
148. S System 500 323 Leica TC Series 325 Line 21 27 30 41 45 52 64 66 69 81 82 84 85 106 128 130 132 138 140 142 149 150 160 161 181 182 185 186 195 258 260 269 278 302 304 325 linetypes 39 Link Points with Coordinate File 57 LisCad 79 List 49 51 57 62 64 70 169 212 214 230 275 288 315 List Elevation 148 List Points 62 63 227 276 309 315 Locate at Intersect 83 86 Locate on Real Z Axis 58 59 120 159 226 Locate Point 55 56 58 61 70 76 83 116 159 LSP 2 5 Make 61 90 151 221 328 331 332 335 342 Make 3D Grid File 149 154 Manual Total Station 326 Map Points from 67 MDL Laser 94 median 197 199 203 Method of Least Squares 103 Mikrofyn Lightbar 327 Monitor GPS Position 252 272 318 Move 17 20 66 70 197 222 278 285 288 308 Move Points 41 77 NADCON 68 Navcom Con guration Guide 331 Navcom GPS Setup 327 Nikon 94 333 334 Nikon Total Stations 333 North Arrows 132 Note File 229 305 307 309 312 313 Note le 5 290 292 306 307 310 312 315 note le 57 59 61 97 98 142 143 177 225 229 276 290 292 306 309 317 Note File Prompts 229 290 Note les 9 276 290 306 307 309 312 Note File Utilities 290 291 Numeric point numbers 15 Object Snap 54 55 60 265 Occupied Point 80 81 230 313 Occupied point 79 Occupy Point 80 106 107 Offset Distance 162 262 263 Offset Point Ent
149. S points view the HRMS and VRMS columns show the horizontal and vertical RMS values when that point was recorded The On Off buttons allow you to switch whether the highlighted point is used for the horizontal and or vertical alignment The HV column shows a Y if this point is used in the calculations Otherwise it shows an N The H column represents horizontal control and the V column vertical control For example you may wish to use 2 points for horizontal alignment and one for vertical The Optimize button will nd the combination of turning alignment points on off for horizontal and vertical such that the horizontal and vertical residuals are minimized The Desc eld shows an optional description of the alignment points The scale factor and average horizontal and vertical residuals appear at the top of the window These values serve as a check that the alignment is valid The scale factor factor should be closed to 1 0 in range of 0 9 to 1 1 The average residuals should be less than 0 2 XY On Off toggles the highlighted alignment point horizontal component off or on Alignment points with the horizontal component toggled off will not use the northing and easting of that point for adjustment calculations Z On Off toggles the highlighted alignment point vertical component off or on Alignment points with the vertical component toggled off will not use the elevation of that point for adjustment calculations Note When you togg
150. SET 07TP0001000390 00000000 00000000 09F100010003193 10000092 40416660 00000000MN SET 09F100010100193 00000091 31388880 00000000SN REC Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 94 Part of Sokkia SDR raw le 410001 000000SB 42 00000000 43 00000000 44 00000000 45 00000000 110002 00000002 21 124 35959590 22 104 08748240 31 1 00000000 51 0 0012 000 110003 00000003 21 124 00000000 22 104 08748240 31 1 00267075 51 0 0012 000 110004 00000004 21 124 00420390 22 104 08702570 31 1 00168234 51 0 0012 000 110005 00000005 21 124 26029130 22 104 09311370 31 1 00206133 51 0 0012 000 410006 000000IP 42 00000000 43 00000000 44 00000000 45 00000000 110007 00000006 21 124 25827090 22 104 09504550 31 1 00106228 51 0 0012 000 110008 00000007 21 124 27151500 22 104 09312240 31 1 00106066 51 0 0012 000 Part of a Wild Leica raw le CM De nitions SS Side Shot TR Traverse OC Occupied Coordinates PC Point Coordinates CM Comment OS Occupied Station TS time stamp e electronic m manual CM TS TUE 04 09 91 09 41 25P PC 1 5000 00000 5000 00000 0 00000 SS e HI 4 000 HR 5 000 PIPE F 0 1 2 BAZ 0 00000 AR 0 00040 ZA 91 24330 SD 92 020 SS e HI 0 000 HR 0 000 BC BR FRAME 1ST 0 1 3 BAZ 0 00000 AR 28 47220 ZA 91 20250 SD 65 240 Part of SMI raw le NEW SET UP INST AT 1 359 59 59 ON 4 L ANG 1000 4 1 77 18 52 4 44 1000 WALL 283 22 L ANG 1001 4 1 55 44 28 9 8 100
151. Setup 52 62 85 87 128 159 215 220 334 337 Draw Pro le 194 196 Draw Section File 215 Draw Typical Template 205 DTM Commands 145 Duplicate Points 74 DWG 2 5 14 284 Dynamic 33 234 238 240 335 336 Earth Curvature 98 110 228 Edit Process Raw File 91 223 Edit Commands 16 Edit Point 62 75 Edit Point Attributes 77 Edit Points 76 Edit Symbol Library 133 Elevation Difference 145 147 149 155 159 229 Enter Assign Point 83 Equipment Reference 319 Equipment Setup 230 233 234 241 247 252 275 321 322 324 325 327 330 332 335 337 339 343 Erase 16 66 70 136 erase 16 19 48 69 74 76 85 135 195 197 214 283 Erase Links 282 283 Erase Points 76 EXEC 2 Explode 17 Export DXF le 14 Export SHP File 285 Export Text ASCII File 65 Extend 19 21 30 220 293 Extents 34 Field To Finish 120 258 Field Commands 220 eld name 276 278 288 289 307 315 Field Reference Guide 7 Field To Finish 300 Field to Finish 59 61 116 117 120 226 291 300 302 Field User Guide 295 File Commands 8 Fill treatment 202 Final surface contours with a closed polyline 156 Freeze Thaw Layer 40 Geodimeter 94 231 321 GIS Commands 276 GIS Data Collection 305 306 308 310 313 316 GIS Data Inspector 277 278 GIS File 59 229 287 288 306 308 312 313 GIS Inspector 277 GIS Inspector Settings 278 GIS links 276 279 281 283 GIS Query Rep
152. Sides Base Elevation Draw Corners Only will draw the side lines only at the grid corners Otherwise side lines are drawn down each perimeter grid cell Use Inclusion Exclusion Perimeters will bring up a prompt to select closed polylines for inclusion and exclusion areas Only grid cells inside the inclusion polylines will be drawn Grid cells inside the exclusion polylines will not be drawn Subdivide Grid Around Inclusion Perimeter will subdivide grid cells that are partially inside and outside the perime ter into smaller resolution grid cells Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite a GRD File DTM Commands 153 Two Surface Volumes Function Two Surface Volumes calculates the cut and ll volumes between two surfaces modelled by GRD les These two grid les must have the same location and resolution To create the grid les use the Make 3D Grid File routine When creating the second grid le choose Use position of another le and select the rst grid le Using the position of the rst grid le sets the location and resolution of second grid to match the rst There are several other routines that calculate volumes based on grid les Grid based volumes can be calculated by One Surface Volumes Volumes by Layer Stockpile Volumes and Pond Pit Volumes These routines have special prompting and calculate the grid surfaces and volume in one step Volumes by Two Surface Volumes has three steps 1 Creating
153. Specify Selection Set Options and then select Point Inserts which will read the elevation from the elevation attribute of the point Or you can go to Drawing Setup and select Locate on Real Z Axis and then call Locate Points to replot the points Prompts Triangulate amp Contour Options Dialog Box All the options for this command are controlled by this dialog Draw Contours When this box is marked the program will draw contour lines after triangulating Otherwise only the trian DTM Commands 159 gulation is performed Draw Triangulation Lines When this box is marked the program will draw the triangulation as 3D lines Triangulation Lines Layer This setting is the name of the layer in which the triangulation network lines will be drawn Draw Triangulation Faces When this box is marked the program will draw each triangle in the triangulation network as a 3D Face Triangulation Faces Layer This setting is the name of the layer in which the triangulation network faces will be drawn Write Triangulation File This option stores the triangulation surface model as an t le which is a text le of the edges in the triangula tion network This triangulation le can be used by several commands such as Volumes By Triangulation Spot Elevations and Pro le from FLT File The t le is in a Softdesk fault le format Highlight Barriers This option highlights barrier lines in the triangulation network by dr
154. VRMS 0 07 gt GPS RMS in Point Notes STATUS FIXED gt GPS RMS in Point Notes ROD HT 5 250 gt Rod Height in Point Notes PT DATA 1 4998 000 4996 000 95 000 SMH gt Point Coordinates in Notes PT ID 2 GIS FILE SCO gis Using SCO GIS Prompting File for point 2 TIME 17 6 19 gt Time Date in Point Notes DATE 2 15 2000 gt Time Date in Point Notes NOTE1 MISC NOTE LINE 1 gt Point Notes SCO 222 SCO SCO SIZE 8 SIZE Size 4 6 8 10 12 4 4 6 8 10 12 TYPE L TYPE Type L M L L M COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC COMMENTS Comments HRMS 0 04 gt GPS RMS in Point Notes VRMS 0 07 gt GPS RMS in Point Notes STATUS FIXED gt GPS RMS in Point Notes ROD HT 5 250 gt Rod Height in Point Notes PT DATA 2 4998 036 4996 091 95 000 SCO gt Point Coordinates in Notes 8 Point Store ASCII GIS using GPS The Point Store command in Field can store nearly unlimited GIS information with eld collected points The following procedure details the steps needed to eld collect points with GIS information using the Point Store command and RTK equipment Before running this procedure the following must be setup Run GPS Setup to con gure your GPS receiver GIS Data Collection 311 Run Align Local Coordinates to de ne the transformation from the GPS coordinate system to your job coordinate system Create GIS prompting les to use with the De ne Note File Prompts command Step 1 Pick Point Store in the Field drop dow
155. X Y and Z coordinates when Include Z Coordinates is toggled on SHP les do not have arc entities So the export routine will convert arcs and polyline arcs into a series of small chords segments The Offset Cutoff eld sets the maximum horizontal shift allowed between the original arc and the chord segments These SHP les can be imported into ESRI s Arcview product Database GIS links in Carlson Field are converted to SHP les by storing the GIS database information into DBF les for ESRI s Arcview product to read and link to Image Inspector Function This command views images attached to entities At the start the program highlights all entities that have attached images When you move the cursor over these entities the attached image is displayed in a window If you click within the image window the program will start the image application editor that is setup for your system This application such as Microsoft Internet Explorer depends on your Windows system setup Also while moving the cursor over drawing entities you can use the arrow page up and page down keys to pan and zoom the display Prompts Arrow keys Pan PageUp Down ZoomOut In Pick Image Box Open Image Move pointer over entity with image Enter to End press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite drawing entity with attached image GIS Commands 285 Example car image displayed in upper left corner of drawing when cursor over car symb
156. a to points Note les not are associated with a coordinate le crd and use the same name as the CRD le except using the NOT extension i e survey not with survey crd Note les can also be used in the Draw Locate Points CFU Input EditPoint and List Points commands The note les are simple text les that do not need any database drivers Input Edit GIS Data Function This routine creates reviews and appends GIS data linked to entities stored in the drawing There are three methods for selecting the drawing entities to process S for Select P for Polygon and N for Number The three methods and their prompting are as follows Select object Number Polygon lt Select gt Pick a point inside polygon Select Number lt Polygon gt Type point number Pick Select lt Number gt Select Object method With this method you pick the drawing entity to process the data attached to that entity When selecting a Carlson point the point number is used to link to the database Polygon method For this method you pick inside a closed polyline to process the data attached to that polyline Number method Here you simply input the point number from the current CRD le to process The Input Edit GIS Data dialog has a spreadsheet format for editing the data elds The GIS table to process is selected in the pulldown eld in the upper right of the dialog The GIS tables that are available depend on the tables that are
157. ad Item 3 Default The default value is displayed directly after the prompt If the eld operator presses return with out entering anything the default will be stored as this line s GIS information In the example for SIZE Size 4 6 8 10 12 4 4 6 8 10 12 the next value after the parentheses is 4 Four will be the default value If the de fault space is left blank as in the last line COMMENTS Comments then there is no default value and no value will be saved if the operator doesn t enter anything Item 4 Options These are the only allowed input options at this GIS prompt When inputing data only one of these values will be accepted So only one of the values 4 6 8 10 or 12 will be accepted as input at the Size prompt These values are the ones that actually control the input the options appearing in Item 2 are only there so the operator can see his choices GIS Data Collection Page 6 Creating Prompting Files The GIS prompting les can be created by the De ne Note File Prompts command A brief description is included here for all the command options found in the De ne Note File Prompts dialog box Load brings up a dialog pop up box titled Specify GIS File This dialog box allows you to load an existing GIS prompting le To edit any individual GIS prompting line highlight that line and pick Edit The following pop up dialog box titled GIS Field Record appears You can input the four items of the prompting le line
158. added bene t that it will adjust the point attributes and symbols to a new screen twist angle Prompts Scaling Multiplier 2 5 This response would enlarge the point attributes and symbols by 250 percent This command will adjust the point attributes to the current screen twist Select Carlson Point Attributes amp Symbols to Enlarge Reduce Select objects C First corner pick point Other corner pick point Select objects Enter Points Commands 77 Number of entities changed 30 Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Points Convert Points to Softdesk Function This command converts Carlson point blocks in the drawing to Softdesk point blocks These point block formats are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Carlson points Convert Softdesk to Points Function This command converts Softdesk point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks These point block formats are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes The Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities can be directly used on Softdesk points without using this command Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Softdesk points Convert Points to Eagle Point Function This command converts Carlson point blocks in the drawing to Eagle Point point blocks These point block formats are similar and c
159. akes initial calculations for the coordinate points in the traverse This data along with the control point coordinates and angle and distance measurements is stored to a data le with the same Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 100 name as the current RW5 le except with a LSQ extension ie survey lsq goes with survey rw5 The constraints of the routine are All angle readings must be in angle right mode The coordinates of the starting and the ending points must be known The routine begins with a dialog for specifying the reference closing coordinates and any scale factors to COGO Commands 101 apply to the distance measurements The Reference Closing Point is the last point in the traverse whose coordinates must be known If an angle balance shot is used in the traverse the Reference Angle Balance Angle must also be speci ed either as a value or as the angle between known points Since angles and distances have errors of different magnitudes they are normalized using weights based on the accuracy and con dence with which these quantities have been measured There is a dialog for specifying the estimated measurement errors The Reading Error is the horizontal angular error in the instrument For example for a 5 second instrument this error would be 5 The Pointing Error accounts for several factors in the horizontal angle reading including accuracy lining up the crosshairs on the target the target size and the
160. aking changes in drawings in closer detail conveniently selecting objects for modi cation Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 32 reviewing the general appearance of the drawing etc The commands in the top section effect the screen display size and location and the bottom section commands change drawing layers Window Function This command prompts the user to specify a window by de ning the two corners of a rectangular window The view the shifts to the contents of the window If the aspect ratio of the selection window is not the same as the display the region speci ed by the window is centered in the new display Hence the shape of the selection window need not necessarily correspond to the new view Prompts First Corner Select one corner of the window required to be zoomed to Other corner Select the opposite corner Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite Objects to be zoomed to Dynamic Function This command allows the user to zoom to a particular portion of a drawing without regenerating the drawing Zoom Dynamic displays the extents of the drawing in a blue dashed box and the present view is represented by a green dotted box Zoom Dynamic gives a view box that selects the new view This view box can be moved to pan the view or resized to zoom the view The pick button on the pointing device can be pressed to change between moving when an x appears in the middle of the view box or resizing whe
161. al ground So it is done in the eld Surveying these catches is slope staking For roads the pivot or break line is the back of ditch in cut heading out to top of cut or the outside shoulder in ll heading down to the toe of ll For site jobs like that shown above the pivot or break line is the last xed design slope before that uphill or downhill slope to the catch In the example shown above it is the bottom left corner of a borrow area which then runs uphill at some slope to the catch 3 In the rst Slope Stake Settings dialog select the 3D Polyline method Then enter the cut and ll slope ratios 4 After clicking OK from the rst dialog you are asked to pick the 3D polyline then set the starting station and the interval along that polyline The 3D polyline should be drawn in the direction of increasing stations If the polyline is not going the right direction then use the Reverse Polyline command The pivot offsets can be used as follows say you are slope staking top of a sewer cut and you have a 3D polyline for the centerline of the sewer invert But if the bottom trench is 4 wide you need to offset 2 horizontally 0 vertically to get to the cut edge where the steep Slope Staking 297 maybe 0 5 1 upslope is to daylight That is how pivot offset is used If you are coming right off that 3D polyline then there is no pivot offset Another note if you had a sewer trench that was 0 5 1 for 5 of depth t
162. alog box lt Rotation Angle gt Reference type ref to choose rotation by reference angle Reference angle lt E gt Choose the direction which is meant to be the reference angle For example if a line at 45o to the horizontal needs to be at 120o in the resultant gure then the reference angle needs to be chosen as 45o This can be done in two ways typing 45o at the keyboard or choosing two points on the reference line which is oriented in the required angle 45o in this case New angle Choose the direction that the reference angle previously chosen needs to be oriented In the example under consideration the new angle will be 120o Once again it can be speci ed in two ways from the keyboard or by specifying two points on the drawing Edit Commands 25 Text Function This command allows a wide range of modi cations to existing text It has a sub menu consisting of the following items Edit Text Function This command allows user to select a text object Only one text object can be selected at a given time A dialog box appears with the selected text It allows the user to change the content of the selected text Prompts Select object pick a text object to edit press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Change the contents of the text object as desired and press OK on the dialog box to effect changes Text Enlarge Reduce Function This command will scale text ent
163. an edit add or remove these slopes descriptions The Point Description can also be speci ed When OK is clicked a point in the coordinate le is created at the starting point with this information stored in the note le An offset point is also created at the speci ed offset distance back from the starting point At the end of Prepare Story Stake a report of all the created points and the corresponding cut ll data is shown if the Create Report option was set Prepare Story Stake does not draw the points in the drawing These points can be drawn using the Draw Locate Points command The cut ll information in the note le can be used in the Stakeout routine In Con gure Field gt Stakeout Settings there is an option to Display Point Notes in Stakeout Report With this option active the cut ll data in the note le will be displayed when the point is staked out Prepare Story Stake is not a prerequiste for Story Stake By Points or Story Stake By Polyline In fact working in combination with Stakeout Prepare Story Stake is an alternative to these other routines Road Commands 177 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 178 Story Stake By Points Function This command creates a report of cut ll slopes and distances of a design surface from a starting point First you move to the starting point and then take a reading from the instrument to get the starting point coordinates This starting position is shown in the drawing Nex
164. an select the Note le to process by using the Open NOT File button The program will then list all the GIS FILE names that were found in the Note le If a set of data for point number does not have a GIS FILE name then this group will appear in the list as UNKNOWN The le name of the Access database to add the data to is displayed in the upper right of the dialog You can change the output database by using the Open MDB button to select an existing database or the New MDB to create a new database The database tables will automatically have the same name as the GIS FILE The Export All De ned GIS Codes button will output all the Note le data for all the GIS FILE codes to the Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 290 current output database To edit the Note le data select a GIS FILE code from the list and then pick the Preview Edit GIS Code button This routine will display a spreadsheet editor where you can change the data Each set of note le data for a point is displayed on one row with the coresponding record from the database shown on the next row You can use this routine to export the Note le data for this current GIS FILE code to the database table by choosing the Save button You can use the Preview Edit Table button to edit the database table First highlight the table name and then pick this button The table data is displayed in a spreadsheet editor Any changes can be saved back to the database by picking the Save but
165. and ROVER have the same station ID s 6 Try increase the RTK Max Age constraint 7 Under Navigation Status verify that the Navigation is valid on both units If either unit does not have a valid position solution correction wills not work Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 330 8 Under Monitor Corrections verify that the corrections you re using are arriving regularly If they aren t you may need to reset both units 9 Try con guring the BASE and ROVER again 10 If all else fails Soft Reset both units through the Reset Unit menu After doing so you will have to recon gure the port settings of each device through the Con gure Ports menu and wait a few minutes for the devices to recalculate their position 11 If none of these steps work contact Carlson Software Technical Support Troubleshooting when you can t establish communication with the unit If all of your commands in the Equipment Setup menu are failing try opening the Con gure Ports submenu selecting the proper Control Port and saving the new settings Make sure that you re plugged into the port you have chosen to be the control port If this does not work issue a soft reset command If this fails try a factory reset command If even this fails call Carlson Software Technical Support Navcom Con guration Guide This guide will walk you through the setup process for your Navcom units It covers individual unit setup as well as base rover setup
166. apter 2 Field Reference Guide 254 alignment point is added By reading the rover GPS position for the alignment points the alignment will transform the coordinates from the GPS system of the current base setup to your local coordinate system Load allows you to open an existing alignment le Only one alignment le can be open at a time Alignment les have a DAT extension and stored in the Data directory by default Save stores alignment les DAT extensions to a le Files are by default stored to the Data subdirectory The OK button will set the current alignment to the settings in the dialog Alignment Methods Carlson Field can operate by the following Alignment methods Alignment Method 1 No alignment points Alignment Method 2 One point alignment Alignment Method 3 Two or more alignment points Alignment Method 1 With no alignment of the rover Carlson Field will report Northing and Easting as State Plane or UTM coordinates In order for this method to give accurate State Plane or UTM coordinate values the GPS base receiver must be set up over a known point and con gured using the true Lat Long Hgt or true State Plane coordinates If the base is set over an arbitrary point con gured by reading the GPS the RTK GPS stored coordinates will be translated up to a 200 feet but accurate in relation to each other When using this method you can skip Align GPS to Local Crds and start surveying immediately once
167. are used for cut and blue for ll There is an option to draw a color legend The Use Report Formatter allows you to customize the report by choosing the elds to report and their order Also the report formatter can be used to output the report data to Excel or Access The Process Another Area with Current Grids option will run Two Surface Volumes again using the same grid les but different inclusion exclusion polylines This option saves the step of reloading the grid les to calculate volumes from the same grids for multiple areas The Cut Swell Factor is multiplied by the cut volume in the report Likewise the Fill Swell Factor is multiplied by the ll volume The Report Tons option allows you to enter the material density and the program will report the cut and ll tons in addition to volume Given two good grd les this routine will calculate accurate volumes So to verify the volume DTM Commands 155 Final surface contours with a closed polyline Existing surface Volume Report Comparing GRiD C SC14 DATA SIMO GRD and GRiD C SC14 DATA BASE GRD Lower left grid corner 186551 67 57624 98 Upper right grid corner 186828 81 57897 09 X grid resolution 75 Y grid resolution 75 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 156 X grid cell size 3 70 Y grid cell size 3 63 Total inclusion area 37016 71 sq ft 0 850 acres Cut to Fill ratio 1 14 Cut C Y Area acres 3642 35 Fill C Y Area acres 3182 70
168. ars allowing you to specify the layer that the les are plotted on If you are specifying a new layer to create type the name into the edit box If you want to select a layer that already exists from the layer list then click on the Select button to the right of the edit box The Label End Areas in Table will draw the cut and ll areas and ground and nal elevations for each station in a table The Plot End Areas 1st amp 2nd toggle switches on and off the plotting and calculation of the end areas of the sections de ned in the rst and second le slots Road Commands 219 The Extend Shorter Ends to Longer toggle how the end area will be computed if the section end points do not intersect The Previous button allows you to return focus to the main dialog and make changes to settings or cancel the program One thing to remember when plotting sheets with grid lines on them is to switch on the Text Only toggle on so you don t get duplicate grid lines The Save Settings button allows you to save all the parameters settings to a le so you can easily recall them for another project The Load Settings button allows you to recall the settings saved with the option explained above When you select the OK button the program prompts for the starting point for the row of sheets The default is coordinate 0 0 though you can select any point you like With the settings shown in the example dialogs the sections would be plotted as shown below
169. ases all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display Reload This option loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed but it ensures display of the most current image Unload This option unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the drawing It is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance An unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of images associated with the drawing le Details This option opens the Image File Details dialog box which displays the image name saved path active path le creation date and time le size and type color system color depth width and height in pixels resolution default size in units and a preview image Image Found At This eld shows the path of the selected image If you select multiple images this eld remains blank The path shown is the actual path where the image resides Browse This option opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard le selection dialog box The path you select appears under Image Found At See Attaching an Image below Save Path This option stores the new path information Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path If Carlson Field cannot nd the refer
170. at reside in external references xrefs Image names can include up to 255 characters and can contain letters digits spaces and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or Carlson Field The image name can be identical to the le name but changing the image name does not change the le name Tree View This button displays all the image de nitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs The top level of the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing images nested in block references and the names of externally referenced drawings containing images The names of the images attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next tree level To insert a copy of an already attached image select it and then choose Attach Tree view lists the image names only not le names and lists the image name just once regardless of how many times you attach insert the image You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again or by selecting it and then pressing F2 However you cannot select more than one image at a time Attach This option displays the Select Image File dialog box When you unload and then reload an image Carlson Field draws that image on top Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next Draw Commands 47 Detach This option removes the selected image de nitions from the drawing database and er
171. ating new points with Point Numbers off no points are stored in the CRD le and only the point symbol and node are drawn When drawing existing points with Point Numbers off the point attribute block is not drawn and only the point symbol and node are drawn The Automatic Point Numbering option applies to creating new points With this option active the program will use the Starting Point Number for the rst new point The next point number will be automatically incremented Before storing the point the program will check whether the point number is used If the point number is used and point protect is on set in Coordinate File Utilities then the program will prompt for another point number or to overwrite the point With Automatic Point Numbering off the program will prompt for the point numbers Use the Draw Range or Draw All buttons to draw existing points from the current CRD le The Draw Range button will prompt for the point numbers to draw The Draw All button will draw all the points in the CRD le and then the program will zoom extents the display to show the points When drawing existing points the Wildcard match of point descriptions can be used to lter the points to be drawn For example entering EP for the wildcard would drawn only points with a description of EP The Enter amp Assign button can be used to create new points by typing in the point northing and easting The Screen Pick Point button allows you to
172. ation 100 then the pivot offset for station 75 would be 19 0 right 101 0 elevation For the user entry and 3D polyline methods the pivot point is speci ed Station For Slope Stake dialog After the slope stake station and pivot point are speci ed Carlson Field begins to read the GPS receiver or total station to get the current position The existing surface to tie into is de ned by the elevations from these current position coordinates The point where the cut or ll slope from the pivot point intersects the existing ground is called the catch point As each coordinate is read an existing surface cross section is built and the catch point is calculated Carlson Field will automatically determine whether to nd the catch point on the right side or left side of the centerline depending on the side of your current position The program displays in real time as you move the northing easting and station offset elevation of your current position and the offset of the catch point The distance from the current position to the catch point is reported as the offset difference as either IN or OUT The OUT means you should move out from the centerline The IN means that the catch point is closer to the centerline Based on this offset difference you move perpendicular to the centerline either towards or away from the centerline to reach a new offset from the centerline while maintaining approximately the same station The difference between your c
173. aw le If no AB record is found in the raw le then the program will prompt for which traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot The angle from the angle balance shot is calculated as the angle from the occupied point to the foresight point The reference angle can be speci ed as a bearing azimuth or by two point numbers in the dialog shown The angle balance report shows the unadjusted points the unadjusted closure the angular error the adjusted points and then the adjusted closure Typically but not always applying the angle balance correction will improve the traverse closure Process gt Compass Crandall Transit These process methods apply the selected rule to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates After adjusting the traverse the sideshots are also recalculated The closure error is calculated as the difference between the closing shot and a reference point The closing shot is speci ed as a type CL or CL AB record in the raw le If no CL record is found in the raw le then the program will prompt for which traverse shot to use as the closing shot The foresight point is used as the closing coordinate The reference point can be speci ed by point number or by entering the northing easting and elevation The process results report shows the unadjusted points closure error adjustments to each traverse point and adjusted point Process gt Prepare Least Squares Data From the raw le data this routine m
174. awing the triangulation lines along barriers in yellow Max Triangulation Line Length This value limits the length of the triangulation network lines Any triangulation line that exceeds this limit will not be drawn or included in contouring This allows you to avoid abnormally long triangulation lines where you have relatively too few data points and on the outskirts of your data points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 160 Ignore Zero Elevations When activated this setting will lter out all data points at an elevation of zero from the data set Pick Reference Plane The triangulation network is based on the x y position of the points This option allows you to contour an overhang or cliff by changing the reference plane to a side view The reference plane can be speci ed by rst using the Viewpoint 3D command and then using the View option or you can specify three data points on the cliff two along the bottom and one at the top Specify Starting amp Ending Elevations The program can automatically contour from the lowest elevation in the data set up to the highest at the increment speci ed in Contour Interval If you would like to manually set the range over which to contour select this option Specify Selection Set Options This toggle allows you to control what type of entities Triangulate amp Contour uses After you click OK on this dialog the next dialog will be the Selection Set Options dialog box shown below
175. bar just below the command line Prompts Set Occupied Point Pick point or point number pick a point 5000 5000 0 0 Set backsight method Azimuth Bearing None lt Point gt Press Enter to accept the Point default value To select a different option enter the rst letter of the desired option and press enter Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 80 Set Backsight Point Pick point or point number pick a point 5184 76 5381 3 0 0 Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite None Traverse Function This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings to de ne a traverse or gure The command prompts for an Angle Bearing Code which de nes the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 de ne the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 an angle turned to the left 7 an angle turned to the right 8 a de ection angle left and 9 a de ection angle right The command draws lines between located points if the Line On Off is set to on and plots the points calculated and stores them in the current CooRDinate File if point numbering is On If Point Protect is turned On Traverse checks if the point numbers are already stored in the le This command always occupies the last point it calculated and backsights the point before that There are Angle Bearing code input options for Traverse that are set by enterin
176. be entered in Coordinate File Utilities under Input Edit Point The Use Report Formatter option allows you to customize the elds and layout of the point report Also the Report Formatter can be used to export the point report to Excel or Access The point list report is displayed in the standard report viewer which can print draw and save the report le This report viewer cannot be used to edit the coordinate le Instead use the Edit Points command in the Points menu Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite points in a coordinate le or on the screen Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 62 List Points Report File gt c user northpark crd Job Description gt Job Number gt 0 000 Job Date gt 06 18 1998 PointNo Northing Y Easting X Elev Z Description 1 5355 240 5000 000 91 8 CP2 2 5000 000 5000 000 90 0 CP2 1000 5355 236 5000 000 91 8 CK 1001 4941 911 4622 029 91 4 FPC 1002 4952 629 4642 818 90 6 FH 1003 4959 931 4634 440 89 8 TOE1 Example of List Points report Import Text ASCII File Function This command converts point data from an ASCII text le into the current Carlson coordinate le CRD Each line of the text le can contain any combination of point number northing easting elevation and description All this information of a point should be on one line with the values separated by a comma space or other delimiter Under the Source File Format setting you can choose from some speci
177. ber 1 through 10 to point number 20 through 30 New Last Point Number This option sets the highest point number in the CRD le All points above this number are erased Update Drawing from CRD File This function moves Carlson points in the drawing if necessary to match the coordinates stored in the CRD le Also this command has options toerase and draw points For the erase option point are erased from the drawing if the point number does not exist in the coordinate le For the draw option if a point number in the CRD le does not exist in the drawing then this point is drawn using the settings from the dialog The number of points modi ed erased and drawn is reported at the end of the command Points Commands 69 Update CRD File from Drawing This function allows you to select all or some of the points in the drawing and add or update them to the CRD le The points can be ltered with AutoCad s Select Objects selection mechanism and or wild card matching of the point descriptions The Update Point Descriptions option determines whether the point descriptions from the drawing will be stored to the CRD le Use this command to update the le after a global edit such as Move Rotate Renumber Points Change Elevations Erase etc This routine directly reads Leica Wildsoft Softdesk Geodimeter InRoads and Eagle Point point blocks List Points List the points stored in the CRD le by point number range and desc
178. bol from selected entities in the drawing by importing symbol drawing les on the your computer or by moving existing symbols from one category to another To create a new symbol open a drawing which has the entities to be used in the symbol The symbol should be drawn at unit size scale 1 1 because Carlson will scale the symbol by the current drawing scale when the symbol is used Highlight the category for the symbol and click on the Create Symbol button A dialog appears for entering the new symbol name Next specify the le name for the symbol The le name has a DWG extension and would usually reside in the Carlson SUP directory but you may use another path Then the program will prompt you to select the entities from the drawing for the symbol An insertion point for the symbol must also be picked The Import symbols button brings up a le selection dialog which allows you to select multiple les to be added to the current category to select multiple les use Shift or Control keys along with the mouse If the les being imported are not in SUP directory the program will offer an option of copying them there or referring to the current location By default the symbol description is the same as le name The description for the symbol or category name may be changed by highlighting that name and clicking on Rename button the name being edited is then placed into edit mode To move a symbol into a different catego
179. can have multiple symbols and have multiple lines drawn through them Unde ned Codes All points stored without descriptions or with descriptions not stored in the Field to Finish code table are drawn using the default Drawing Options in Con gure Field gt Point Settings GIS Data Collection 1 GIS Information GIS Prede ned Prompting Files and Data Storage Carlson Field can store GIS information with points collected with total stations pulse lasers and GPS surveying equipment When storing eld data Carlson Field can be set to prompt for additional GIS information for each stored point There are two seperate GIS prompting and data storage methods that can be employed within Carlson Field The Note File method uses ASCII NOT les The other method uses Microsoft Access database MDB les Both methods can use the descriptions of stored points e g SCO for Sewer Cleanout FH for Fire Hydrant to look for a corresponding GIS prompting le to prompt and store GIS information Both the Note File and MDB File methods require creating GIS prede ned prompting les prior to collecting eld data 2 Storing GIS Information in Carlson Field The steps to toggle On GIS prompting and storage for either method ASCII or MDB in Carlson Field are detailed and numbered below Step 1 From the main menu pick the Field drop down menu then pick Con gure Field Step 2 Click on the button GIS Options This brings up the GIS
180. ce Guide 68 pairs of points are suf cient to de ne the translation and rotation more than two pairs of points provides more than enough information Over Determination by Plane Similarity is used to nd the least squares best t transformation for all the given source and destination points Besides doing a translation and rotation this option will also scales the points during the transformation The Rigid Body Transformation also does a best t least squares transformation but applies only translation and rotation with no scale When running Carlson with AutoCad Map the Coordinate Transformation dialog has an option called Other which activates all the AutoCad Map transformations With the Other option the program displays the dialog shown here for selecting the coordinate system First choose the system Category and then select a system from the available list Draw Entities by Point s Draw Lines Arcs 3DLines Polylines or 3DPolys by de ning a range of point numbers Example Prompts Enter Menu Option lt L gt P Plot Entities by Point Number Type of entity Arc Polyline 3dpoly 2dline Exit lt Line gt P This response causes the program to plot polylines Example 1 4 7 10 12 5 8 would draw lines from point number s 1 through 4 then to 7 to 10 through 12 then to 5 to 8 limit 132 characters Undo lt Enter point numbers or ranges gt 1 10 20 30 The program draws a polyline from point num
181. ceiver In general this setting should be set to Dy namic Kinematic e Message Type sets what format of corrections this receiver will send receive for RTK f Motion Dynamics Used to set the receiver s calculations appropriate to the motion of the receiver Simulation GPS 335 g Elevation Mask This is the satellite elevation cutoff No satellites with elevation less than this number will be used in corrections This allows ltering out of satellites close to the horizon which provide less accurate calculations for positions h Send Command to Receiver Allows a speci c user entered command to be sent to the receiver Mostly used for troubleshooting with Technical support i Con gure Base Con gures the parameters of a base station for the receiver Ex Current position etc j Power Cycle Receiver powers the receiver down and then turns it back on clearing the main memory k Save and Exit save all settings changes and exit this menu l Cancel Restore original settings and exit this menu To set the Radian IS up as a Rover 7 Select Rover for Station Type and set the Radio Baud to match the PDL s which are being used Also set RTK Dynamics to Dynamic Kinematic and set Motion Dynamics to the appropriate option 8 Select Exit and Save The receiver is now ready for use as a rover To set the Radian IS up as a Base 7 Select Base for station type and set the Radio Baud to math the
182. ci ed by point number Prompts Pick PC point or point numbers 101 for point number 101 Pick Second point or point number 102 Pick PT point or point number 103 Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None PC PT Radius Point Function This command draws an arc between the PC point radius point and PT point The points can either by picked on screen or speci ed by point number Given these points the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct If you need the arc to go the other direction enter No Prompts Pick PC point or point number 101 for point number 101 Pick Radius point or point number 102 Pick PT point or point number 103 Is the direction of this arc correct No lt Yes gt N for no Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None PC Radius Chord Function This command draws an arc given the PC point radius length chord length and chord bearing The PC point can either by picked on screen or speci ed by point number Given these points the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct If you need the arc to go the other direction enter No Prompts Radius of Arc lt 40 00 gt 500 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 46 PC Start Point Pick point or point number pick a point Chord bearing or chord endpoint lt Bea
183. coordinate value 5 Under Scale you must specify the scale factor of the selected image Specify On Screen directs input to the command line or the pointing device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter a value for the scale factor The default scale factor is 1 6 Under Rotation you must specify the rotation angle of the selected image If Specify On Screen is selected you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 48 on the command line If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box The default rotation angle is 0 Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite An image le Place Image by World File Function This routine is intended for users of AutoCAD based products that do not have the Map extension If you have the Map extension available it is recommended that you use the tool provided This function allows you to insert Geo Referenced TIF les into AutoCAD drawings This process requires the presence of an accompanying TFW le The TFW le contains information about the location and scaling of the actual raster image TIF le This eliminates the guesswork in inserting moving and rotating raster images to the project area Prompts Select File Begin by selecting the TFW le to process If the related TIF le is present in the same directory the image will be inser
184. ct a different code table You can also change the default point settings here All of this can be done without leaving Point Store or Auto Points at Interval Field to Finish Editing the Code Table The code table can be displayed using the command Field to Finish under the COGO menu Each line corresponds to a code All of the code s parameters layer symbol type description size Field To Finish 301 linetype are controlled from here Clicking on a code will bring up a window which will let you change the settings for this code New codes can be added using the Add button on the code table Field to Finish Linework Linework includes all mapping by 2D or 3D polylines with line and arc segments The Field to Finish code table controls the linetype color and layer for all linework It does not control where polylines lines or arcs start or end Starting and ending linework is controlled directly in Carlson Field s data collection commands Point Store and Auto Points at Interval 2D Polylines are always drawn at zero elevation Their linetypes can be de ned in the code table A simple curve requires three points a PC one point on the curve and a PT The simple curve is drawn as an arc Complex curves can be shot using multiple points along the curve between the PC and PT There is no upper limit to how many points can be used Carlson Field does a Bezier t to join all these points The complex curve is actually drawn as a series
185. curate Gismo USCG satellite RTCM DGPS beacon receivers Radio Port for external radio connection is typically COM 2 on the receiver The Data Port connected to Carlson Field is typically COM 1 Differential Mode toggles the Novatel GPS receiver to use RTCA RTCM or CMR message types RTCA is propre itary to Novatel and is used only for centimeter accuracy RTK GPS surveying RTCM can be used with USCG DGPS beacon signals for sub meter accuracy Novatel receivers work with Trimble CMR propreitary message signal type and can be either a base or rover working with Trimble RTK GPS receivers Dynamics toggles the rover between Kinematic or Static The base is always in Kinematic mode Kinematic is used for surveying while walking with the receiver Static is for stationary use only at the rover and gives better Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 238 accuracies Since Static mode is for more precise measurements it can be used for GPS alignment points and for any control points The receiver should not be moved while in Static mode Elevation Cutoff is the vertical cut off angle above the horizon Any satellites below this limit will be ignored in calculations 15 is a common setting Elevation Type chooses between Mean Sea Level or Ellipsoid for the elevation model used by the receiver Solution Reset Soft Reboot resets the Novatel receiver in a few seconds This is used when the rover receiver is locked up or not properly reporting its position
186. d 6 for comm The baud rate can be changed using the arrow keys 6 Exit the Con gure Field menu 7 To check if units Ft M matches for correct results in Carlson Field under Inq Set go to Drawing Setup and select the appropriate button On Nikon press MENU and 3 for sett again but now press 5 for unit Nikon 310 Set the same baud rate in the Nikon 310 station as you did in Carlson Field and set the Nikon instrument to the record format by selecting on the instrument Fnc gt 5 Set gt 6 other gt 3rd screen OmniStar Otto In Field go to Con gure Field and under equipment type select CSI GBX OmniStar Otto and in Communicatin Settings set the baud rate to 9600 Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 334 Simulation GPS Simulation GPS mode is for demonstration purposes to show or pratice Carlson Field functions This mode allows you to run Carlson Field without being hooked up to any equipment The program will automatically generate a position This position is the rst point in the alignment If there is no alignment then the starting point is 5000 5000 1000 There are keyboard commands to control the simulation position during continuous read com mands such as Stakeout and Track Position Here are the keyboard commands L Turn Left R Turn Right F Go Faster S Slow Down U Up D Down W Switch Direction Sokkia Sokkia Radian IS Hardware Setup 1 Make sure that the Radian IS has fu
187. d to the list or removed from the list by clicking the appropriate button The Add Option button brings up a small dialog and accepts the option to be included in the list Press OK to accept the values set here At the minimum the Field Name and Prompt must be speci ed Pull Down Menu Location Misc Prerequisite None GIS Commands 289 Note File Utilities Function This command exports data from Note les not to Access mdb database tables Note les are associated with Coordinate les crd and contain additional data for point numbers For example the Coordinate le for a manhole point could contain the point number northing easting elevation and 32 character description while the corespond ing note le for that point contains additional data on the manhole such as diameter depth condition etc A Note le for a Coordinate le will have the same name as the Coordinate le except with a not extension instead of the crd extension i e park not goes with park crd The Note le is a text le which consists of a point number PT ID followed by eld names with values This group of point number and elds can also have a GIS FILE name which is used to identify this group of elds This GIS FILE name comes the the Note le prompting de nition le GIS which de nes the eld names for the group and is created in the De ne Note File Prompts command For Note File Utilities you c
188. de 98 Process Results Raw le gt d sc14 data survey rw5 CRD le gt d sc14 data simo2 crd Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod North East Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR268 5330 89 4050 711 4200 5 320 6 000 5038 5219 5710 3379 91 9322 P2 3 AR262 5448 89 3236 457 7600 5 430 6 000 4588 0149 5791 3222 85 9583 P3 4 AR208 5710 89 1803 201 3100 5 400 6 000 4397 4215 5726 5800 82 4784 P4 5 AR247 1657 88 5235 497 1200 5 400 6 000 4363 1405 5230 8089 69 0691 P5 6 AR277 4835 90 2926 223 9800 5 400 6 000 4586 6110 5245 8641 69 6130 P6 COGO Commands 99 7 AR92 4113 90 2746 233 8800 5 400 6 000 4613 2535 5013 5092 70 1339 P7 8 AR261 2756 91 4405 387 2500 5 420 6 000 5000 1469 5000 0439 79 2889 CLOSE P1 19 AR289 3456 91 3423 112 4500 5 420 6 000 4719 1705 5051 1876 72 1880 SS1 Closure Results Traverse Lines gt 7 SideShots gt 1 Starting Coordinates N 5000 0000 E 5000 0000 Z 100 0000 Ending Coordinates N 5000 1469 E 5000 0439 Z 79 2889 Azimuth Error 16 amp oslash 38 57 North Error 0 14689 East Error 0 04393 Vertical Error 20 71113 Hz Dist Error 0 15332 Sl Dist Error 20 71170 Total Hz Dist Traversed 2712 33610 Total Sl Dist Traversed 2712 72000 Closure Precision 1 in 17691 Example Process Results Report between the angle balance shot and a reference angle The angle balance shot is speci ed as a type AB or CL AB record in the r
189. degrees are less helpful resolving the rover position because of extra atmospheric interference If there are too few satellites present the receiver will be unable to resolve its position Typically ve satellites are required to resolve position and four are needed to maintain locked solution Satellite Skyplot can be an invaluable tool to help you monitor the current satellite con guration The skyplot screen appears at left The top half of this window displays the visible satellite information in chart form PRN is the satellite identi cation number Azi is an abbreviation for azimuth the horizontal angle from due north in degrees measured clockwise to the satellite position 0 to 360 degrees Elv is an abbreviation for elevation the vertical angle above the horizon where the satellite can be found 0 to 90 degrees One entry appears for each satellite that the receiver is tracking The image on the lower half of the window displays the same information graphically It shows a map of the sky with North at the top East to the right The centerpoint where the lines cross is straight up Each satellite appears as a symbol resembling an H As you can see most of the visible satellites were in the Northeast when this image was captured The inner circle represnts an elevation of sixty degrees The outer circle is the horizon Roughly Field Commands 271 speaking any H touching this circle is too low in the sky to be of much use
190. ds 165 will appear on the drawing showing your location You can move along the centerline and Carlson Field will report the station offset in real time If you move beyond the ends of the centerline then the program will stop reporting station offset and instead will report Off CL The Store button will create a point at the current position The default description will include the current sta tion offset When Store is selected a dialog box will appear for entering the point number and description Centerline Position with Total Stations Centerline Position uses a dialog box that is very similar to the Point Store dialog Under the Setup button make sure that the occupied point backsight and instrument height are set Then have your rodman set the prism over the point you are interested in Pick Read F1 or Read amp Store F5 and the total station will take a shot After the shot is taken the dialog box looks like the one at right Carlson Field reports the current coordinates and the station offset The station offset also appears in the Desc box If you click Store Carlson Field will record this point and plot it on the drawing including the Desc as a label Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 166 Offset Stakeout Function This function stakeouts a point at a given station and offset of a centerline and reports the cut or ll to a design elevation The centerline and d
191. ds the stakeout point This option only applies to GPS Auto Zoom will zoom the drawing display in or out so that both your current position and stakeout target are visible on the screen Zero Horizontal Angle To Target will set the horizontal angle of the total station to zero in the direction towards the stakeout point When stakeout is completed the horizontal angle is set back to the original value This option only applies to total stations Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Note File will store stakeout data in the note le NOT for the current coordinate le At the end of staking out a point there is an option to store the staked coordinates in the current coordinate le This stakeout note le option allows you to store more stakeout data in addition to the staked coordinates This additional data includes the target coordinates and horizontal and vertical difference between the staked and target points This stakeout note data can be used in reports with the List Points or CutSheet Report commands Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Excel Spreadsheet will display a cutsheet report in an Excel spreadsheet The spreadsheet will pop up at the end of each point stakeout The report can be saved in Excel format and processed by Excel Store Stakeout Points To Separate Coordinate File will store the staked points to a different coordinate le besides the current coordinate le This allows you to use the same point number for the targe
192. ds to the MDB table column header This name can have no spaces or special characters Field Prompt is what the operator GIS Commands 287 sees when prompted to input GIS eld values Field Prompting can have spaces and special characters List Values de ne the default and allowed entries to be input for the Field Prompt If List Values is left blank any number or alpha character can be input Once values are speci ed only these values can be used The default value is the one displayed when the GIS Code is stored to the MDB Template le using Export GIS to MDB 5 To create a GIS feature code for use by the MDB method use Export GIS File to MDB to store the GIS feature code prompting in the Template MDB le To highlight Export GIS File to MDB pick the category to input the GIS Feature code under 6 To create a GIS File for the ASCII method choose Save GIS File at the bottom left in this pop up box Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite None De ne Note File Prompts Function This command allows the user to create a GIS le for use in several other routines in Carlson Field and Carlson Software s own total station GPS data collection system SurvStar The rest of the paragraph about how and where GIS les are used The program starts with the main Edit GIS dialog as shown below The Load button allows the user to load an existing GIS le for editing or review The list box shows t
193. duals suggest a problem with the input data In the dialog that displays the nal coordinates and residuals there is a button to store the coordinates to the current CRD le with a speci ed point number Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 274 Building Face Surface Function Used to project all points onto a surface or plane Upon executing the function a menu will open prompting the selection of three points to de ne the plane surface Note that there must already be three points along the plane in the CRD le in order for this function to work properly After selecting the three points the List buttons will bring up a list of available points select OK to proceed A screen similar to the Store Points dialog will now open Every point which is read will be plotted along the plane de ned by the three points selected even if it is at a different distance When nished simply exit out of the menu as with any other function Pattern Point Survey Function Used with a re ectorless Total Station This function is used to shoot a regular rectangular pattern of points across an area It is useful when periodic measurements of an area are required Upon starting the function a querry box will ask for two point de ning a rectangle the lower left corner and the upper right corner For each of these aim the gun at the corner of the area to be scanned and click Read After reading both points a menu will prompt for
194. e Otherwise connect any radio being used to Port 1 2 or 3 3 If an external power source is being used be sure to plug it into the PWR Port on the front of the receiver 4 If external power is not being used ensure that there are batteries in one or both of the batter slots on the bottom of the receiver 5 Plug the 9 pin serial connection cable into the serial port of the computer running Carlson Field and into the Terminal Port on the front of the receiver Con guring Carlson Field for Use With a 500 Series Receiver 1 Select Con gure Field from the Field pulldown menu This will open a new window with several buttons on it as well as a pull down list labelled Equipment Type Select Leica 500 Series in the Equipment Type menu then select Communication Settings 2 Ensure that the COM port is set to the one that the serial cable is plugged into and that the Baud Rate is 9600 the Char Length 8 the Stop Bits 1 and the Parity None Close this menu and the Con gure Field menu 3 In the Field pulldown menu select Equipment Setup This will open another menu with several selectable options and several buttons 4 Use the radio buttons on the top right to select whether the receiver will be a rover or a base station Also be sure to select the antenna types being used from the pulldown menu at left 5 Enter the desired Satellite Elevation Cutoff in the text box above the column of buttons All sa
195. e program internally makes a triangular network of the data points and then interpolates the elevation values of a rectangular grid at the speci ed grid resolution Data points can be either points inserts lines or polylines Lines and polylines are treated as breaklines in the triangulation The grid location is speci ed by rst picking a lower left corner and then an upper right corner The screen cannot be twisted when this is done Then a dialog box sets the range of elevations to process the modeling method and the grid resolution Entities with elevations outside the range to process are ignored The modeling method almost always should be triangulation Polynomial inverse distance and kriging apply to random data points for surfaces like undergound features The grid resolution is speci ed by either the number of grid cells or by the size for each grid cell The grid location and resolution can also be speci ed by using the settings from an existing grid le In this case the location and resolution of the new grid will match those of the selected grid le There are four triangulation modes AutoDetect Triangulation Only Intersection with Triangulation and Intersec tion Only The Triangulation Only method builds a triangulation surface out of all the selected points lines and polylines All lines and polylines are treated as barrier lines Grid node elevations are calculated based on the triangulation The Intersection with
196. e Existing Field to Finish Entites option will erase from the drawing any old entities created by previous Field To Finish runs before drawing the new entities The Preview Only option will temporarily draw the points and linework and allow you to review it with zoom and pan Sequences Sequences are a way to simplify eld entry of a sequence of codes For example a road cross section could be SHD1 EP1 CL EP2 SHD2 Instead of entering these different descriptions one sequence de nition can store these descriptions in order Then just the sequence code such as RD is used in the eld The cross section can be shot in left to right then left right order right to left then right to left order or alternating left to right then right to left order The alternating method is known as the Zorro style The one restriction is that the shots always start from a right or left edge To set up a sequence choose the Sequence toggle in the Edit Code dialog Then pick the De ne Code Sequence button This brings up a dialog for entering the sequence codes in order These sequence codes should be de ned as normal codes somewhere else in the Field to Finish code table ie SHD as a 3D polyline In the eld the one template code is used for all the cross sections shots ie RD for all the points Then Field to Finish will substitute this template code with the sequence codes ie substitute RD with SHD Symbol Points For each code de nition the s
197. e Pitcure Name will remove the image from the display list The Entire Line button removes all the elds from display for the current GIS table Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite MDB GIS Prompting must be created in De ne Template Database and points or entities must have linked GIS information Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 278 GIS Query Report Function This command applies a user de ned query on a data table Records in the table that pass the query can be reported or the associated entities can be highlighted in the drawing The Query Using option sets the source of the data table to process as either GIS data attached to selected drawing entities or from the current Output MDB le The query is de ned in the dialog shown here The top portion of the dialog contains a list of the query parameters To add a parameter select a table name from the Table pop up list The available tables will either be all the tables found in the GIS links of the drawing or all the tables from the Output MDB le depending on the Query Using option Once a parameter has been added for a table all the other query parameters must come from the same table Once the table is speci ed the Field Name pop up list contains all the available elds in the table Choose a eld from this list Next choose the operator gt etc from the operator list The Value pop up list contains all the different values for that eld that ar
198. e centerline can be slope staked These design les can be created with commands in the Roads menu Section les sct can be used instead of design les when the road is too complicated to model using design les For example if the road contains special ditches at various offsets and varying lane widths then it may be easier to enter a nal section le than to de ne the template and template transitions A section le consists of offset elevation points at different stations At a minimum each station should contain the pivot point offset elevations The slope staking routine will start the cut ll slope from the furthest offset point in the section For Road Commands 171 example when staking the right side the right most offset will be used as the pivot point The section le can optionally contain additional offsets such as centerline and edge of pavement The program can then report the horizontal and vertical distances from the catch point to these additional offsets The section pivot offsets can also be assigned a description which the program reports before starting the slope staking For example a pivot offset could be 2 1 from at bottom ditch which is reported to the operator When using section les a centerline le is also required to establish the horizontal alignment Any station along the centerline can be slope staked because the program will interpolate between entered section stations The cut l
199. e directory Forexample survey not would be the note le for survey crd The note le is a text le that stores apoint number together with the additional description for the point There is no limit to the lengthof the note Notes can be added to points in Coordinate File Utilities under Input Edit Point The List Points command can be used to print out the notes Point Defaults Function This command sets the point options Descriptions determine whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point descriptions are labeled in the point block Likewise Elevations sets prompting Points Commands 57 and labeling for point elevations Locate on Real Z Axis switches between locating points at zero elevation and at the actual stored elevations Instrument amp Rod Height turns on prompting for instrument and rod heights when creating points Symbol Numbers will prompt for a symbol number as each point is drawn Otherwise the Symbol Number set in this dialog will automatically be used The point Attribute Layout ID controls the location of the point number elevation and description If you want to change the default position then edit the drawing SURV SUP SRVPNO1 You can use the MOVE command to arrange the point attributes Then you can save as a different setup by changing the last number of this le name to a different number or letter and then setting this letter or number as the layout ID in Point Defa
200. e factor to the transformation The scale factor will be based on the alignment points and should always be very near 1 0 to be correct The Rigid Body option will align by translate and rotate but no scale Any difference in scale between the GPS and local coordinate systems will be distributed equally between the two alignment points These differences will appear as horizontal residuals in the Alignment dialog Two pairs of points are suf cient to de ne the translation rotation and scale for the transformation But adding more alignment points yields the most accurate results for aligning to existing coordinate systems Since two pairs of coordinates are suf cient to de ne the transformation there is extra data when there are three or more pairs The program uses a least squares best t routine to nd the transformation that minimizes the residuals This one best t transformation is used to convert from the GPS to the local coordinate system for all the points The residuals are the differences between the transformed GPS coordinates and the actual local coordinates A multiple point alignment is especially helpful on a survey which covers a large area The error in raw GPS coordinates increases as you get farther from the base Taking alignment points around the perimeter of your job site as alignment points will give you the best geometry for the alignment Typical Alignment Scenarios Scenario New site In this case there are no e
201. e found in the current data set You can either select one of these values or type in another value into this eld When all the parameter values are set pick the Add Parameter button When all the parameters are de ned for the query you can save these settings by lling out a GIS Commands 279 name Current Query eld and then picking the Save Query button This query can be recalled later by highlighting the query name and clicking the Load Query button Pick the Execute button to process the query With the display Report option the program will bring up the Report Formatter which allows you to choose the elds to include in the report and the report format If the display Screen option is on then the program will highlight the entities with GIS data that pass the query Point entities are highlighted by drawing a box around the point and polylines are highlighted by solid ll Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite MDB le with data or entities with linked GIS information Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 280 POPULATION NAME COUNTRY CAPITAL 23 620 000 Tokyo Japan Y 16 472 000 New York US N 15 850 000 Seoul Korea Rep Y 15 175 000 Sao Paulo Brazil N 15 040 000 Osaka Japan N 14 100 000 Mexico City Mexico Y 13 100 000 Moskva Russia Y 11 100 000 Calcutta India N 11 100 000 London UK Y 10 750 000 Buenos Aires Argentina Y 10 150 000 Rio de Janeiro Brazil N Create Links Function This comma
202. e material name is used in the Earthworks amp Final Contours report To specify cut treatment pick the Cut icon There is room to specify up to ve cut slopes which can be slopes in series or slopes to use at different depths In a simple case of one cut slope you can just enter the one slope value and leave the depth and other slope boxes blank For Slopes in Series each slope is used up to the speci ed depth until an intersection with the ground If the intersection is not reached by the rst slope then the next slope continues from where the rst ended If you have more than ve slopes pick the Repeat Slopes option which will repeat the sequence of entered slopes until the ground is reached With Slopes in Series off just one of the slopes is used depending on the depth For example set the dialog as shown to use 4 to 1 slopes at depths up to 4 feet 3 1 up to 10 and 2 1 if deeper The effect is 4 1 if shallow and by contrast 2 1 if the ll is deep The Smooth Transitions option will gradually transition the slopes from one range to the next In this example if the depth is 5 feet the slope will be between 4 1 and 3 1 The Pivot at Subgrade option will position the cut pivot point where the bottom subgrade intersects the template grade The Tie to Existing Point will draw the cut slope from Road Commands 201 Three cut slopes in series the cut pivot point to either the outside offset elevation or an offset elevation point with a
203. e options open up another dialog box each as shown above Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Objects to be changed Change Elevation Function This command will change the elevation of selected entities It can move the entity to a speci ed elevation from it s current elevation absolute or do a differential change by adding or subtracting a value from it s current elevation Edit Commands 23 If points are selected their attribute text and z axis coordinate are changed Prompts Ignore zero elevations lt Yes gt No Press Enter If you answer No then entities with elevation 0 will be changed A bsolute or D ifferential Change lt A gt A Elevation to change to 125 By using the Absolute option all entities selected are changed to the elevation 125 Select Entities for elevation change Select objects C First corner pick point Other corner pick point Select objects Enter If point objects are selected the command warns This command DOES NOT change the elevations in the CooRDinate le Use CooRDinate File Utilities menu option F to update the le Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Something to change elevation Rotate Function This command changes the display angle of objects by rotating them This command has a sub menu consisting of two items as described below By Bearing Function This command allows the user to rotate the coordinate database of al
204. e or polyline Initially the current position will be the closest vertice to where the line or polyline was selected Extending from the endpoint of a polyline will add a new point to that polyline while extending from any other point will create a new polyline There are two modes of operation draw mode and move mode When in draw mode extending will draw line or polyline segments In move mode the current position arrowhead can be moved without drawing segments The orientation of the current position arrowhead can be changed with the Right Left and Angle commands Here is a list of the Extend by Distance commands D Draw Mode Actions draw or extend the line or polyline M Move Mode Actions only move the pointer Number Distance to draw or extend R Right rotate Rotates clockwise 90 degrees L Left rotate Rotates counter clockwise 90 degrees E Extend to Edge Extends to intersection with a selected line or polyline T Total distance Sets current segment to speci ed distance A Angle change Rotates pointer by speci ed number of degrees A Align Rotates pointer to align with segment B Bearing Sets pointer direction by bearing in format Qdd mmss with Q quadrant d deg m min s sec eg 130 1005 is NE 30 deg 10 min and 5 sec S Switch Reverses pointer direction F Forward move Moves pointer to next point B Backward move Moves pointer to previous point U Undo Undo the last Extend by Distance co
205. e point hit that F2 to store You then get this screen Note that I missed it by 0 23 feet on the stationing I didn t go far enough north and 1 29 on the offset I was too close in Now I can stake one Offset point or even a second Offset point Typically one offset is placed in case the slope stake gets removed sometimes the slope stake is omited and just the offset stake is used Many surveyors like to put in a second offset stake to get line If the slope stake gets removed or is never set the 2 stakes give line to reset the slope stake The rst offset stake might get this report Slope Staking 299 Field To Finish When collecting eld data the Field to Finish process can be used to draw the points with distinct layers symbols and other settings based on the point description Each point description is looked up in the Field to Finish code table which de nes the layer symbol and other properties for that description The code de nition can also be used to draw linework between the points This code table is created using the Field to Finish command in the COGO menu Codes can be alpha numeric or alphanumeric The Carlson Field data collection functions Point Store and AutoPoints at Interval can use a Field to Finish code table Field to Finish Use Code Table For Field to Finish mapping while collecting eld data go to Con gure Field select Point Settings Under the Field to Finish heading check the boxes to t
206. e value the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value Contrast Controls the contrast and indirectly the fading effect of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value Fade Controls the fading effect of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the more the image blends with the current background color A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color In plotting the background color for fade is white Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image The preview image updates dynamically to re ect changes to the brightness contrast and fade settings Reset Resets values for brightness contrast and fade to default settings 50 50 and 0 respectively Pull Down Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite An Image in the drawing View Commands The commands in the View menu allow the user to control the appearance of the drawing screen while working on it It is useful in m
207. eads a latitude longitude and height position from the GPS rover receiver and converts these values to State Plane or UTM coordinates for the current zone as set in Con gure Field Using local coordinates and their corresponding GPS position Align Local Coordinates applies a transformation to convert the state plane or UTM coordinate to the local Carlson Field can operate in three different modes depending on the Align Local Coordinate settings 1 No points No Adjustment Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 252 2 One point Translation Only 3 Two or more points Translate Rotate and Scale Without any alignment points set Carlson Field will operate with no alignment which directly uses the state plane or UTM coordinates In order for the coordinates to be the true state plane coordinates in this alignment mode the GPS base receiver must be set up over a known point and the true Lat Long for the point must be entered in the base as the base position Otherwise if the base is set over an arbitrary point then the coordinates will not be true state plane In one point alignment mode one pair of GPS and local coordinates is speci ed The differences between the GPS and local northing easting and elevation for these points are used as the translation distances in the transformation The rotation will use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north No scale is applied in this transformation A two or more point alignment is u
208. ect Line or Polyline that de nes Bearing select line that de nes bearing Number inverse lt Distance gt 100 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt E Input an E to end the command Enter S to execute the Side Shots command or I to execute the Inverse command Pull Down Menu Location COGO Prerequisite None Side Shots Function This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings to de ne a traverse or gure The command prompts for an Angle Bearing Code which de nes the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 de ne the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 an angle turned to the left 7 an angled turned to the right 8 a de ection angle left and 9 a de ection angle right The command plots the points calculated and stores them in the current CooRDinate File if point numbering is On If Point Protect is turned On Side Shots checks if the point numbers are already stored in the le All points calculated radiate from the occupied point Use the Inverse command explained previously to de ne the occupied and backsight points Prompts Exit Line Traverse Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt 6 Code 6 for angle turned to left Enter Angle dd mmss lt 45 5413 gt 22 3524 Angle of 22 degrees 35 minutes 24 seconds Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 82 Nu
209. eet From 550 to 800 EOP would be 18 feet From 800 to 850 EOP Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 208 transitions from 18 back to 12 feet Cut and Fill slopes can also be transitioned by picking the Cut and Fill buttons Ditch and Berm grades can also be modi ed here Transitions can also be applied to the left right or both sides This allows you to have separate overlapping transitions for the left and right sides The Link to Next Transition option joins the current transition to the next transition without returning to the normal template For example consider a normal template with an EOP width of 12 feet Then this template transitions starting at station 100 to 18 feet at station 200 Then starting at station 500 the template widens to 24 feet at station 600 Next the begins transitioning back to normal at station 800 and reaches normal 12 feet at station 900 For this dual transition make the following two transitions Transition 1 Set EOP to 18 feet Begin Transition 100 Begin Full 200 Link to next transition ON Transition 2 Set EOP to 24 feet Begin Transition 500 Begin Full 600 End Full 800 End Transition 900 Link to next transition OFF Prompts New or Existing Choose New to create a transition le or Edit to modify a transition le Template File to Edit Specify a transition le Road Commands 209 Template Transition dialog Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A template
210. either a point or an azimuth Backsight Point is only used if Point Number is selected as your Backsight Method If you want to use an azimuth instead of a backsight point select the Azimuth toggle and specify the azimuth in the Bksight Azi box Set the Instrument Height and Rod Height These values will use whatever units your drawing uses feet or meters Carlson Field expects the instrument to have the horizontal angle zeroed on the backsight Part of the station setup procedure needs to include zeroing the instrument on the backsight To do this rst specify the occupy point and backsight in this dialog Then orient the instrument to the backsight and pick Zero Hz to zero the gun The BS Check button runs a backsight check The program will take a shot and compare the calculated point to the expected backsight point and report the results to you This will help you establish if the point you are using as the backsight point is really the point that you think it is For some robotic total stations the Backsight Check routine has an option to automatically turn the instrument to the backsight Then after the check is done the instrument Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 230 can be automatically turned back to the previous direction The purpose of this auto turn is to speed up the steps to check the backsight in the middle of surveying points in a different direction For some types of total stations the Total Station Setup dialog will al
211. eld Reference Guide 104 This routine processes the direct and reverse shots and simpli es the raw le by replacing the sets of direct and reverse shots with the resulting average traverse record Tools gt Update Raw from Points This option updates the horizontal angle distance and vertical angle data in the raw le using the coordinates from the CRD le This routine can be used to generate a raw le from just point numbers To create raw data from points rst create rows of Traverse and or SideShot records in the spreadsheet containing only the occupied and foresight point numbers You can also set the angle code to the desired format Then run Update Raw from Points and all the angles and distances will be lled in Observations Type Setup FSight HorzAngle Distance Vertical BD 2 1 359 5950 173 8240 89 5308 BR 2 1 180 0000 173 8310 270 0654 FR 2 3 84 3443 176 9730 269 2822 FD 2 3 264 3439 177 0150 90 3142 BD 2 1 359 5953 173 8290 89 4920 BR 2 1 179 5957 173 8500 270 1059 FR 2 3 84 3536 177 0080 269 3238 FD 2 3 264 3524 177 0190 90 2722 Reduced Sets HorzAngle Residual FS Diff BK Diff 264 3446 0 0024 0 0004 0 0010 264 3535 0 0024 0 0012 0 0004 Vertical Residual Diff Distance Residual Diff 90 3140 0 0209 0 0004 176 9940 0 0098 0 0420 90 2722 0 0209 0 0000 177 0135 0 0097 0 0110 Means HorzAngle SD Distance SD Vertical SD 264 3510 0 0024 177 0038 0 0098 90 2931 0 0209 Direct Reverse R
212. elow shows a graphical example Prompts Interpolate Elevations lt Y gt Enter Point w elevation to calculate from Pick point or point number 1 2nd Point w elevation Pick point or point number 2 These points don t have to be on the entity selected to divide Select Entity to Divide pick point on entity COGO Commands 87 After selecting the points above new points are located along the selected entity Create Points from Entities Function This command will create Carlson points at end coordinates stored in the selected entities The points are both stored to the current CRD le and drawn on the screen The entities to process are selected from the drawing and can include polylines lines arcs points faces inserts and text For arcs and polylines with arc segments points are created at the radius points of the arcs This dialog appears for setting the options for creating points To create points automatically using the elevation of the entities and not getting prompted for each point elevation turn Elevations off and click on Locate on Real Z Axis The types of entities to process are speci ed in the dialog shown below The Entity Layer for Description option will use the layer name of the entities as the descriptions for the created points The Avoid Duplicates with Existing Points option will not create a point if a point with the same coordinates already exists in the current CRD le If you have used one
213. ement It then allows the user to modify or de ne the parameters speci c to the type of element The following are some of the things to remember about data entry in the centerline editor These are valid for lines curves and spirals Road Commands 181 Wherever length of the element is to be entered entering an expression of the type 123 5 93 7 would evaluate the difference of the values This is particularly convenient where only the stations of the start and end points of the element are known When the station is speci ed the program takes the length of the element as the difference between the station of the start point of the element and the station speci ed All bearings are to be speci ed by entering the angle between 0 and 90 degree in dd mmss format and selecting the quadrant When entering the delta angle of a curve only the absolute value between 0 and 360 degree is to be entered The direction of the curve is to be explicitly set as right or left the default being left All angles are entered in degrees minutes and seconds as dd mmss Point numbers when used access their coordinates in the current CRD le If the point number speci ed has no coordinates stored in the coordinate le the point number is remembered for that particular location say the radius point of a curve or the SC point of a spiral Then when the CL le is saved the program creates points for
214. enced image in the new path the image s status changes to Not Found If you do not choose Save Path after editing the path Carlson Field uses the original image path the next time you load the drawing 2 Under the Image dialog box you can attach an image 3 In the Image dialog box you must rst identify the image and the path Name This eld identi es the image you have selected to attach either from the Select Image File dialog box an unattached image or from the list of previously attached images To add another instance of an image le that is already attached select the image name from the list and choose OK Browse This option opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard le selection dialog box If Show Preview is selected Carlson Field displays a preview of the selected le Retain Path This option saves the path of the image le with the image de nition If Retain Path is not selected only the image name is saved and Carlson Field searches the Support File Search Path 4 Under Insertion Point you must specify the insertion point for the selected image Specify On Screen is the default The default insertion point is 0 0 Specify On Screen This option directs input to the command line or the pointing device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the insertion point in X Y and Z X This eld sets the X coordinate value Y This eld sets the Y coordinate value Z This eld sets the Z
215. ent Markers etc are disable These options may all be accessed with the submenus accessible through the Control button 10 Ensure that the Synch time of the Rover and Base are the same This setting may be accessed by rst pressing Control and then cycling through the menus until the MASKS SYNCH TIME option is available Rover Station 1 After powering on the receiver press the Control Button From the selections available select MORE This will bring up a second page of options Select MORE again The front panel screen should now be on RECEIVER CONTROL 3 of 7 2 Select BAUD RATE FORMAT and from the menu that this creates select SERIAL PORT 1 SETTINGS 3 Ensure that the port is set to 38400 baud 8 Odd 1 Format with no ow control 4 Similarly make sure that the settings for I O Port 2 agree with those of the type of radio being used typically 9600 8 None 1 5 Return to the RECEIVER CONTROL menus and go to page 2 6 Select RTK ROVER CONTROL 7 Toggle the ENABLE setting to L1 L2 Trimble 341 8 Push the Status button and select POSITION There should now be an RTK option Select it This will bring up a screen displaying delta Northing Easting correction status etc 9 Ensure that the STATIC option appears at the right This means you are in kinematic rover mode If instead the ROVE option is available select it 10 Ensure that all other forms of output Cycled Output 1PPS output Event Ma
216. ent instead of radios for RTK work For GS50 receivers you can choose between US Coast Guard or Racal for the corrections Power Cycle Receiver shuts the receiver off and turns it back on This forces the receiver to reinitialize tracking satellites and the position solution This routine is useful if the receiver is stuck in oat solution Send Command to Receiver allows experienced users to type in Leica commands or send a le to set or report internal settings See the Leica operations manuals for a complete list of Leica GPS receiver commands Create Base REF File takes a reading from the GPS receiver and stores this lat lon to a reference le ref that can be used later in Con gure Base Station The purpose is to allow moving the base station based on the current base setup In this case Create Base REF File would be run from the rover receiver while in xed position Then the base could be moved to this point without having to redo the local coordinate alignment Con gure Rover sets the receiver to rover mode Con gure Base Station initiates the receiver attached to be a base and begin broadcasting its stationary position and satellite corrections to the rover See Con gure Base Station for All GPS Brands at end of this section Novatel GPS Setup Carlson Field works with the original Novatel Outriders and the just released Outrider DL s includ ing the centimeter accurate RT 2 RTK receivers and the sub meter ac
217. enterline 137 Storing 305 306 Story Stake By Points 179 Story Stake By Polyline 180 subgrades 197 204 SUP 2 58 124 134 167 218 220 Super Elevation 203 Index 347 surface model 5 42 57 151 160 302 SurvCE SurvStar Data Trans 89 SurvCOGO 94 96 Survis 94 96 SURVSETV 15 SurvStar 89 90 124 254 287 288 306 307 Symbol Size 52 128 System Requirements 2 TDS 91 TDS CR 79 Template 26 120 129 144 205 208 209 229 276 278 283 287 288 317 Template Stakeout 170 197 Template Transition 207 209 Text 10 14 18 26 43 44 52 53 61 64 65 67 79 128 137 153 195 217 220 Text Style 52 Time Date in Point Notes 226 311 Toolbars 15 Topcon Total Stations 337 Total Station Setup 231 232 262 313 Track Position 222 270 335 Training Movies 293 Transformation 68 69 224 Transit 100 201 202 208 209 Translate Points 71 Traverse 58 59 79 83 91 92 94 95 98 100 105 107 110 111 115 Triangulate amp Contour 159 161 164 Triangulation File 160 triangulation le 142 145 146 159 160 164 Trim 18 65 233 238 240 241 328 Trimble 340 343 Twist Screen Line 37 Twist Screen Standard 37 Twist Screen Surveyor 38 Two Surface Volumes 154 155 157 Typical Alignment Scenarios 256 Typical Template 207 Undo 16 32 41 42 69 136 260 Units Control 25 53 Universal Transverse Mercator 68 Update Drawing from CRD File 69 Update from
218. enterline for the template and the program will drawn parallel 3D polylines for each break point in the template The template le is de ned in the Section Pro le module Entity Type This de nes the line type to be created Points only does not create any line work 3D Polyline can be used for barrier lines STRUCTURES BLC spt0 0 08 0 04 BLDG 3DPolyline Close BYLAYER DECK spt0 0 08 0 04 DECK 2DPolyline Close BYLAYER CWL spt0 0 08 0 04 SIDEWALK 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER CWR spt34 0 08 0 04 SIDEWALK 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER DWL spt10 0 08 0 04 DRIVEWAY 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER DWR spt0 0 08 0 04 DRIVEWAY 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER FENCES amp WALLS PAT spt0 0 08 0 04 PATIO 2DPolyline Close BYLAYER FPC spt0 0 08 0 04 FENCE 2DPolyline Open guard FPW spt0 0 08 0 04 FENCE 2DPolyline Open gas line 26T 26 TREE spt61 0 26 0 04 TREE Point Open continuous EL spt0 0 08 0 04 EOP 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER ER spt0 0 08 0 04 EOP 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER GAR spt0 0 08 0 04 GARAGE 2DPolyline Close BYLAYER POOL spt0 0 08 0 04 POOL Smooth 2D Close BYLAYER RC spt0 0 08 0 04 CLINE 2DPolyline Open BYLAYER SC DFLT spt0 0 08 0 04 PNTS MIS Point Open continuous SHD spt0 0 08 0 04 SHED 2DPolyline Close BYLAYER TL spt0 0 08 0 04 TREE Smooth 2D Open BYLAYER TP TRAVERSE POINT spt15 0 08 0 04 TRAVERSE 2DPolyline Close BYLAYER UP POLE spt20 0 13 0 04 UTILITY 2DPolyline Open electric W spt5 0 13 0 04 UTILITY 2DPolyline Open
219. eport Tools gt Find Bad Angle This routine applies the angular error to each traverse record one at a time The adjusted traverse record that improves the closure the most is reported as the Bad Angle The angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a reference angle Tools gt Append Another Raw File This routine prompts for another raw le rw5 which is read and the data added to the end of the existing raw le For example if you are editing the raw le from the rst days work and have a separate raw le with a second days work you can use this routine to add the second raw data to the rst raw le Tools gt Draw Traverse Sideshot Lines COGO Commands 105 This routine draws lines for all the traverse and sideshot records Sideshot Traverses are traverses that do not lead to the closing or ending point There are different layers so that the lines can be drawn with different colors This command does not process the raw le Instead it reads the raw le and for each traverse and sideshot record the program looks up the coordinates for the occupied and foresight points in the CRD le So it may be necessary to run Process gt No Adjust before running this routine Tools gt Renumber Points This routine renumbers points in the raw le This applies to all point numbers including TR SS and PT records The range of point numbers to change and the amount to change is speci ed in the dial
220. es Con gure Command Prompt Set Data Directory Function This command sets the data directory to use as the default directory for creating Carlson data les such as coordinate crd and pro le pro les The routine shows the tree structure of existing directories available on your computer The display is set to the current data directory To set the data directory highlight the directory name and then click OK To create a new data directory rst highlight the parent directory to create the new one inside and then pick the Create Directory button Then the program will prompt you for the new directory name The Remove Directory button allows you to delete directories that have no les inside Pulldown Menu Location File gt Project Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 8 Drawing Explorer Function The Drawing Explorer command presents a list of all Carlson data les that are made in association with a drawing The knowledge of these les is contained in the ini le that shares the drawing name e g Estates dwg Es tates ini If a drawing was not made in Carlson or does not have a companion ini le then Drawing Explorer will display No Files If Con gure General Settings Save Drawing INI Files is clicked off then Drawing Explorer will again display No Files Drawing Explorer will also not show any data les where the drawing name starts with the 7 letters Drawi
221. es 18 22 or RTCM DGPS Message 1 and 9 When con gured to BASE changing the correction type changes the type being sent When con gured to ROVER changing the correction type changes the type the unit is listening for A ROVER will ignore all incoming correction messages except those of the type speci ed Con gure Ports Submenu The Control Port should be con gured to Port A or Port B depending on which of the Navcom units ports you are plugged into Note that the Control Port refers to the number of the port on the Navcom unit NOT the number of the COM port on your computer If the Control Port is con gured improperly you will not be able to communicate with your Navcom unit The RTK Data Port refers to the device port out of which RTK corrections will be sent This value should be set to Radio Port unless you want to set up a non wireless Base Rover connection through Port A or Port B The RTK Data Port cannot be the same as the Control Port Con gure Radio Submenu The Radio ID is the value used to identify a unit on a wireless network of Navcom units Make sure that no other Navcom unit in your vicinity shares the same Radio ID By default the Radio ID is the same as your Navcom unit s serial number This value can be changed although there isn t usually any need to do so The Local Radio Type can be set to either Master or Slave Radio communication will only work between Masters and Slaves Only one unit on your netw
222. esign elevation can be de ned by four methods as set in the dialog show The Design Files method uses a centerline le CL for the horizontal alignment and a pro le le PRO for the vertical alignment A template le TPL for the design cross section is optional for the cross slope Without a template le the program will use the elevation of the pro le along the centerline A superelevation le SUP and a template transition le are optional These design les can be created with the routines in the Roads menu The Section File method uses a centerline le for the horizontal alignment and a section le SCT for the design elevation The section le consists of cross sections of offset elevation points for a series of stations Section les can be used instead of the Design Files method when a road design is too complicated to model using design les For example if the road contains special ditches at various offsets and varying lane widths then it may be easier to enter a nal section le than to de ne the template and template transitions The Points method uses two points to de ne both the horizontal alignment and design elevations The design elevation is linearly interpolated between the points The points to used are speci ed in the next dialog by entering point numbers from the current coordinate le or by directly entering the coordinates The 3D Polyline method uses a 3D polyline for both the horizon
223. ess MDB database les to attach data to drawing entities You do not have to have Access installed on your computer to use this method The GIS links associate drawing entities to database records by attaching extended entity data EED to the entities These links are self contained The link EED contains the template lename MDB the database le name MDB the table name and the record ID The database le and table names de ne where the data record is stored and these names are speci ed by the user when the link is created The record ID is a unique key number to identify the record in the table This number is automatically generated The template le is the one database con guration le that GIS links use to de ne the format of the database tables This le is an MDB database with three tables CGIS LINKS CGIS CAT and CGIS SMART PROMPTING Each type of database table is assigned a name called a GIS name The CGIS LINKS table contains a list of the de ned table names with their assigned GIS names Each GIS name can optionally be assigned a category name for easier organization of GIS table names The CGIS CAT table de nes the category name for each GIS name For each GIS table name the template le de nes the elds for that table Each eld is assigned a eld name a prompt for data input and default values The CGIS SMART PROMPTING table contains these eld de nitions The note les store additional dat
224. est way to do this is to use the antenna s automatic frequency scanning when rst powering on the receiver a To do this enter the SETUP menu and select the option AUTO BX SEARCH Note that the beacon automatically selected by this scan will be saved to the receiver s memory and used automati cally in the future until either the scan is executed again or until a new beacon is speci ed manually Thus it is not necessary to scan each time the bacon is used provided it is still operating in the same general area b A scan can be performed again in the event that the beacon is lost to scan for the next nearest beacon 3 Enter the Setup menu then select Options then NMEA ON OFF This menu allows the enabling or disabling of various NMEA messages The only ones which are necessary are the GGA GSV and GSA messages All others should be disabled Software Setup Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 320 4 In Carlson Field no further setup is necessary to make use of the CSI GBX Pro Simply use the other Carlson Field functions as normal Note however that the elevations reported by the CSI GBX Pro are MSL Mean Sea Level Geodimeter Geodimeter 600 For Remote Mode Note Firmware version 696 03 xx or higher is required on the instrument To check the version pick MNU 5 4 1 SET UP 1 Connect the instrument to the battery pack There is no need to connect the keyboard to the battery if it is going to be turned off or a
225. et elds After spec ying the stakeout stations and offsets Carlson Field uses the same stakeout function as used in the Stakeout command This stakeout function guides you to the stakeout point and reports the cut ll to the design elevation You can store the stakeout point When the stakeout is done the station offset dialog appears for staking the next point Either enter the next station offset or pick Exit to end Template Stakeout For total stations you should run the Equipment Setup command before Template Stakeout to set the occupied point backsight and instrument height Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 170 Stakeout dialog for total stations Stakeout dialog for GPS Slope Staking Function This command guides you to the catch point where the cut ll slope intersects the existing ground Coordinates from the GPS receiver or total station are used to model the existing ground There are four methods for de ning the cut ll slopes Design Files Section File User Entry 3D Polyline Design les include a centerline le cl pro le le pro and template le tpl The centerline de nes the horizontal alignment the pro le de nes the vertical alignment and the template de nes the cross slopes and cut ll slopes Superelevation sup and template transitions tpt les can also be used Using the design les any station along th
226. ew Commands 33 Center Point Select point which is the desired center point in the new view Magni cation or Height lt 3 gt 2x Objects will be scaled up by a factor of two if the user input was 0 4 objects will be scaled down by a factor of 0 4 Magni cation or Height lt 3 gt 2 Objects will be scaled up by a factor of 3 over 2 if the user input were 5 objects would have been scaled down by a factor of 3 over 5 Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Extents Function This command zooms to encompass the extents of all the objects or entities in the current drawing If the drawing objects are beyond the limits of the current drawing or if there are no objects in the drawing then the view zooms to the drawing limits Zoom In Function This command zooms the view by a factor of 2 relative to the current view The center of the view remains the same while objects appear twice their original size Zoom Out Function This command zooms the view by a factor of 0 5 relative to the current view The center of the view remains the same while objects appear half their original size Pan Function This command moves the view based on user speci cation to cover a different portion of the drawing The user can specify the displacement and direction in which to move the display Prompts Displacement Select a point on the drawing to be the starting point of the line which de nes the pan If a displaceme
227. ex to remove pick point on polyline Select polyline vertex to remove Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Offset Polyline Function This command allows you to offset a polyline entity in both the horizontal and vertical directions There are three offset methods The Interval method applies one horizontal and one vertical offset to all the vertices of the polyline The Constant method has a horizontal offset and sets the elevation of the polyline to one constant elevation The Variable method allows you to specify each horizontal and vertical offset individually either by polyline segment or for each point The vertical offset can be speci ed by actual vertical distance percent slope or slope ratio Prompts Enter the offset method lt Interval gt Constant Variable Enter Enter the horizontal offset amount 15 Percent Ratio Vertical offset amount lt 0 gt 10 Select a polyline to offset Enter for none select 3D POLY Select side to offset pick point Select a point on the graphics screen that is in the direction of the side of line to offset Select a polyline to offset Enter for none Enter Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Polylines to offset Edit Commands 29 Join Nearest Function This command joins lines or polylines together Join Nearest allows you to join lines that do not exactly meet The maximum distance to
228. ext will be treated as a separate text object and can be edited and shifted independently Prompts Justify Style lt Start point gt Type j to choose Justify Align Fit Center Middle Right TL TC TR ML MC MR BL BC BR Choose any one option In the options with two letters the T stands for Top M for Middle and B for Bottom the L for Left R for Right and C for Center The Align option allows the user to choose the direction of the text the Fit option takes two points as options and ts text between those points The other options are self explanatory Justify Style lt Start point gt Select start point Rotation Angle lt E gt Select the angle of rotation for the text Height lt 0 2 gt Select text size Text Write the text to be inserted Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Hatch Function Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 44 This command lls selected closed polylines and objects with hatchings It comes up with a dialog box that allows the user to choose the type of pattern whether it is pre de ned user de ned or custom de ned For prede ned patterns the speci c pattern to be used in the hatch can be chosen from a list of available patterns The scale of the hatch and the angle of inclination of the patterns can also be speci ed For ISO patterns the pen width can be speci ed If the pattern is selected to be user de ned then the hatch is primarily lines whose spacing a
229. f is the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations Ambiguity Fixing Parameter 95 99 9 controls the con dence level of xed positions The default is 99 0 At a lower con dence interval the system solves much faster If the system incorrectly solves the position then the position error will be much greater than the reported RMS value Power Cycle Receiver is the same as turning the Javad receiver off and then on Field Commands 235 Restore Factory Defaults resets the Javad receiver to factory settings the receiver stops acting as base or rover The baud rate of Port A will be set to 115 200 Reset this to 9600 by turning the receiver off and then on while holding down the FN button Watch the REC light go from orange to green to red and then let up the FN button This method can be used if Carlson Field cannot establish communications at any time Clear Non Volatile Memory does everything Restore Factory Defaults does and also wipes out the almanac data that tells it where to look for the satellites The receiver then downloads a new almanac from the satellites Send Command to Receiver allows experienced users to type in commands using Javad GPS receiver commands to set or report internal settings See the Javad operations manuals for a complete list of Javad GPS receiver commands Create Base REF File takes a reading from the GPS receiver and stores this lat lon to
230. f the GPS antenna to the ground The Show Carlson Field Startup Icon controls whether the Carlson Field Startup Icon is displayed in the lower right of the screen This startup icon brings up the Carlson Field function menu for launching Carlson Field commands without having to pick them from the pulldown menu The Use Bold Font toggles between using standard or bold font for the Carlson Field dialogs The Twist Screen In Direction Of Movement will rotate the drawing view so that your current direction of movement is facing straight up in the view This rotate is for the view only and does not change the coordinates This option only applies to GPS and robotic total stations in commands that show the arrow icon such as Track Position The Station Type chooses the format of centerline station labels Typically 1 00 is used for feet units 1 000 is used for metric and 100 has no plus symbol in the number Serial COM Port The GPS receiver or total station attaches to your Carlson Field computer using a serial cable This cable is plugged into a serial COM port on your computer called 1 2 3 or 4 Check the circle denoting the COM Port to be used The Baud Rate Parity Char Length and Stop Bits are the serial port communication parameters for the Carlson Field computer These parameters need to match the parameters on the instrument that you are using The Defaults button will set these communication parameters to the standard parameters for the cu
231. f your Navcom unit has an earlier rmware version contact Navcom for a free upgrade Carlson Field has been tested extensively with Navcom models RT 3010S and RT 3020M From the Navcom GPS setup menu or any of its submenus the current device settings can be obtained by clicking the Retrieve Settings button New settings can be saved by clicking the Save Settings or the Save Settings and Exit button To cancel your changes click Cancel without Saving Mikrofyn Lightbar 327 By changing the SV Elevation Mask you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any satellite below a speci ed elevation angle Range 0 90 By changing the PDOP Mask you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any GPS solution with a PDOP above a speci ed value Range 1 25 By changing the RTK Max Age you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any RTK corrections older than a speci ed number of seconds Range 0 1275 Multiple of 5 By changing the Base Station ID on a base you can provide your base with a unique identifying number so that rovers can specify which base they want to use for corrections By changing this settingson a rover you can specify which base unit you want to use If 0 is speci ed the rover will use any base station it can nd The base station ID only applies when using the RTCM correction format Range 1 1023 You can choose between 4 different Correction Types NCT Navcom Proprietary CMR Trimble s format RTCM RTK Messag
232. face grade continues out from the median Surface grades can be entered by selecting the Grades icon which brings up the dialog shown Downhill slopes are negative and the Distance is the horizontal distance The text ID serves 4 purposes 1 The ID will be applied as a description to all nal template points generated in the form of a coordinate CRD le 2 The ID can be used as a design point as in EP 5 indicating 5 feet or meters right of edge of pavement 3 Points of common ID may be connected by 3D polylines as an output option of Earthwork amp Final Contours and 4 Quantities can be generated with reference to the ID and material gravel concrete etc entered elsewhere within Design Template To add a curb select the Curb icon The dialog box below appears where you can ll in the curb dimensions There are three curb types to choose from The curb dimensions can be speci ed in feet inches or meters in metric mode The Rounding option will smooth the surface of the Road Commands 199 Integral and separate curbs Straight amp rounded curbs Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 200 curb which only shows when the template is applied in commands such as Earthwork amp Final Contours The Integral Separate option determines whether to draw the front line of the curb to separate the curb from the subgrade The slope of the curb can either be at set to the slope of the incoming grade or set to a user speci ed slope Th
233. faults The GIS File option speci es a GIS le to be used when creating new points The GIS le contains a list of elds to prompt for For each point that is created the program will prompt for these elds and store the results to the note le not associated with the current CRD le Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite None Draw Locate Points Function This command inserts either new or existing points into the drawing New points are created by picking points or by entering northing and easting coordinates Existing points are placed by entering the points numbers which reference the current coordinate le You will be prompted to choose a coordinate le if no coordinate le is current The routine Coordinate File Utilities can be used to view the current coordinate le or to select a new one For creating new points the Descriptions and Elevations toggles control whether you are prompted for elevations and descriptions for each point For placing both new and existing points Descriptions and Elevations determine whether these attribute are labeled with the point inserts The Locate on Real Z Axis toggle determines if the points are placed at their elevations or at zero elevation There are more options for locating points in the Point Defaults and Drawing Setup commands Points Commands 59 The Point Numbers option controls whether the complete point block is drawn or just the symbol and node When cre
234. for northwest AZ for azimuth AL for angle left AR for angle right DL for de ection angle left and DR for de ection angle right To set the angle code pick on the Code down arrow and choose from the list The horizontal and vertical angles should be entered as dd mmss For example 45 2305 is 45 degrees 23 minutes and 5 seconds The vertical angle can be shown as vertical angle 0 degrees level zenith angle 90 degrees level or elevation difference The vertical angle mode is set in the Display menu The distance mode is also set in the Display menu as either slope or horizontal distance The description eld is used as the foresight point description SS SideShot The sideshot record is the same as the traverse record except that sideshot does not move the setup HI Instrument and Rod Height This record sets the instrument and rod heights used in elevation calculations This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that you want the heights applied to BK BackSight The backsight record contains the occupied point number backsight point number backsight azimuth and the set azimuth This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that use this setup If no backsight point is entered the program uses the backsight azimuth to turn angles from The Set Azimuth is the circle reading of the instrument when sighting the backsight A Set Azimuth of zero is the default PT Store Point The store point reco
235. fore using it however it is best to power it down and then turn it back on normally as running it in Setup Mode is not recommended Trimble 4000 Series Hardware Setup 1 Setup the antenna and GPS receiver as normal The radio should be on I O Port 2 2 Connect the Computer that Carlson Field is running on to I O Port 1 by the appropriate cable Front Panel Con guration Base Station 1 After powering on the receiver press the Control Button From the selections available select MORE This will bring up a second page of options Select MORE again The front panel screen should now be on RECEIVER CONTROL 3 of 7 2 Select BAUD RATE FORMAT and from the menu that this creates select SERIAL PORT 1 SETTINGS 3 Ensure that the port is set to 38400 baud 8 Odd 1 Format with no ow control 4 Similarly make sure that the settings for I O Port 2 agree with those of the type of radio being used typically 9600 8 None 1 5 Return to the RECEIVER CONTROL menu and go to page 4 o 7 Select REFERENCE POSITION 6 Enter the Lat Lon of the position the base is located at Alternately select HERE to have the GPS unit read the current position and use that as the base reference point 7 On page 1 of the RECEIVER CONTROL menu select RTK OUTPUT CONTROL 8 Set the RTK OUTPUTS to Port 2 and the ANTENNA HEIGHT to the measured height of the antenna 9 Ensure that all other forms of output Cycled Output 1PPS output Ev
236. formation for the simple Road Commands 183 curve is given with zero spiral lengths In this method however the central PI point of the spiral MUST be speci ed that is it is always in Hold PI Points mode The tangent out can be de ned by entering bearing or by specifying a point on the forward tangent This forward tangent point can be the next PI coordinates The direction of the spiral in and spiral out elements would be the same as the direction of the simple curve left or right The spiral can be de ned by several different parameters and the order that you enter data into the spiral dialog can be important There are two main sequences for entering data The method to use depends on the spiral data that you have The rst method is to enter the radius of the simple Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 184 curve the spiral in and out lengths the tangent bearing out and the PI station The second method is to make a Line segment coming up to the TS tangent to spiral point This Line segment should be added before creating the Spiral element Then with the Spiral In point set to the TS point enter the radius of the simple curve the spiral in and out lengths the curve direction left or right and the arc length of the simple curve Then the rest of the spiral points will be calculated Once all the elements of the centerline are de ned the le can be saved and then plotted using the Centerline to Polyline command
237. g O for Options The Angle Right option prompts for the angle right and skips the angle bearing code prompt The Azimuth option prompts for the azimuth and skips the angle bearing code prompt Prompts Occupied Point Pick point or point number pick point You will only be prompted for the occupied point the rst time you use the command Use the Inverse command to set the occupied and backsight points Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt Enter Pressing Enter uses the default angle right code Enter Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 1324 You can also enter L or R to de ne an angle 90 degrees Left or Right Backsight Point Pick point or point number pick point Number inverse lt Distance gt 100 CRD File to process lt c sc data LOT crd gt Enter This prompt comes up only if you have not set a current CooRDinate le with another command Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt 14 9 45 2045 Uses the bearing de ned by point numbers 14 amp 9 and subtracts the angle 45 degrees 20 minutes and 45 seconds You can use a or in this type of entry Number inverse lt Distance gt N Point number inverse i e 10 20 14 9 2 Causes the command to recall the distance from point number 14 to 9 and divide it by 2 COGO Commands 81 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt L Sel
238. ght reverse and backsight reverse shots When this option is off the program will still use the reverse shots to mean the angles Otherwise the program will also use the reverse shots to mean the distances The Use Robotics To Auto Flip Instrument option applies to robotic total stations to have the program automatically turn the instrument for reverse shots To shoot a point as a Direct amp Reverse check the D amp R box and click on Read A dialog box appears offering the choice of orders for the shots Before each shot Carlson Field tells you what kind of shot is being taken After each shot Carlson Field reports the measurements and allows you to con rm the measurement or to re shoot After all four shots are taken Carlson Field does the Field Commands 263 math and reports the accuracy of each part of the measurement Choose Store after completing the Direct amp Reverse to store this new point Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 264 Stakeout Function The Stakeout function is used to nd a speci c point in the eld Once you tell Carlson Field the point that you are looking for pick Start and the program draws an X marks the spot bullseye on that point in the drawing Carlson Field also draws a triangle on the drawing for where you are currently standing These icons help to guide to to the target point graphically Carlson Field also reports in the dialog box how far you need to move to reach the point There are several
239. gt Depth Sounder Settings window and set the depth sounder Model Set the rest of these settings as you want them and click OK Go back to Monitor GPS Position Everything should appear as before except there should be a new entry called Depth and Elevation should have changed to Bottom Elv The correct depth should be showing and the Bottom Elv should be showing the elevation of the bed The usual Carlson Field functions will all work with the depth sounder active The windows for Monitor Point Store and Auto Points at Interval will display the depth when the depth sounder is set as active Chapter 3 Field User Guide 318 Equipment Reference 4 319 Apache Lightbar Carlson Field can use an external Light Bar for determining elevation differences and centerline offsets Light Bars can indicate whether your current position is in cut ll or on grade when set vertically When set horizontally Light Bars can give centerline left right offsets Currently Carlson Field supports a light bar made by Apache as well as by Mikrofyn that has arrows for up down or left right and a row of lights for on grade The Light Bar must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS CSI GBX Pro Hardware Setup 1 Connect the receiver to the antenna by coaxial antenna cable if it is not already connected and ensure that that the receiver has ample power 2 Ensure that the antenna is tracking corrections from an MSK Radio Beacon The easi
240. h PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC attributes These attributes represent thepoint number elevation and description respectively The point node is a POINT entity and is usedfor picking the point with the NODE snap The point node is also used as the X Y Z coordinatein surface modeling The symbol is one of the Carlson point symbols with a name starting withSPT followed by a number ranging from 0 to 119 These symbols can be customized with theIcon Point Symbols command SPT0 DWG is used for no symbol The points in the drawing can be linked to their coordinates in the coordinate le Thelink updates the coordinate le when a point is modi ed in the drawing For example whenpoints are moved with the ROTATE command their coordinates will be automatically updated inthe coordinate le To update the coordinate le without this automatic link you can runthe command Update From Drawing in Coordinate File Utilities Whether to use theautomatic updating is an option that is set in Con gure under General Settings The option is calledLink Points with Coordinate File This link option applies when the points are drawn With theoption active a link will be established Otherwise there will be no link Each point in the coordinate le has room for a 32 character description To have alonger description an associated point note le can be used The note le has the same le name asthe coordinate le with a NOT extension and is stored in the sam
241. h when plotted It is recommended that you set the horizontal and vertical scales in the previous dialog before accessing the sheet parameters dialog so that reasonable defaults will be set automatically The Columns of Sections Per Sheet controls how many rows of sections will be plotted on each sheet The Distance Between controls the distance that the rows of section will have between the centerline of the one section row and the next centerline of rows This edit box can only be accessed if you have a number of columns greater than one In your example we want 15 inches between the columns so we specify 300 15 x 20 In the sheet parameters area of the dialog the Block Name edit box speci es the Drawing name that will be inserted for each sheet The default is SCTSHT1 which is included with Carlson and is stored in the SUP directory You can use this or use a sheet block of your own design The block should be drawn at a 1 1 scale since the program inserts it at the horizontal scale setting from the previous dialog The Distance Between edit box in the sheet parameters area controls the distance from the bottom of one sheet and the bottom of the next The Check If Rows Fit Sheet toggle determines Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 218 whether the program will check to see if the number of rows you speci ed will t on the sheet If toggled off no X the program will plot the number of rows speci ed regardless of the sheet size T
242. hardware model name Navigation Status Submenu If Valid Navigation reads Yes your unit has successfully solved its position If it reads No the unit s position has not yet been calculated and an error message explaining why will be displayed in the Error eld A rover will not try to use RTK corrections unless its navigation is valid Similarly a base will not broadcast correction unless its navigation is valid Navigation Status will read AUTONOMOUS if it is not receiving the type of corrections it has been con gured to use It will read FLOAT if it is receiving the right kind of corrections but hasn t nished using them to calculate its position It will read LOCK when it is receiving corrections and has successfully used them to calculate its position Navigation Mode displays the speci c type of correction that is currently being used of Satellites Used shows the number of satellites the unit is able to use in its solution All DOP values are also shown here GDOP PDOP HDOP VDOP and TDOP Click Refresh to load the latest values from the device Monitor Incoming Corrections Submenu Note To access this menu the local unit must be con gured as a ROVER This menu displays the number of seconds since the arrival of each RTK correction type At the top the correction type currently being used is displayed In NCT Correction Mode the relevant messages are 5B correction which should be arriving every second
243. has an elevation of zero The Smooth Polyline option will create Bezier smooth polyline through the points Carlson Field can keep track of several lines being drawn at once Each line corresponds to a set of points with a Field Commands 259 different description Let s say you are shooting a line of points called fence and you want to shoot some points on a curb but you re not nished with the fence You change the Desc box from fence to curb Carlson Field lets the fence line go for now It changes the Linework selection to No You want a line for your curb so you select Start The points you shoot now will form a new curb line To go back to recording fence points change the description back to fence The fence line you were working on will continue to include any new fence points you shoot If you want to end this fence line select End under Linework and Carlson Field will not connect any future fence points to this line If you start a new linework with a description that already has linework then Carlson Field pops up a dialog with three options as shown The Continue Existing Code option is the same as using Cont instead of Start The End Existing and Start New option will end the active linework and start the new linework with the same description The Use New Description option will keep the existing linework and start another linework with another description For example if you are surveying two edge of pavement lines
244. he Fit Check Height edit box speci es the height of the sheet to check against The block SCTSHT1 is 22 inches units tall so in our example dialog we specify 420 units or 21 inches since our horizontal to vertical scale ratio is two to one or 20 and 10 21 x 10 x 2 420 The 1st Section Offset from Lower Left of Sheet to CL X and Y edit boxes allows you to specify where the rst section of the rst row will be placed relative to the lower left of the section sheet In our example we speci ed 160 8 inches at 20 scale and 15 1 5 inches at 20 scale The Block SCTSHT1 has a half inch border before the 1st grid line and we want to plot starting at the second grid line which is another inch from the bottom of the sheet We want the centerline of the rst section to be slightly left of the center of the sheet which is 33 5 inches wide so we specify 15 inches 300 at 20 scale The SCT Files for Plotting area allows you to specify up to 4 four les for plotting When you select the 1st 2nd 3rd or 4th buttons the le dialog appears The order of the les you specify is typically the existing ground sections in the 1st le and the nal or proposed sections in the 2nd 3rd and 4th The 1st and 2nd are scanned to determine the vertical height of the section grid that is plotted and if the Plot End Area toggle is on they are used for the end area calculations and plotting When you select the Layers button this dialog appe
245. he right of Use Code Table For This activates Field to Finish so that points stored with descriptions that are de ned as codes in the code table are drawn using the code symbol description linetype and layer Field to Finish Code File The currently active code table le is displayed next to Code File Only one Field to Finish code table is active at a time Several code tables can be created for different clients or applications Use the Select File button to set which code le is active Selecting a Code Both functions Point Store and Auto Points at Interval can use Field to Finish capabilities Each of these data collection functions can display a list of the codes from the currently active Field to Finish code table This alleviates Chapter 3 Field User Guide 300 you from having to guess code abbreviations When you pick Code or press F7 a summary of the currently active code table appears Use Page Down or Page Up to scroll quickly though the code table Use the Up or Down arrow keys to highlight the code description desired and double click or press Enter to select If you already know the code you can just type it in the Desc eld Field to Finish Options F6 If you are using the Point Store or Auto Points at Interval functions you can change your Field to Finish settings by clicking Options or hitting F6 This brings up the Point Settings window You can toggle the Field to Finish options on or off or you can sele
246. he various data capture items in the GIS le showing the eld name the prompt the default value and the various options for that eld The Edit button allows the user to edit the highlighted eld The Add button allows the user to add new elds after the highlighted eld The Move Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 288 Up and Move Down allow the user to change the order in which elds appear in the GIS le while the Remove button completely removes the highlighted eld The Save button saves the GIS le that is currently being edited while the SaveAs allows the user to save the current GIS le under a different name The Quit button checks to see if the current GIS le is saved and quits the routine When the Edit or Add button is clicked the dialog box shown here appears allowing the user to enter and edit data with respect to a particular eld in the GIS le The Field Name is a unique identi er of the eld in the GIS le and hence a GIS le cannot have repeated eld names The Prompt is what appears at the command prompt while waits for user input The Default Value is the value that would be used among various options if the user presses lt Enter gt at the command prompt without typing anything in response to the prompt The list box Options for value contains a list of options that can be selected for the particular eld A new option can be adde
247. hen leaned back at 2 1 you would have to handle a multiple slope deal with the template approach using a centerline le pro le and template le 5 When you press OK slope staking begins to guide you to the catch point The fantastic thing about slope staking is that immediately you have a bullseye to go to which is the computed catch point It does this by guring where you are X Y Z through the GPS and it will make a plane at surface of the grade you are at intersect the 3D polyline at the set slope with that grade at the appropriate station and show the target X symbol If you are on the other side of the centerline it will show the X on the otherside right away immediately As you move it models the current surface and moves the X slightly to its correct point So all you do is walk to it In the text dialog next to the drawing the program shows the distance in out from the current position to the catch Chapter 3 Field User Guide 298 offset and the distance up down from the current station to the catch station For this example IN means in to the centerline 15 34 and UP means up the centerline up station So in this example walk north 2 08 and to the right 15 34 and set the stake As you get closer and your actual elevations on the ground change you might in fact nd yourself waling 16 07 feet in up won t change it can t perpendicular to centerline is perpendicular period 6 When you get on that slope stak
248. her they are located within the search distance Any points that are found inside are drawn Locate within Coordinate Range inserts only the points that are within the speci ed range of northing easting and elevation The program prompts for the minimum and maximum northing easting and elevations These values default to the actual min and max in the CRD le Then the program prompts for the point number range of points to check The points that are found in the point number and coordinate range are drawn Draw Nodes Only inserts only the AutoCad Point entity and not the point block and symbol This option is most useful when there are a lot of points to insert because inserting the nodes only is much faster Carlson routines like Triangulate amp Contour and Make 3D Grid File can use these points and do not need the point block and symbol Elevation Text Only draws text of the point elevation without the point block symbol or node The decimal place of elevation text is placed at the northing and easting point location For elevations Use labels the positive elevations with a leading For example 159 43 Use labels the negative elevations with a leading The Label Zeros option will label points with zero elevation when the Elevations option is on Otherwise only points with nonzero elevation will be labeled Prompts To create a new point Locate Point dialog Choose Screen Pick Point Pick point to create pick p
249. his command are controlled by this dialog The point on the object to which the command snaps is set by selecting one or more of the boxes in the Select Settings area If more than one are selected the commans snaps to the setting nearest to the selection point Endpoint Endpoint snaps to the closest end point of objects such as lines or arcs If objects have thickness it snaps to the edges For 3D objects it snaps to their edges and vertices Midpoint Midpoint snaps to the midpoints of lines or arcs For in nite lines it snaps to the rst point de ned Center Center snaps to the centers of circles arcs or ellipses It also snaps to the centers of the above objects that are parts of other objects Node Node snaps to a point object drawn with the Locate Points command under the Points pulldown menu Quadrant Quadrant snaps to the closest quad rant of a circle arc or ellipse the 0 90 180 and 270 degree points on the perimeter It may be remembered that the quadrant points are relative to the current orientation of the UCS If the circle or arc is part of a rotated block the quadrant points rotate with the block Intersection Intersection snaps to the point of intersection of objects or to the edges of thick objects Inquiry amp Settings Commands 55 Insertion Insertion snaps to the point of insertion of blocks text attributes or attribute de nitions Perpendicular Perpendicular snap
250. hold down F 2 as you switch it on This will bring up a parameters menu press F 3 for Data Out Hit Select to browse through the settings options and make sure CR LF is ON and that Echo back is OFF Setup is complete Topcon GTS 700 To set the instrument to work with Carlson Field press F2 for std on the instrument Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 338 Topcon 800 A Remote Setup Topcon Setup 1 Turn on the Topcon 2 Connect the Topcon to one of the radios and the other radio connect to Carlson Field 3 Under Field menu go to Con gure Field and under equipment type select Topcon800A Remote 4 To set Topcon for external mode Press F1 for prog then F6 for more This will lead to more programs Enter F2 for Ext Link 5 To select the radio channel in External Link enter 2 for settings and 4 for parameter radio modem then 3 for set channel Using the arrow keys change the channel When done press for F1 for set then press ESC until get back to External Link Menu NOTE Channel on the Topcon should match the channel set in Carlson Field 6 After channel is set press 1 for Execute 7 Topcon is ready NOTE If the batteries are low either in Topcon or the radios communication problems will arise Carlson Field Setup 1 In Con gure Field under equipment type there should be Topcon800A remote In Communication Settings Baud Rate should be set to 9600 2 After Con
251. ick point nea on Pick point between endpoints on arc pick point Pick a point on the arc somewhere near its midpoint Pick Other endpoint arc pick point The above gure shows a graphical examples of this command After the arc is de ned the curve information is displayed in the standard edit window as in the List command Polyline Info Function This command reports the length and elevation of the selected line or polyline Inquiry amp Settings Commands 51 Drawing Setup Function This command displays a dialog for the plotting scale size of symbols label annotation size and the drawing mode Text Size and Symbol Size are not the actual size in drawing units Instead these values are scalers that represent the size on the plot The drawing units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale In English mode the symbol and text scalers represent the plotted size in inches In metric mode these values are the plotted size in centimeters To plot the drawing at the scales set in Drawing Setup run the Print command and set Inches for English mode or MM for metric in the upper right of the dialog Then for English mode set the Inches Drawing Units to 1 horizontal scale 1 50 in this example In Drawing Setup the metric scale can be set as either 1cm m or 1m m For the rst case set the MM Drawing Units to 100 horizontal scale For the second case set MM Drawing Units to 1000 horizontal scale
252. ick the right mouse button Choose Properties and then Shortcut and change the drawing template name The main Field to Finish dialog box allows you to load the data and code les view and edit the code de nitions and then process the les The top section displays the code de nitions The middle section has two rows of buttons for changing the selected code de nitions in a similar way to the Layer Control command The bottom section has three columns of functions To process Field to Finish choose Draw Points amp Lines Draw Points Only or Draw Lines only These commands bring up a dialog to specify the range of points to process the point attributes to draw and a layer pre x which is added at the beginning of all layer names The default layer pre x is blank The Point Notes option will draw text below the points for any notes contained in the NOT le that is associated with the CRD le The Locate on Real Z Axis options choose between locating all the points at real Z all at zero elevation or to use the real Z setting as de ned in the individual codes The Label Zeros option will label the elevations of points with z 0 The PC PT Curve Type sets the method for drawing curves with more than 3 points The Bezier option draws a smooth polyline through all the curve points The Tangent Arcs method draws multiple arcs with arc end points at each of the curve points These arcs are tangent to the preceding line segment The Eras
253. ide 256 Point Store Function This function creates points by reading from GPS or total station equipment The new points are stored in the current coordinate and simultaneously drawn in the drawing The measurement data is also stored to the current raw le which has the same name as the coordinate le except with a RW5 instead of CRD le extension The Point Store dialog docks on the side of the drawing window This allows you to see the drawing view as you collect points You can use the arrow keys to pan the drawing and the Page Up Page Down keys to zoom out and in There are also icons for the pan and zoom functions at the top of the dialog Also besides clicking the function buttons most buttons have an associated function key such as F1 that you can use to run the routine Before taking measurements make sure that the rod height is correct To take a measurement from the survey equipment pick the Read button The calculated northing easting and elevation will be displayed in the dialog and a temporary icon will be shown in the drawing at the point location Field Commands 257 Point Store dialog for GPS Point Store dialog for total stations Before storing the point make sure that the point number and description are set in the Point Number and Description elds The point number is a required eld for storing to the current coordinate le If the point number speci ed already exists in the coordinate le then a
254. ill jump to between one and ten feet Depending on the type of GPS receiver the Monitor screen will also show more values like radio link status and receiver battery status The Skyplot button will jump you to that window so you can see the satellites the receiver is using Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 272 Benchmark Function This command takes a measurement to a benchmark point with a known elevation in order to calculate the elevation at the occupied point This command only applies to total stations In the Benchmark dialog ll in the instrument and rod heights The benchmark elevation is speci ed in the Target Elevation eld This eld can be lled out by entering a target point number which reads the elevation from the current coordinate le for the speci ed point Or you can simply type in the target elevation directly There is a choice between calculating the occupied point elevation or the instrument height For calculating the instrument height you need to enter the occupied point elevation When calculating the occupied point elevation there is an option to store this elevation to the coordinate le for the occupied point number When all the options are set and the target benchmark is sighted pick the Read button to take a measurement After the reading the program will display in the dialog the calculated occupied point elevation or instrument height depending on the calculation mode Field Commands 273
255. in Field Commands 269 The new points are both stored to the current coordinate le and drawn in the drawing When using GPS if the RMS values of the position read are above the tolerance set in Con gure Field then the point will not be stored Carlson Field will continue to record points until you click on Stop Track Position Function This command shows the coordinates of your current position in a dialog and draws an arrow icon in the drawing view This command only applies to GPS and robotic total stations As you move along the arrow icon will move Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 270 through your drawing showing your position in real time If the arrow icon gets near the edge of the screen Carlson Field will automatically pan over A dialog box also appears in Track mode The dialog shows your current northing easting and elevation For GPS mode the dialog displays the HRMS and VRMS values and solution status There are buttons to take you to Monitor and Skyplot There is also a Store button which will store your current location as a point and plot it similar to the Point Store function Satellite SkyPlot Function When using GPS it is important to know how many satellites you are tracking and their position in the sky Satellite Skyplot s visual and graphical screen aids in identifying when satelites are being masked by surronding structures trees and mountains Satellites close to the horizon under fteen
256. in the Monitor function Receiver Reset Full Initialize essentially does a factory reset and a power off and on cycle A Receiver Reset Full Initialize takes three to ve minutes to get back on line and become xed after a full initialize Set Radio Channel allows you to change Paci c Crest radio channels through the receiver The base and rover must operate using the same radio channel Send Command to Receiver allows experienced users to type in commands using Novatel GPS receiver commands to set or report internal settings See the Novatel operations manuals for a complete list of Novatel GPS receiver commands Check Communication Status checks the radio port operation and reports the status as working or not communicat ing Con gure Base Station initiates the receiver connected to be a base and begin broadcasting its stationary position and satellite corrections to the rover See Con gure Base Station for All GPS Brands at end of this section Sokkia Radian GPS Setup Radio Port for external radio connection is typically COM 2 on the receiver The Data Port connected to Carlson Field is typically COM 1 Field Commands 239 Differential Mode toggles the Sokkia GPS receiver to use RTCA RTCM or CMR message types RTCA is propre itary to Sokkia and is used only for centimeter accuracy RTK GPS surveying RTCM can be used with USCG DGPS beacon signals for sub meter accuracy Sokkia receivers work with Trimble CMR propre
257. inate le The results are then displayed This command is also used in conjunction with the Traverse and Sideshot commands to occupy and backsight two points The last two points you Inverse to are the Backsight and the Occupied point for the Traverse and Sideshot commands Press Enter at the point prompt to end the command COGO Commands 79 You can also inverse around an arc by inversing to the PC and then entering A for Arc option The program will ask for the radius point the curve direction left or right and the PT point The curve data is then reported There is an unequal PC Radius and PT Radius distance check The tolerance for this is set in the Area Label Defaults command There are several input options for Inverse that are set by entering O for Options Sideshot inverse holds the cur rent occupied point and calculates the bearing distance to each entered point The Pairs option reports the bear ing distance between pairs of points and not for every entered point For example if points 1 2 11 12 were entered the bearing distance would be reported for 1 2 and 11 12 but not 2 11 The Auto Increment option uses the next point number by just pressing Enter To exit the routine with Auto Increment active End must be entered There are also several angle output options that are set at the second prompt in the Options The angle can be reported as either Bearing Azimuth or Angle Right Prompts Command I Calculate Bearing amp D
258. ine 41 2D Polyline 41 3D Polyline 42 Circle 42 Insert 43 Text 43 Hatch 44 Curves 45 2 Tangents Arc Length 45 2 Tangents Chord Length 46 3 Point Curve 46 PC PT Radius Point 46 PC Radius Chord 46 Raster Image 47 Place Image by World File
259. ing Description This value is assigned to the point description eld An additional description can be added to a point by entering it after a forward slash in the data description eld See point 25 in the example Use Code This option turns off the Description eld described above Instead the points will be drawn with their original unprocessed descriptions Linetype Line work can be drawn in any of the 48 special line types or with the line type for the layer BY LAYER The spacing and size of the special line types is determined by the LTSCALE variable and by the line type settings from the Defaults command under Annotate Symbol This is the point symbol for the code To avoid drawing a symbol use spt0 Color The line work will be drawn in this color The default is BYLAYER Symbol Size This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size in the drawing The horizontal scale can be set in Drawing Setup Text Size This is also a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size Unit Symbol This option will draw the point symbol at unit 1 1 scale For example this option could be used for a symbol that is already drawn to actual dimensions such as a car symbol Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 128 Set Template For 3D polyline codes this option allows you to assign a template tpl le to the code The code points act as the c
260. ings through the receiver The default baud rate is 9600 Note If there are communication problems with either port A or B on the Ashtech ZSurveyor receiver turn off receiver and turn it back on with both keys depressed to reset receiver to factory defaults For the Z Extreme the Con gure Internal Radio button allows you to change the radio channel and settings This function will attempt to establish a connection with the internal radio reporting an error if it is unable to do so Otherwise it will open a dialog which will display the current radio channel as well as the valid range of radio channels Enter the desired radio channel in the edit box and then click on Program Radio to set the changes to the radio Carlson Field will communicate with the radio for a few seconds and will then request that you power the receiver down then turn it on again before continuing It is very important that this is done or else Carlson Field will be unable to communicate with the ZExtreme Also note that if the programming of the radio is cancelled for any reason the receiver will still need to be powered down then powered up again in order for Carlson Field to be able to communicate with it Create Base REF File takes a reading from the GPS receiver and stores this lat lon to a reference le ref that can be used later in Con gure Base Station The purpose is to allow moving the base station based on the current base setup In this case Create
261. int from the catch point to the pivot point and from the pivot point to the template points After locating the offset point the station to stakeout dialog appears You can enter the next station to stakeout or pick the Exit button to end Slope Staking Endpoint Projection This is a special case of the 3D Polyline method that slope stakes from the end of the polyline The program will prompt to pick a polyline and the end to stake from is the end nearest to the pick position The direction of slope staking is in the direction of the polyline as if extending the polyline The program prompts for the elevation of the pivot point which defaults to the elevation at the polyline endpoint There is also an option to offset the pivot point along the polyline back from the endpoint After the pivot point is speci ed the program starts the stakeout routine to guide you to the catch point Then there is a report to show the difference between the staked and the calculated catch point Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite a centerline le or 3D polyline Road Commands 175 Slope Inspector Function This command reports the azimuth distance and slope between your current position and a starting point The command starts by prompting you to move to the starting point and take a reading This sets the starting point Slope Inspector with GPS Carlson Field will continually read your current position from the GPS receiver A dialog bo
262. ion to super at the Normal to Super Pivot Point To add subgrades click the SubGrades icon which brings up the dialog shown The subgrades are areas below the template surface There can be any number of subgrades stacked one below another or side by side The subgrade starts from the surface at the distance from the center set under Horizontal Offset To start from the centerline enter 0 in Horizontal Offset First the subgrade moves straight down from this Horizontal Offset The depth down is speci ed in Vertical Offset in feet units or meters in metric mode The Vertical Offset normally should be set as a negative number The bottom of the subgrade then either moves away from or towards the center depending in the Direction In or Out setting The distance to move is speci ed under Distance The Slope Type for Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 204 the subgrade bottom can be either set to a speci ed slope or set to match the grades of the surface After moving the speci ed distance the subgrade will tie back into the template surface either by going straight up by continuing at the subgrade slope until intersecting the surface or by wraping around The Material eld is an optional description that is used in the Earthwork amp Final Contours report Special super elevation pivot points may optionally be speci ed The values for Horizontal Offset Distance and Pivot Offset can be speci ed by template ID For example EP could be used
263. ional Geodetic Survey to apply the latitude longitude adjustment The NADCON program ndcon210 exe is stored in the Carlson EXEC directory The Enter Coordinates input option transforms one coordinate at a time The coordinates can be typed in or use the Input Point Number option Output Point Number is an option to store the results in the coordinate le When transforming a local coordinate system there are three methods as shown in this dialog The Align by Two Pairs of Points option uses two pairs of source and destination coordinates The rst pair de nes the translation as the difference between the source and destination northing and easting This destination point is also the pivot point for rotation Rotation can be entered directly or de ned by a second pair of points where the bearing between the rst and second source points is rotated to align with the bearing from the rst and second destination points There is an option to also apply scaling The scaling holds the angle between points and adjusts the distances by the scale factor The scale factor is calculated for each point as the elevation factor at the rst source point times the grid factor at the rst destination point averaged with the elevation factor at the transform point times the grid factor at the transform point The other local transformation options are used when there are more than two pairs for translation points Since two Chapter 2 Field Referen
264. is command erases Carlson points inserts from the drawing The points to erase can either be selected from the screen or speci ed by point number Erasing a point will erase the point symbol point attributes and point node The points may optionally be erased from the coordinate le As long as the points are not deleted from the coordinate le they can be redrawn with Locate Points Prompts Select points from screen or by point number Screen lt Number gt Press Enter Point numbers to erase 1 5 Delete points from coordinate le Yes lt No gt Press Enter Erasing Carlson Points Number of points erased gt 5 Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Points to be erased Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 76 Move Points Function This command moves the entire Carlson point by selecting any part of the point Each Carlson point is made of three entities a point node a symbol and a point block with the point number elevation and description All these parts of the point are moved together with this routine The point is only moved in the drawing and the coordinate le is not updated unless point reactors are turned on The option for Point Reactors is set under General Settings in the Con gure command in the File menu Without reactors you can update the coordinate le with the new point position in the drawing by using the Update from Drawing function in Coordinate File Utilities Pull Down Menu Location
265. istance from starting point Traverse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point pick point Traverse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point 9 Use point number 9 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 9 4909 25 4648 37 0 00 Bearing N 81d8 54 E Azimuth 81d8 54 Horizontal Distance 261 17407461 Pull Down Menu Location COGO Prerequisite None Occupy Point Function This command sets the occupied point and backsight angle for other COGO commands such as Traverse For setting the occupied point you have the option of picking a point on the screen entering coordinates at the command line or typing in a point number that will be read from the current coordinate le Four options are available for determining the backsight direction Azimuth Bearing Point and None For the Point option you may pick a point on the screen input coordinates or type a point number that will be read from the current coordinate le For the Azimuth and Bearing option you enter the backsight angle in the selected format The None option sets the backsight to an azimuth of 0 north You can also set the occupied point by using the Inverse command If you inverse from point 3 to point 1 you have set point 1 as the occupied point and point 3 as the backsight For more information see the Inverse command The current occupied point and backsight are shown in the lower right hand corner of the AutoCAD status
266. it boxes for entering the horizontal and vertical scales grid text intervals and grid line intervals For example to exaggerate the vertical scale enter a horizontal scale text interval and grid interval of 50 50 and 50 and enter a vertical scale text interval and grid Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 194 interval of 5 5 and 5 Default values for these scales can be saved in Con gure Field under Section Pro le At the bottom is a text scale factor which directly controls the size of the grid and vertical curve text Also the layer name for the vertical curve annotations may be speci ed The Offset Station Text and Offset Elevation Text options control whether the grid station and elevation text are offset away from the pro le grid The Match Line Elevations option lets you set a maximum elevation range for the pro le When a portion of the pro le exceeds this elevation range the program reassigns and relabels the pro le elevation grid for the next elevation range Draw Pro le result with vertical curve annotations using the options shown in the following dialogs Now that you ve entered what to draw and how to draw Draw Pro le asks you where to draw the pro le Just pick a point in the drawing to specify the lower corner of the grid or use the default which draws the grid at the real world coordinates If the pro le being drawn is already in the drawing then the program will prompt whether to erase the existing
267. itary message signal type and can be either a base or rover working with Trimble RTK GPS receivers Dynamics toggles the rover between Kinematic or Static The base is always in Kinematic mode Kinematic is used for surveying while walking with the receiver Static is for stationary use only at the rover and gives better accuracies Since Static mode is for more precise measurements it can be used for GPS alignment points and for any control points The receiver should not be moved while in Static mode Elevation Cutoff is the vertical cut off angle above the horizon Any satellites below this limit will be ignored in calculations 15 is a common setting Solution Reset Soft Reboot resets the Novatel receiver in a few seconds This is used when the rover receiver is locked up or not properly reporting its position in the Monitor function Receiver Reset Full Initialize essentially does a factory reset and a power off and on cycle A Receiver Reset Full Initialize takes three to ve minutes to get back on line and become xed after a full initialize Set Radio Channel allows you to change Paci c Crest radio channels through the receiver The base and rover must operate using the same radio channel Send Command to Receiver allows experienced users to type in commands using Sokkia GPS receiver commands to set or report internal settings See the Sokkia operations manuals for a complete list of Sokkia GPS receiver commands Check
268. ith Notes on any notes for the points are drawn as text entities below the point description The Layer by Description option inserts the points in the layer named by the point description Using Layer by Description organizes the points by description and allows for layer management such as doing Isolate Layers to show only points on a certain layer If there is a space or other invalid layer character in the description the layer name stops at the bad character For example a point description of UP 105 would use layer UP The Field to Finish command is a more powerful method to insert points by description The Layer Pre x is added to the beginning of the layer name For example a Layer Pre x of PNT and a point with the description EP would use the layer PNT EP Layer Pre x is optional It allows all the point layers to be grouped so that you can select all the point layers by PNT Locate within Polyline inserts only the points that are inside a closed polyline The program prompts you to select a closed polyline Then all the points in the current coordinate le are checked whether they are located within the closed polyline Any points that are found inside are drawn Locate within Distance inserts only the points that are within a distance from a reference point First the program asks from the reference point and then the search distance Then all the points in the cur rent coordinate le are checked whet
269. ities up or down in size The routine prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of text objects If you want to enlarge the text enter a value greater than one If you want to reduce text enter a decimal fraction such as 5 This would reduce the text size by 50 This command is very useful if you have set up your drawing for one plotting scale and decide to change to a new plotting scale Polyline Utilities Function This is the generic command for modifying Polylines It has a sub menu consisting of the following items Entities to Polylines Function This command converts selected lines and arcs into individual polylines Use the Join Nearest command of the same sub menu to convert adjoining lines and arcs into continuous polylines Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite lines or arcs File Name lsp poly3d arx Reverse Polyline Function This command reverses the order of the line and or arc segments of a POLYLINE This can be useful in conjunction with the commands Station Polyline Pro le from Surface Entities or CL File from Polyline since the polyline must be plotted in the direction of increasing stations If it is more convenient to draft a polyline in one direction one could do so and then use the Reverse Polyline command to change it s order This command can also be used to reverse a 3D Polyline Barrier or a 3D Pad Template Prompts Select the Polyline to Reverse pick point
270. join along with other options are speci ed by the user in the dialog box Join Nearest also allows you to join many entities at once Other alternatives to this command with dif ferent effects would be to use the 2 Tangents Radius command on the Curves menu using a zero radius or the Extend commands explained above Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Lines or polylines to be joined 3D Entity to 2D Function This command changes a 3D Line or Polyline to a 2D Line or Polyline i e a line with the elevations of the endpoints at the same Z coordinate When the program detects a 3D polyline with all vertices with the same elevation there is an option to convert to a 2D polyline with this elevation Otherwise the entered New Elevation is used Prompts New Elevation lt 0 00 gt Enter Select Lines or Polylines for elevation change Select objects C Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 30 First corner pick point Other corner pick point 1 found Select objects Enter Image Image Frame Function This command controls whether Carlson Field displays the image frame or hides it from view Because you select an image by clicking its frame setting IMAGEFRAME to off prevents you from selecting an image Prompts Enter image frame setting ON OFF lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER On Displays image frames so you can select images Off Hides image frames so you cannot select images P
271. l appear when you click OK Use the information posted on the plan view to ll out the key elements 1 the radius of the simple curve 600m 2 the spiral in and spiral out lengths 75m for both 3 the tangent bearing out 30 2625 4 the PI station 18 078 641 The dialog will appear as follows and be added to your element list when you select OK Simply add an additional line element with a length of 200m and save the cl le If CAD les are available Carlson points can be established for the key positions of the line curve and spiral elements Locate points on the points menu can be used to pick their positions using the object snap feature of AutoCAD They will be stored in the current CRD le The Elements of the Input Edit Centerline le can be lled out by simply placing the proper point number in the appropriat box Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 190 Road Commands 191 Polyline to Centerline File Function This command writes a centerline le from a polyline The northing and easting of each vertex of the polyline is written to the centerline le and each arc in the polyline becomes a circular curve Prompts Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 192 Centerline le to Write Enter the CL le name to create Beginning station lt 0 00 gt Press Enter Select polyline or 3dpoly that represents centerline pick a polyline Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite a polyline Draw Center
272. l bar to view more symbols The symbols and categories can be customized by the Edit Symbol Library command After selecting the symbol you are prompted for Layer and Size of the symbol Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 132 Prompts Layer name for symbols lt PNTS gt Press Enter Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt pick point Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt 5 10 Inserts symbols at points 5 10 from the current coordinate le Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt S for Select entities Entities to Process Choose the types of entities to place symbols on Select arcs points line or polylines Select objects pick a polyline Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite None Edit Symbol Library Function This command allows you to customize the symbol library including the symbol drawing les symbol categories and symbol names Categories are a way for grouping symbols by type for your own convenience in symbol selection A new category is added by clicking on the Add Category button An edit eld then appears in the tree view on the left and waits for you to enter the category name The input is nished by pressing the Enter key COGO Commands 133 The category may be populated by creating a new sym
273. l enter a demo mode which displays a message each time a command is run Starting Carlson Field In Windows double click on the Carlson Field icon This will start Carlson Field with the default directory as x surv work Alternatively you could start Carlson Field from DOS by changing to x surv the directory where all the les have been installed and typing surv Enter at the DOS prompt This should startup your Carlson Field with all the default toolbars and the prototype drawing and the Carlson Field menus Command Entry Commands may be issued by selecting a pulldown menu or clicking on the icon for that command from the toolbar if available A limited number of Carlson Field commands have icons in a toolbar which makes it very convenient to run them The standard toolbar has the most useful icons available for use right at startup Other toolbars can be made available on screen for the length of the current drawing session To do this run the Toolbars command from the File pulldown menu and choose which of the toolbars will be required Highlight that toolbar by clicking on it Then click on the Show or Hide button Pressing Enter at the command prompt repeats the last command used The Pulldown menus are the primary method for Site Manager command selection The various sections of this manual are arranged such that each section explains all the commands available under one of the pulldown menus in the Carlson Field Module of Carlson
274. l or part of the drawing To translate the coordinate database use the MOVE command Prompts Select entities to rotate Select objects W First corner pick point Other corner pick point Select objects Enter Base pivot point Number lt Pick point gt N By responding with N the program switches to point number input Pick point lt point number gt 2 The program then reads the coordinate value from the current CooRDinate le Reference Bearing point Pick point lt point number gt P Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 24 By responding with P the program then switches back to screen picking mode Number lt Pick point gt pick point Reference Bearing N 44d31 1 E The program then displays the reference bearing de ned by the two points selected Azimuth lt Bearing Qdd mmss gt 245 3030 Enter an A to input an Azimuth or enter the bearing The above response de nes a bearing of South 45 degrees 30 minutes and 30 seconds East The program then changes the database to the new bearing If point objects are selected the program warns This command DOES NOT change the coordinates in the CooRDinate le Use CooRDinate File Utilities menu option F to update the le Standard Rotate Function This command allows the user to choose objects and then prompts for a base point It then prompts the user to choose whether to rotate by rotation angle default or by reference angle
275. l slopes from the section can be either User Entered or Continue Last Slope The User Entered option will use the cut ll slope ratios as entered in the dialog The Continue Last Slope option will use the last two points in the section le as the cut ll slope This Continue Last Slope option applies to section les that contain pivot point to ground segments whereas the User Entered option is for section les that end at the pivot points User entry is a simple method for slope staking that only requires a centerline le With this method the program prompts for the cut ll slopes and the pivot offset and elevation The program nds this offset elevation for the stake station along the centerline and begins the cut ll slope from this point The 3D Polyline method uses a 3D polyline for both the horizontal and vertical alignments The program will prompt you to select the 3D polyline from the drawing There are two polyline methods The Station Along Polyline method does slope staking perpendicular to the polyline like the other slope staking methods The Endpoint Projection is a special method that slope stakes from the selected end of the polyline This method is described at the end of this section The rst dialog in Slope Staking chooses the design method For Design Files method the les are speci ed in this dialog For the other methods the cut and ll slope ratios are also de ned in this dialog The next dialog se
276. lated and drawn grid le in plan view Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 152 Same GRiD le plotted and viewed with Viewpoint 3D Plot 3D Grid File Function This command draws the 3D grid mesh of the choosen GRD le This command can be used to check the accuracy of a grid model by plotting the grid and then viewing it in 3D using the Viewpoint 3D command Each grid cell can be drawn as a 3D Face entity Polymesh Text or temporary lines 3D Faces and Polymesh can be viewed from different directions using the Viewpoint 3D command in the View menu The Text option will label the grid elevation at the grid corner The text is placed center justi ed over the grid corner To reduce clutter there is an option to skip rows and columns The Preview Only option draws the grid as temporary ghost lines The advantage with this method is that it is a much faster way to view the grid However as soon as you do a zoom redraw regen or plot this plot will disappear The Vertical Exaggeration option multiplies the grid elevations by this value The View option can change the view to one of these 3D viewing directions Color by Elevation will color the grid based on a table of user de ned elevation ranges and the assigned colors This is similar to the Elevation Zone Analysis command Draw Side Faces is an option to draw vertical faces around the perimeter of the grid The side faces will be drawn vertically from the grid perimeter to the
277. le Before Align 11 with 2 and 12 with 3 After Align Points Commands 73 Description for Points This option sets the point description eld with the user speci ed text for a range of point numbers Point Number Report This routine list the used and unused point numbers in the CRD le Duplicate Points This function searches the CRD le for points with the same northing easting and elevation The tolerances for considering points to have the same coordinate are set in the dialog separately for northing easting and elevation To be counted the same coordinate both the northing easting and elevation must be within the tolerance distance The duplicate points can be erased or only reported For the erase option the rst point number is kept and any higher point numbers with duplicate coordinates are erased from the CRD le Compare Points This function compares the coordinates in the CRD le with either the coordinates for the matching point numbers in the drawing le with matching point numbers from another CRD le or with different point numbers from the same CRD le A report is created for any differences that shows the point numbers and the differences The difference can be reported as a bearing and distance between the two points as distance North South and East West or as the delta X and delta Y There is an option whether to include the point coordinates in the report Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 7
278. le already saved to the computer Select whichever method will be used and enter any necessary data The receiver is now con gured and ready for use Other Buttons In the Setup Menu Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 324 1 Power Cycle Receiver This will shut the receiver down and then power it up again Used to clear the receiver s memory 2 Power off Receiver Shuts the receiver down Note that if this button is pressed any settings changes made while in this menu will not be saved to the receiver 3 Send command to receiver this will allow for sending messages to the receiver The user must enter the message by hand This feature is only intended for use in conjunction with the technical support provided with Carlson Field Troubleshooting the Leica 500 Series in Carlson Field Several possible errors can occur in the course of using a 500 Series Leica receiver with Carlson Field Carlson Field will use all its standard error messages to report usual types of error messages such as an inabilty to communicate with the satellites that are being tracked In addition the Leica 500 Series of receivers will have their own set of error messages unique to themselves This type of error message is reported if there is an error during the transmission of various con guration messages to the receiver to set up the base station settings Such messages will say Set Port Message Rejected or Set Base Antenna Message Rejected or Set
279. le either the XY or Z component off or on for any alignment point the scale factor and Horiz Vert residuals are recalculated automatically Brei y toggling XY or Z components off or on and reviewing the scale factor and residuals changes is a quick approach to nding the best alignment points Carlson Field can handle an unlimited number of alignment points Highlight an existing alignment point entry and pick Delete to delete that alignment point Pick the Add button to create an alignment point The Add Alignment Point dialog box appears There are two ways to enter the local coordinate points by entering the N E Z or by using an existing point number stored in the current coordinate CRD le The GPS values can also be speci ed by two methods by entering in the Latitude Longitude and Height or by occupying the control point with the rover and taking a GPS reading at this location Manually entering the Lat Lon can only be done when the base is setup on a known location using a true lat lon position Otherwise Carlson Field needs to use the Read GPS method For this method the base can be setup with a lat lon that only needs to be close within 100 feet of the actual lat lon This type of position can be read from an autonomous GPS posiiton With the base setup on this approximate lat lon go with the rover to the control points and use the Read GPS option in the Add function The rover GPS solution must be in xed status when the Ch
280. lect should be set to Primary b Now the NMEA sentences must be con gured From the I O menu enter the NMEA Sentences submenu Disable all sentences save for the GGA sentences and the GSA sentences Ensure the Talker ID is GP From here Return to the I O menu c The NMEA Control menu item reachable from the I O menu has three options The Output Rate here should be set to 1 second the Position Output Rate set to Output Rate and the NMEA Output Version to 2 1 Next the GPS settings must be con gured and can be found in the GPS menu under the main Setup menu The GPS Mode should be set to 3D and the DGPS mode set to Auto The DGPS source should be toggled to Internal and the Pos Vel Filter should be Off Mask Values should be left at Default and the SNR at M Finally the Beacon Receiver con guration under Beacon Receiver on the Setup Menu needs to have its Search Mode set to Auto Dist Mode All other values in all menus ought to either be left at their default settings or con gured as necessary to the local conditions in the case of antenna height etc Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 340 2 The RMS value reported in Carlson Field is the RMS value of the standard deviation of the range inputs to the navigation process including pseudoranges and DGPS corrections The NT300D is now properly con gured and if connected to a computer running Carlson Field will transmit position x data to the computer automatically Be
281. lected a dialog box will open and a Latitude and Longitude must be input manually If Enter State Plane Coord is selected a dialog box will open allowing the input of a set of Northing Easting coordinates by hand Read from File will open a File gt Open dialog and ask for a le name of a reference le REF to open for use in corrections Regardless of which option is selected after the position is determined this position will be displayed and dialog boxes will open to enter a station id used by the base to identify iteself to the rover s and the measured base antenna height Once these values are entered base setup is complete and the Exit and Save button can be selected to exit the Equipment Setup menu At this point whenever looking at a menu that displays the connection status REFERENCE will be displayed instead of Float Fixed or Autonomous Trimble 5800 Carlson Field Con guration In Con gure Field set the Equipment Type to Trimble Generic In Equipment Setup be sure to set the Data Type to match your receiver setup This Data Type is the port on the receiver that communicates with Carlson Field Typically the Data Type should be set to 2 for the serial connection and to 4 for Bluetooth When con guring the Base receiver use a base station id number in the range from 1 to 32 Trimble 343 Index 2 Tangents Arc Length 45 2 Tangents Chord Length 46 2 Tangents Radius 30 45 2D Polyline 41
282. ligned parallel to the east west direction of the graphics screen Think of the line you select as a pointer or arrow that will point in the east direction of the screen after you select it Select the line closest to the end point which you want to be the horizontal or east direction of the screen View Commands 37 Prompts Pick a line to make horizontal select line Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Twist Screen Surveyor Function This is another variation of twisting the screen that allows you to input an angle azimuth that you want to be aligned parallel to the east west direction of the graphics screen Prompts Angle to set to horizontal 0 This would align due north with respect to real world coordinates to the east or horizontal direction of the graphics screen Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Restore Due North Function This command twists the screen to make due north vertical Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 38 Layer Linetype Control Function This command allows the user to control the appearance and status of the various layers and linetypes in the current drawing The command comes up with a dialog box which indicates the current layer and lists all the layers in the drawing It also allows the user to change the name linetype and line color of each layer individually In addition the status of the layer
283. line pick a closed polyline Select the polylines and lines to be clipped Select Objects pick the entities to break Specify layer names for inside segments Yes lt No gt Yes Enter a layer name for the inside segments lt 0 gt Press Enter Specify layer names for outside segments Yes lt No gt Yes Enter a layer name for the outside segments lt 0 gt Final At Intersection Function This command allows the user to break a line arc or polyline at the intersection of another line arc or polyline In many cases this command is used in conjunction with the Area by Lines amp Arcs command Many times to get the correct area of a gure it is necessary to break it from adjoining lines Prompts Select Line Arc or Polyline to Break Select object select object to break int on Pick Intersection to break at pick intersection point Pull Down Menu Location Edit Break gt Change Properties Function This command allows the user to change properties of lines polylines arec and curves The user can select more than one object and set the properties of all the selected objects at the same time Edit Commands 21 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 22 Prompts Select object pick objects to be changed press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection The dialog box above is opened up and allows the user to set the color layer and linetype for the selected objects These thre
284. line File Function This command reads a CL le and plots it as a 2D polyline in your current drawing session at the proper coordinates You will be prompted for the desired layer you would llike the polyline to reside The default layer name is CLINE Once you choose Enter you will be prompted for the le name of the centerline you would like to plot in the Centerline File to Plot dialog box If a spiral exists in the CL le the spiral will be represented by polyline segments The CL le can be made with the Polyline to CL File or Input Edit Centelrine commands Drawing the centerline le is a way to check the CL le data graphically for correctness Prompts Layer Name for Centerline lt CLINE gt Enter Enter the layer name to plot the polyline on Centerline File to Plot le selection dialog Select the CL le name to read and plot Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite a centerline le Centerline Conversion Function These command converts centerlines between Carlson and other formats including Softdesk Leica and Sokkia Pull Down Menu Location Roads Centerline Conversion gt Prerequisite A centerline le Input Edit Pro le Function This command is a spreadsheet editor for pro le les PRO les in the data directory Besides editing a pro le this routine can be used to just view the contents of a pro le Also a new pro le can be entered by editing a previously em
285. lly charged batteries installed as described in the receiver documentation 2 Connect the Radian IS serial cable to COM1 on the Radian IS plugging the other end into the controlling computer s serial port 3 If the Radian IS is to be used as a base connect a PDL base radio to the COM2 port of the receiver If the IS is to be used as a rover connect a PDL rover radio to the COM2 port if the receiver 4 Power the Radian IS on with its external power switch 5 Once the receiver nishes its self initialization when all the lights on the side panel go out and then the battery light lights in just one position it is ready for use with Carlson Field However positions will not be able to be logged until the receiver has acquired a few satellites The receiver has enough satellites when the center light is at the second or higher level when it is orange instead of red Software Setup 6 To con gure the IS for use select Equipment Setup from the Field pulldown menu This will open a menu with several options a Radio Baud Rate This radio button sets the baud rate for COM2 the radio COM port Make sure this number and the number the PDL s are set for is the same b Station Type This sets whether the Radian IS is to be con gured as a base station or a rover c Elevation Type This allows selection of Geoid MSL or Ellipsoidal measures for height altitude d RTK Dynamics This sets the dynamics mode of the re
286. lyline that represents the centerline or a centerline le cl File Name lsp pstaoff lsp Cut Sheet Function This command creates a report of the elevation difference between points and a design elevation which can be de ned by a grid le triangulation le 3D polyline section le note le road template le or design points The station and offset of the points can also be reported if a centerline is speci ed The Report Formatter option can be used to customize the report layout and to output the report data to Excel or Access When using a 3D polyline for the grade elevation the program calculates the elevation along the polyline at the position perpendicular from the point For grid and triangulation surface les the design elevation is determined by the surface le at the point With section les the grade elevation is interpolated from the offset elevation data in the section le based on the station offset of the point along the centerline The Note File option reads the grade elevation from the note le not that is associated with the current coordinate le For example if the current CRD le is job3 crd then the note le name is job3 not In Con gure Field in Stakeout Settings there is an option to store stakeout data to the note le When storing a point in the stakeout routines the target point number coordinates and elevation can be stored to the Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 142
287. marine surveying and construction Settings To modify the Field depth sounder settings go to the Field menu and select Con gure Field Choose the Depth Sounder Settings button The Depth Sounder Settings menu appears At this point Hydrotrac by Odom is the only equipment speci c depth sounder interface Carlson Field works with other depth sounders that have NMEA standard interface If you want to use Carlson Field without the depth sounder make sure the Model is set to None For the Hydrotrac model the depth sounder should be set so it outputs message DESO25 I O This is done using the Hydrotrac software Odom should be contacted with any problems involving setting this message www odomhydrographic com 225 769 3051 The draft setting on the Hydrotac should also be set This will account for the height difference between the water surface and the working sensor of the Hydrotac On the next line appears a box labeled Store Depth in Notes Carlson Field saves point data in a coordinate le and in a text note le By checking this box the note le will record the water depth at each reading along with the other information about that point Settings to control the rest of the information saved in this le can be found in the menu Con gure Field gt Point Settings The window labeled Debug should be set to zero for normal use The row of buttons labeled Serial COM Port refer to the COM port on your computer where the depth
288. mber inverse lt Distance gt 120 91 Enter Vertical Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 2548 This prompt only comes up if you have Vertical angle prompting set to 1 or 2 Instrument Height lt 5 0 gt 5 12 Rod Target Height lt 5 0 gt 5 12 These prompts only come up if you have Instrument and Rod height prompting turned on Hz Distance gt 120 86 Enter Point Elevation lt 1033 31 gt Enter Press Enter to use this elevation calculated by the command Enter point description Topo Shot Exit Line Traverse Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 6 gt gt E Pull Down Menu Location COGO Prerequisite None Enter Assign Point Function This command creates a point at the user entered coordinates The point is both stored to the current CRD le and drawn on the screen The program will prompt for the northing and easting Whether the program prompts for point number elevation and description depends on the settings in the Point Defaults command Point Defaults also sets the point symbol and layer Prompts Enter North y 5000 Enter East x 5000 Enter Point Elevation lt gt 100 Enter point description lt gt START Enter North y Press Enter to end the routine Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite None Locate at Intersect Pick Intersection Points Function This command locates points at picked line or polyline intersections The object snap mode OSMODE is set to intersection This rou
289. mbining multiple occur rences of the same station and sorting the stations offsets and elevations While editing the section le a second section le can be used as reference To choose this le pick the 2nd button For example when editing the proposed section le you can view the ground section le The program begins by prompting for a New or Existing le Use the new option to create a new le Use the existing option to edit the offsets and elevations for station sections that you have already created or append new stations to a le The standard le dialog appears allowing you to specify the le that you want to operate on The program defaults to a section le the same name as the drawing or a name that you speci ed using another section command After specifying the le name the program displays any stations currently in the le in the Stations List box of the Section Edit and Utilities dialog box If you speci ed a new le the Stations List box will be blank To edit and display the offset and elevation data at a station you can double click on the station in the list box or input the station in the Station to Edit edit box at the bottom of the dialog To add a station to a new le or existing le you must enter the station in the Station to Edit edit box After selecting a station number the program will display a dialog arranged in two columns one of the left and one of the right offsets and elevation
290. mmand C Close Closes the polyline O Open Opens the polyline Prompts Select line or pline to extend select line or polyline near the place to extend Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help 50 The line is extended by 50 units Use the Pick option to pick a distance Pick Horizontal Distance to Extend Enter for new line R Rotate right 90 degrees Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 20 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help 50 The line is extended by 50 units Use the Pick option to pick a distance Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help Press Enter Extend another lt Yes gt No No Note R50 and L10 can be used to go right 50 left 10 etc Pull Down Menu Location Edit Extend gt Prerequisite An existing line or polyline with at least one segment from which to start Break By Closed Polyline This command forces a break where all lines and polylines cross the break polyline This allows you to carve out a part of the drawing which could then be Write Blocked out Besides breaking the lines and polylines this command can also put the segments into new layers based on whether the segments are inside or outside the break polyline Polylines with arc segments are not handled To later reconnect the broken lines and polylines use the Join Nearest command which is explained later in this section Prompts Select the clip edge poly
291. most offset is calculated with this slope These intersection points are the tie points The slope can be de ned by ratio percent width offset horizontal vertical and to continue the last slope The View File button brings up a list box dialog that shows an image of the current le that you are editing This can be different that the data you have stored in the virtual memory of the editor depending upon when you last saved the le to disk Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 214 Pull Down Menu Location Roads Prerequisite None Draw Section File Function This command will plot the section data from up to six section les sct le at once The section le can be created by the Input Edit SeCTion Section Conversion commands A range of sections can be plotted in a vertical stack on section sheets or by selecting a point that corresponds to the grid bottom elevation When drawing sheets format in metric mode be sure to set metric on in the Drawing Setup command Then in the Sheet Parameters dialog set the Block Name to sctsht2 and set your metric sizes Prompts Section Files for Drawing dialog Draw Section File dialog The edit boxes in the upper left corner of the dialog allow you to de ne the horizontal and vertical scales and the text size that will be used to label the grid The Type of Plot radio buttons let you select the way the sections will be plotted either as a vertical stack or by selecting the datum
292. mplete the Carlson Field installation set up the Carlson Field con guration and registration as explained in the following sections Installing Carlson Field 3 Carlson Field Con guration To set the Carlson Field instrument and data collection settings run the Con gure Field command in the Field menu This routine sets the instrument model total station GPS or laser and data collection options To set the Carlson Field CAD defaults choose the Con gure command from the File pulldown menu after starting Carlson Field Con gure allows you to set some variables such that the default parameters are set at startup These values are stored in the les SURVCADD INI SURV INI and COGO INI in the SURV main directory Carlson Field Registration Each Carlson Field is licensed for use on only one computer which must be registered The registration records your company name and serial number To register your copy of Carlson Field run About Carlson Software under the Help dropdown menu Click on the Change Registration button and enter your company name in the Carlson Software registration box In this dialog there would be a two number registration code such as 39 403 At this point call Carlson Software at 606 564 5028 or email support carlsonsw com to receive your change key After installing Carlson Field there is a grace period of 100 Carlson Software function calls before you must do this registration After this time the program wil
293. n This command reports the coordinate x y z of the selected point Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite An entity to select Layer ID Function This command reports the layer name of the selected entity Prompts Pick entity to read layer pick an entity Layer FINAL Pick entity to read layer Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite None Bearing amp Distance Function This command reports the slope distance slope ratio bearing azimuth and vertical angle between two 3D points Pick or enter the coordinates of two points or select a line or polyline segment to calculate between the segment endpoints Prompts Pick point line or polyline or enter point number pick a point Pick second point or point number pick a point Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 50 Horiz Dist 233 4 Slope Dist 233 4 Elev Diff 0 0 Vert Ang 0d0 0 Slope 0 0 0 0 1 Bearing S 71d15 37 W Azimuth 198d44 23 Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite None Curve Info Function This command displays information about a curve arc Prompts De ne arc by Points lt select arc or polyline gt pick arc or polyline arc segment Pick a point on the arc somewhere near it s midpoint The program displays the Curve Data as shown in this example If the user responds with P above then the command prompts Select points in a clockwise manner Pick endpoint of arc p
294. n an arrow appears inisde the view box The aspect ratio of the view box is maintained while resizing it After positioning the view box at the desired position in the drawing and selecting the required size press ENTER to change the view to the selected view box Previous Function This command allows the user to zoom to the last view This feature is particularly useful when the user would like to see an overview of the work while working with details Upto 10 previous views can be restored in succession These views include include not only zoomed views but also views that have been panned restored or set to perspective or panned view However it may be remembered that only the magni cation and position of the previous views would be stored and not the contents of the previously selected views Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite A previous view Center Function This command allows the user to move to a view in which a desired point is the center of the view It also has an option where the user can specify the size of the objects in the new view Object size can be changed with two options magni cation or height If magni cation is to be chosen the scale factor must be followed by an x If drawing units are chosen height option it must be remembered that if units are chosen to be greater than the current size default height indicated objects will appear smaller in the current view and vice versa Prompts Vi
295. n and stake location The Side For Stakeout toggle selects between left and right offsets The Design Offset is where the stake point elevation is calculated The Stake Offset determines X Y position of the stakeout point by nding this offset at the stakeout station along the horizontal alignment Having Design and Stake offsets applies for example to staking the back of a curb where the Design Offset is 12 but the stake offset is 17 5 behind the back of curb with the elevation reference to the actual back of curb design elevation The Stake Offset can be speci ed either as an offset from the design point or as an offset from the centerline There is also an optional vertical offset that applies to the elevation of the design point With the Design Files and Section File methods the vertical offset works as an offset from the template or cross section surface For example a vertical offset of 0 5 could be used to stakeout the bottom of a 0 5 subgrade With the 3D Polyline and Points methods the vertical offset adjusts the elevation from the along the centerline at the stakeout station The Read Current Position button will take a measurement from the GPS or total station to nd the station of your current position This current station is put in the Station eld The Pick Point Road Commands 169 button will prompt you to pick a point in the drawing view The station and offset of this point are used to ll out the Station and Offs
296. n arrow icon will appear on the drawing showing your location You can move around the site while in Elevation Difference mode and Carlson Field will report the nescessary cut or ll in real time If you move off the area covered by the design surface then the program will stop reporting cut ll and instead will report Off Surface Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 146 The Store button will create a point at the current position The default description will include the current cut ll When Store is selected a dialog box will appear for entering the point number and description Elevation Difference with Total Stations Elevation Difference uses a dialog box that is very similar to the Point Store dialog Under the Setup button make sure that the occupied point backsight and instrument height are set Then have your rodman set the prism over the point you are interested in Pick Read F1 or Read amp Store F5 and the total station will take a shot After the shot is taken the dialog box looks like the one at right Carlson Field found the design elevation for this point 557 535 and compared it to the actual current elevation 530 0 Based on the current and design elevations Carlson Field reports to how much cut or ll is required to get to design elevation In this case it is ll 27 535 The cut ll also appears in the Desc box If you click Store Carlson Field will record this point and plot it on the drawing including
297. n menu Step 2 If no coordinate le CRD has been selected for the current drawing then Tsunmai will prompt you to load an existing or new CRD le Pick New to create a new CRD le For the CRD le name type in GIS JOB001 and pick Save to create this new coordinate le Step 3 To toggle on ASCII GIS prompting pick the Options F6 button Then pick the GIS Options at the bottom of the Point Options dialog In the GIS Options dialog check on the Store Data in Note File and GIS File Automatically by Point Description toggles Pick OK to close GIS Options and OK again to close Point Settings Step 4 In the Desc eld type the point description that corresponds to an ASCII GIS prompting le e g SCO for the GIS prompting le SCO GIS Step 5 Plumb the GPS antenna pole and pick Read F1 to take a reading from the GPS receiver The coordinates of the point appear at the top of the dialog box Pick Store F2 to store point number 1 F5 both reads and stores Step 6 Point Number 1 plots on the screen Immediately after point 1 plots the rst GIS prompting dialog pop up box appears The rst GIS item is SCO Enter the number for this sewer clean out and pick Continue The four GIS prompts created in the SCO GIS le appear as dialog boxes Directly under the Enter GIS Data title in each dialog pop up box you can see the GIS prompt including possible values You can use the up or down arrow keys or pick the down ar
298. n the light which is mounted below the telescope Joystick Speed sets the instrument turning speed from the arrow keys in Robotic control Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 232 Equipment Setup with GPS Carlson Field works with the following RTK GPS manufacturers Ashtech Javad Leica Novatel Sokkia and Trimble Each RTK GPS brand has its own GPS Setup control window To get the window which matches the GPS equipment you are using go to Con gure Field and under the Equipment Type pulldown menu select the correct equipment A brief explanation is given below for each brands s controls For RTK real time kinematic GPS work the base sends GPS corrections to the rover To setup a base receiver you should attach the computer running Carlson Field to the base receiver and run the Equipment Setup After this is done and the base is outputting corrections you should unattach the base receiver and attach the rover receiver and do Equipment Setup again If your base radio has a TX light it should be ashing while it s sending out corrections This is a convenient way to tell if the base is con gured Asthech GPS Setup The Ashtech Type speci es the model of Ashtech equipment to be used Carlson Field works with the following Ashtech high precision centimeter accurate RTK GPS equipment Z12 Sensor Z Surveyor GG24 and Z Extreme Carlson Field also works with the Ashtech Reliance USCG DGPS RTCM sub meter RTK GPS receivers Field Comma
299. n using a polyline or a centerline le cl Plot PC Lines draws perpendicular lines at the starting and ending PC and PT stations of an arc of the poly line centerline The lines are drawn up to the radius point of the arc or to the distance set in the Max Length eld Prompts Station Polyline Dialog Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations Select polyline that represents centerline select polyline Keyboard Command stapl Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite A polyline or CL le File Name lsp staent lsp Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 138 Closeup of Station at Tick Mark option Offset Point Entry Function This command creates points along a centerline at speci ed stations and left and right offsets The centerline can be de ned by a polyline centerline le CL or two points Locate points on centerline Check this box if you would like to locate points along centerline otherwise just the offset points will be plotted Label Stations amp Offsets Check this option to label the station offset as the point description attribute Input Station Offset from The Manual Entry option will prompt for the station and offset distances The Read File option will read the stations and offsets from a text le The text le format is comma delimited with point number station offset and elevation The station should be just the station number without the e g
300. n with the exception of point 4 Its description is bld clo This will force the linework drawn for the bld code to close back to point 1 which is the rst point with the description of bld The special code NE represents no elevation A point with this special code is located at zero elevation The code ROT is used to set the rotation of the point symbol If a point number follows the ROT code then angle from the current point to this point number is used for the rotation For example ROT45 would rotate the symbol towards point number 45 If there is no point number after the ROT code then the rotation point is the next point number with the same code as the current point The special code COAL creates a coal section for use in the Mining module The SCA special code is used to control multi point symbols described in a later section The SZ special code is used to set a different symbol size The value of the new symbol size is speci ed after the SZ i e SZ2 5 This value is the actual symbol size in drawing units The AZI and DIST codes are used together to locate an offset point The AZI sets the offset azimuth and DIST sets the distance The values Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 118 should directly follow the code For example AZI25 DIST4 2 would draw the point offset 4 2 at an azimuth of 25 degrees The codes OH and OV stand for offset horizontal and offset vertical These off
301. nate le with a NOT extention instead of CRD Note les can contain GIS information survey information or both To view the note le data you can open the note le with any text editor or run the List Points command and turn on the List Point Notes option JOB 001 NOT File with GIS Data Only PT ID 1 GIS FILE SMH gis SMH SMH SIZE 30 TYPE STND MANUFACTURER WOMAK COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC PT ID 2 GIS FILE SCO gis SCO SCO SIZE 8 TYPE M COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC JOB 002 NOT File with GIS amp Survey Data PT ID 1 GIS FILE SMH gis GIS Data Collection 309 TIME 17 5 6 DATE 2 15 2000 SMH SMH SIZE 24 TYPE STND MANUFACTURER WOMAK COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC HRMS 0 04 VRMS 0 07 PT ID 2 GIS FILE SCO gis TIME 17 6 19 DATE 2 15 2000 SCO SCO SIZE 8 TYPE L COMMENTS SURVEYOR JSC HRMS 0 04 VRMS 0 07 The two examples here show how Carlson Field s Con gure Field gt Point Settings gt Store Options can add survey information to the same Note le that GIS uses The section of Note le corresponding to one point starts with a line showing the point number and GIS prompting le used If no GIS prompting le exists NONE is displayed This line is the point identi er and all GIS and survey data stored below is referenced to this point number until the next point line identi er occurs JOB 001 NOT File with GIS Data Only Corresponding GIS Prompting SHM GIS PT ID 1 GIS FILE SM
302. nd angle of inclination can be speci ed For user de ned patterns the Doubled option causes the hatch to be done in both the user speci ed angle and the angle perpendicular to it If the pattern is to be custom de ned then the name of the pattern le to be used must be speci ed For all the patterns the user can choose whether the hatch will be exploded or not after it is placed Exploding the hatch causes hatch patterns like lines dots dashes crosses etc to be treated as individual objects after hatching the speci ed region After selecting the hatch type the user has to select the way the boundary of the object to be hatched will be selected This can be done in two ways by picking points inside the objects or by selecting objects by using the pointing device to pick the boundaries When one of these two choices is selected the dialog box disappears and objects for hatching should be selected at this point Press Enter to end selection The dialog box reappears and the user can now view selected objects exclude islands objects enclosed within selected objects preview the hatching in the selected objects or even change the pattern type The Advanced button allows further ne tuning of the boundary selection The Inherit Properties button allows the user to select a hatch type that is already applied in existing objects in the drawing so that previously set hatchings can be reused easily Pull Down Menu Locati
303. nd makes GIS links between blocks in the drawing and a database table using a key eld that is in both the block attributes an the database table Both the block entities and database records must exist before running this routine The routine starts by prompting you to select the block entities to process Then a dialog appears for choosing the block attribute and table to link The current template and output database le names are shown at the top of the dialog Use the GIS Database Settings command to set these le names before runing Create GIS Links The dialog GIS Commands 281 lists all the block names that were found in the entity selection Choose a block name to process Then in the lower left of the dialog there is a list of the attributes for the selected block Highlight the attribute name that contains the point ID key eld for the blocks and then pick the Select First Key Value button For each block entity the program will use the value of this attribute to link to the record in database table This value is matched to the database record using the PT ID database table eld For example a block with an attribute value of 402 for the speci ed attribute name will be linked to the database record with a value of 402 in the PT ID eld Next the database table needs to be speci ed to either one xed table name or to table names de ned by a block attribute A list of the available tables in the current output database is
304. nd will delete these layers from the drawing The command prompts for the layer name to erase and then erases all entities on that layer In addition to typing in the layer name you can also specify a layer to delete by picking an entity on that layer To select layers by picking rst click the Select Layers from Screen button and then select the entities on the layers to be deleted The Select Layers by Name button allows you to choose a layer name from a list of layers in the drawing You can also specify which types of entities to erase For instance if you have both linework and points on the same layer and you want to erase only the linework you can click off All and check Line and Polyline Pull Down Menu Location Edit Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 16 Prerequisite Something to erase Copy Move Function The Copy and Move commands are similar in function The only difference is that the Move command erases the original source object after placing a copy of the object in place while the Copy command doesn t For both commands the user is prompted to select objects by picking individual objects or a group of objects using a selection window The new position for the copy can be speci ed by entering the displacement and direction for the shift or alternatively the source point and second point for the shift For the Copy command the user has the option of doing a multiple copy where the same object is copied
305. nds 233 The pervious Ashtech Control settings are default Changing these settings will change the internal settings of the Ashtech receiver Ashtech Data Port is the port on the GPS receiver where the Carlson Field computer is connected usually Port A Ashtech Radio Port is the port on the receiver where the radio modem is connected usually Port B Message Type for high precision centimeter RTK GPS set message type to Ashtech CPD If you are using the USCG RTCM DGPS message type for sub meter accuracy then set the message type to RTCM USCG Multipath Type is used to lter out interferance in the satellite signals caused by nearby objects The choices are No Multipath Low Open Field Medium Default High Building and Severe Forest Urban Dynamics settings are Static Quasistatic Walking and Automobile Static is selected only when the Rover receiver is stationary The default is Walking Elevation Mask is the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations Site Name and Record Interval are all setting for post processing use only not for use with RTK GPS Site Name is the Point ID name for post processing Record Interval is the epoch interval to record post processing information RTK GPS updates every second but post processing epochs are usually 5 10 15 20 or 30 second intervals Ambiguity Fixing Parameter 90 99 9 controls the con dence level of xed p
306. ne Vertex Function This command adds points into a polyline First you select the polyline to modify Then you can pick or enter the coordinates for the new point The new point is inserted into the polyline at the nearest polyline segment Prompts Select polyline to add to pick a polyline Pick or enter point to add pick a point Select polyline to add to Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Edit Commands 27 Edit Polyline Vertex Function This command modi es the X Y position and or Z elevation of a point in a polyline The rst step is to pick the polyline at the point to edit The program shows the X Y coordinate for the point and you can either press Enter to keep the position or pick or enter a new position Next the point elevation is shown and you can enter a new elevation This command is useful for editing the elevations on a 3D polyline Prompts Select polyline vertex to edit pick a polyline at the point to be modi ed Pick or enter position lt 5264 23 5048 21 gt pick a point Enter elevation lt 0 00 gt Press Enter Select polyline vertex to edit Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Remove Polyline Arcs Function This command replaces arc segments in polylines with chords Arcs need to be removed before converting a 2D polyline into a 3D polyline because AutoCad doe
307. ne similarity or rigid body methods Both methods use a best t least squares transformation The difference is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a translation and rotation and without a scale The plane similarity does a rotation translation and scale This option only applies when two or more points are used in Align Local Coordinates One Pt Align Azimuth This option applies to the rotation when using one point in Align Local Coordinates For this alignment method the state plane coordinate is translated to the local coordinate Then the rotation can use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north No scale is applied in this transformation The state plane and geodetic true north diverge slightly in the east and west edges of the state plane zone This option allows you to choose which north to use Two Point Align Method This option applies only two point alignments Possible values are Fit amp Rotate and Rotate Only Fit amp Rotate the default will use the second alignment point for rotation translation and scale depending on the value set for Transformation The Rotate Only option will use the second point of a two point alignment for rotation only Geoid To Apply This option will account for the geoid undulation in determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement The de nition of the geoid model as currently adopted by the National Geodetic Survey is the equipotential surface of the Earth
308. ng In any other le name once data les are created such as a coordinate crd le then Drawing Explorer will track these les in the order that they are created Drawing Explorer helps manage drawing related data Example 1 If we are working in a drawing called Estates dwg and create a coordinate le Estates crd then later create a second coordinate le called Estates GPS crd Drawing Explorer would display the following The coordinate le created or modi ed last appears at the top of the list All data les are displayed in the order of most recent to oldest If the Estates crd le is set as current by the command Set Coordinate File then added to or revised Estates crd will move to the top of the list Thus old relatively unused les will gravitate to the bottom of the list Files are displayed by category So far we have only the Coordinate Files category There are also Raw Field Note les rw5 pro les pro section les sct in fact dozens of le type categories that will display once these les are actually created If a data le is selected and highlighted the Up and Down keys will unghost and the user can move les up to the top of the list or otherwise alter their position The position of les affects only the reporting of the les using the Report option in the lower left of the dialog When highlighted a le can be removed from the list but it won t be
309. ngs These setting apply to the Elevation Difference command Grading Tolerance is the target difference between the actual elevation and the design surface Carlson Field can use an external Light Bar to indicate whether your current position is in cut ll or on grade Currently Carlson Field supports light bars made by Apache and Mikrofyn The Light Bar must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS GIS Settings A standard point is stored in the coordinate le with a maximum 32 character description The GIS Settings allow you to store more data with each point The Store Data In Note File option will record additional elds for each point in the note le The note le has the same name as the current coordinate le except with a NOT instead of CRD le extension The elds that are recorded are de ned by the GIS File GIS This le de nes a sequence of eld names and prompts For example a GIS le for manholes could contain Location Depth and Condition elds Choose the Select File button to choose the GIS le to use Or use the Select GIS File Automatically by Point Description to use different GIS les depending on the point description With this option the program will look for a GIS le with the same name as the point description For example if the point description is MH then the GIS le will be MH GIS See the De ne Note File Prompts command for more information The Store Data Direc
310. nt SHP les are imported in a three step process The rst step uses the Import SHP File command to create a coordinate le crd for the points in the SHP le and a corresponding table in the output MDB le for the points database The second is to use Draw Locate Points to draw the points from the CRD le into the drawing The third step uses Create Links to select the points in the drawing and link the database to these plotted points Once the SHP le is selected Carlson Field detects the data contents of the le and sets the dialog options for importing either polygons arcs or points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 284 Export SHP File This command creates a SHP le from the selected entities in the drawing After selecting entities to be converted a dialog shows the number of Points Polylines Arcs and Closed Polylines Polygons found in the drawing selection set Those Points Arcs and Polygons with database information linked are displayed with their database table names Any Points Arcs and Polygons without linked database information display as unknown Highlight the Point Arc and Polygon tables to output or selects Export All to select all entities including the UNKOWN entities to export into SHP les The Export SHP File commands outputs all entities selected into SHP les with the same name as their table name into a subdirectory selected Also Points can be stored in the ESRI Arcview database as 3D
311. nt is entered here from the keyboard the last point drawn will be taken as the default starting point and the displacement will be taken to be the one entered The user is still prompted for a second point to de ne the direction of the pan Second point Choose second point to de ne the displacement and direction of the pan The effect of panning is like dragging a large drawing sheet in various directions while being able to see only portions within a view window Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 34 3D Viewer Window Function This command views in 3D the selected 3D faces polylines lines and points This routine uses the OpenGL graphics library for rendering which gives it superior performance You have the ability to zoom in and out pan rotate around X Y Z axis and shade in user positioned lighting The window below is displayed after selecting the entities to be shown The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons change the zoom by a xed increment To pan the display click on the image and drag the pointer Use X Y Z scrollbars near the bottom to rotate the view The range of these scrollbars is 180 to 180 degrees with middle being 0 which is the default position when the viewer starts By default all the lines are shown as a framework but it can be shaded to allow better visualization of the surface The color of the shade depends on the lighting of the surface which may be
312. ntersect 85 Distance Distance Intersect 86 Interpolate Points 86 Interpolate Entity 87 Create Points from Entities 88 SurvCE SurvStar Data Trans 89 Edit Process Raw File 91 Field to Finish 116 Insert Symbols 132 Edit Symbol Library 133 4 Sided Building 134 Contents vi Inverse with Area 135 Station Polyline Centerline 137 Offset Point Entry 139 Calculate Offsets
313. o exit the Equipment Setup menu Sokkia 500 Series 1 Turn on Sokkia 2 Turn it Horizontally and Vertically to set it 3 Connect Sokkia to Carlson Field 4 In Field go to Con gure Field and under equipment type put Sokkia 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Field menu go to Con gure Field and click on Communication Settings and check the baud rate On Sokkia press ESC then CNFG Scroll down or enter 4 for Comms setup The baud rate can be changed using the arrow keys when done press ESC 6 Exit the Con gure Field menu 7 To check if units Ft M matches for correct results in Carlson Field under Inq Set go to Drawing Setup and select the appropriate button On Sokkia in CNFG scroll to or enter 5 for unit and select appropriate unit using the arrow keys Topcon Total Stations The Topcon instrument must have CR LF carriage return linefeed turned on for communication with Carlson Field Topcon 200 Series To set CR LF with 200 series Topcon Total Stations 337 1 Turn instrument off 2 Turn instrument on while holding F2 key 3 Choose F3 Others set 4 Press F4 Page down 5 Choose F3 CR LF and set it on To set this with 700 series 1 Choose Parameter from the main screen 2 Scroll down until you nd CR LF and set it on Topcon ITS The command echo on the instrument must be turned off to work with Carlson Field Topcon GTS A4 To setup the instrument
314. o left enter a negative offset The Read Current Position button will take a measurement from the instrument to nd the station of your current position This current station is put in the Station eld The Pick Point button will prompt you to pick a point in the drawing view The station of this point is used to ll out the Station eld After specifying the stakeout station and story offset then program runs the stakeout routine to guide you to that station on the polyline When that point is staked the program calculates the story stake and the resulting horizontal distances cut ll and slopes are shown in a report dialog From this dialog there is an option to stakeout one or two offset points set back from the starting point at the speci ed offsets Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 180 Input Edit Centerline File Function This command can be used to input a new centerline or edit an existing one cl le It is a dialog based alternative to Design Centerline and has the advantage of accepting whatever information you have on your centerlines coordi nates stationing length of tangents and arcs etc For creating a new centerline it is ideal for entering data straight from highway design plans For editing this command allows you to change any of the geometric properties of any of the elements of the centerline lines curves and spirals including the starting coordinates and station The program starts by asking for a
315. o skip or replace the point Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite a CRD le Convert CRD to TDS CR5 TDS CR5 to CRD Function These commands convert coordinate le formats between a Carlson CRD le and a TDS CR5 le Both of these le formats are binary which require these special routines instead of using the Import Export Text File commands These commans will prompt for the le names to process Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite A CRD or CR5 le Convert Wild Leica to Points Function This command converts LisCad or Leica point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks These point block formats are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes The Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities can be directly used on LisCad Leica points without using this command Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Leica points COGO Commands The commands of the COGO Menu contain many routines that layout traverses top part ofthe menu and work with them bottom part of the menu TheDraw Locate Points command is already explained under thePoints menu Inverse Function This command returns inverses the bearing azimuth and horizontal distance between two points The command prompts for series of points Use the appropriate object snap mode to select the points from the screen or use the point numbers to reference coordinates stored in the current coord
316. o use the same base position and you don t have to re align the rover the old alignment is still valid Read From Alignment File reads a position le from one of the control points in an alignment le This allows you to setup the base on one of the control points from the alignment Then you don t have to re align the rover the old alignment is still valid Field Commands 243 Method 1 Read from GPS Step 1 Pick Read from GPS Step 2 Station ID Optional If you plan on doing post processing you can input a Station ID for the base GPS Antenna location Otherwise just hit OK Reminder Pop Box You are reminded to connect the radio to the correct port Base GPS receiver s autonomous position Carlson Field takes a reading and displays the latitude langitude and ellipsoid height This is the position that the base will use as its true position The base is now con gured If you are using Paci c Crest radios the TX light on the radio should begin blinking Error Message if incorrect If the GPS receiver is not properly connected is turned off or hasn t determined a position yet you will see an error message Check all connections and try again Step 3 Save Settings to File You have the option to save this base position as a le You ll be able to use this le if you set up in the same spot in the future Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 244 Method 2 Enter Lat Lon Step 1 Pick Enter Lat
317. of very short chords 3D Polylines are a series of connected 3D points All curved sections of 3D polylines are drawn as series of very short chords Elevations of these chords are interpolated from the elevations of the curve endpoints 3D polylines can be used as breaklines for surface modeling of curving curb lines retaining walls or any other structure Using Carlson Field s Triangulate and Contour command operators can create a contour map in the eld using the data they just gathered and thus check that no areas or breaklines lines are missing or incomplete prior to leaving the site Nesting Linework amp Points Both Point Store and Auto Points at Interval allow you to be drawing multiple polylines at the same time Without ending your current line you can start another line by simply changing the description code As long as you didn t select End under Linework for your rst line you can come back to it later Carlson Field will always recognize if a code next to Desc refers to a line currently active If it does Carlson Field continues that line to the new point To stop a line from being active you can choose End under Linework before storing the point number If two or more polylines are drawn in the same session using the same code you must add a number after the code Chapter 3 Field User Guide 302 to differentiate between two lines e g EP EP1 EP2 If you use the same point number twice Carlson Field will allow yo
318. og Format of the raw le RW5 extension Supported record header codes with their eld headers BK gt Backsight OP gt Occupy Point Number BP gt Backsight Point Number if 0 the next eld s azimuth will be used for BS gt Back Azimuth BC gt Back Circle DS gt Description LS gt Line of Sight HI gt Height of Instrument HR gt Height of Rod Target SP gt Store Point PN gt Point Number N gt North Coordinate E gt East Coordinate EL gt Elevation gt Point Description Note TR gt Traverse SS gt Side Shot Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 106 CL gt Closure Record AB gt Angle Balance Record OP gt Occupy Point Number FP gt Foresight Point Number one of the following 6 AZ gt Azimuth angle code 5 BR gt Bearing angle code 1 NE 2 SE 3 SW 4 NW AR gt Angle Right angle code 7 AL gt Angle Left angle code 6 DR gt De ection Angle Right angle code 9 DL gt De ection Angle Left angle code 8 one of the following 3 ZE gt Zenith Angle 90 degrees level VA gt Vertical Angle 0 degrees level CE gt Change Difference in Elevation from Instrument Point SD gt Slope Distance if ZE or VA above HD gt Horizontal Distance if CE above gt Point Description Note Traverse Examples This rst example is a closed traverse with an internal backsight of azimuth 178d0 42 Use the functions
319. oint Enter Point Elevation lt 500 gt 498 43 This prompt only appears if elevation prompting is turned on Enter point description HUBThis prompt only appears if description prompting is turned on To locate a point in the coordinate le point number 3 in this example Points Commands 61 Locate Point dialog Choose Draw Range Point numbers to draw 3 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 3 4154 28 4147 35 0 00 Point numbers to draw 1 2 Locates a range of points From 1 to 2 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 1 4252 76 4158 32 0 00 RADPT 2 4258 11 4059 38 0 00 Point numbers to draw Press Enter This ends the routine Pull Down Menu Location Point Prerequisite You may want to execute Drawing Setup to set the scale and size List Points Function This command lists point numbers northings eastings elevations and descriptions The points to list can be spec i ed by point number Range method and selected from the screen Selection Set method You can also select a closed polyline to list all the points inside the polyline area Area method Description Match can be used to only list points that match a speci ed description A means match any characters The Report Coordinate Range option will report the minimum and maximum northing easting and elevation for the points listed The List Point Notes option will list any additional descriptions assigned to the points Point notes can
320. oints on the screen to de ne coordinates Basically a PolyLINE is a series of line and or arc segments joined together in one entity or object If a CRD le is not already open in the program the user will be prompted for one The user also needs to specify what layer to place the object in which defaults to BARRIER for 3D polylines Since a 3D polyline can have vertices with different elevations Z coordinates the command has an option where the user can specify whether to be prompted for a Z coordinate for each point Alternatively the user can specify that an exisiting model le be used so that exisiting polyline features may be used and modifed as needed In this case the user must specify what mesh grid le to use GRD for the model Prompts Layer Name for 3DPoly lt BARRIER gt Specify layer name to use Prompt for elevations XY lter lt Yes gt No This simply means that if the user picks a point on the screen for one of the vertices of the 3D polyline then the X Y coordinates of the picked point will be the X Y coordinates of the vertex of the 3D polyline and the user will then be prompted for the elevation Use surface model from le Yes lt No gt If you answer Yes at this prompt you will need to specify a le of type GRD from which a pre de ned model surface will be used by the program Also at this stage if no coordinate le is available to the program the user will be prompted to provide a
321. ol in drawing Attach Image to Entity Function This command attaches an image le to a drawing entity The possible image le formats are bmp jpg and gif Any type of drawing entity can be used such as polyline points or symbols To run the command rst pick an entity on the screen Then a dialog appears for selecting the image First set the image directory and then highlight the image le name A graphic of the image should appear in the preview window Then click OK The Capture Image button can be used to trigger an attached digital camera to take an image The Pick Camera and Set Camera buttons can be used to con gure the camera to use The View Image button will display in the preview window any image already attached to the entity Also any image already attached to the selected entity is displayed in the Current Image eld at the top of the dialog Prompts Select object to attach symbol to pick an entity Attach Image Dialog Done Select object to attach symbol to Enter to End press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite a drawing entity and an image le Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 286 De ne Template Database Function This command prepares the elds for both the MDB and the ASCII GIS prompting methods The MDB method was developed speci cally to attach data in Windows directly to the Microsoft Access Database The ASCII method was developed to data collect using Carls
322. ommands the program will bring up a list of all the traverse names Simply choose which traverse to process If you have only one traverse in the raw le then you don t need the NAME record File gt Print This routine brings up the raw le data in the standard Carlson report viewer which can print the report draw in the drawing or save it to a le File gt Import These routines convert raw data from other formats into the current Edit Process RW5 le The converted raw data will be added to the end of the existing data in the current RW5 le In many cases the raw le to import can be downloaded directly from the data collector or instrument using the Data Collector routine In other cases the le to import is output from another software program The following formats are supported Sokkia Leitz raw Several data collectors generate this format including the SDR series collectors Wild Leica gsi or raw This reads the Leica raw le in Wildsoft Liscad or 10 20 30 40 format There is an option to specify for direct reverse shot order if any SMI raw Geodimeter obs or raw Nikon raw MDL Laser cds Fieldbook fbk From Softdesk or Land Development Desktop SurvCOGO raw or txt PC Cogo bat Survis raw 00NMSDR20 V03 05 Jan 22 98 19 14 122211 10NMW970709A 13CPSea level crn N 02TP00015000 000005000 0000085 63500005 22000000PK FD 08KI00035000 000005192 9200081 7450000MN
323. on Draw Prerequisite Closed polylines or objects to hatch Curves 2 Tangents Radius Function This command ts a curve between two tangent lines by entering a known radius It prompts for the radius and then prompts to pick points on the two tangent lines Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite Tangent lines should be drawn before execution 2 Tangents Arc Length Function This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known arc length It prompts for the arc length then pick the P I intersection of tangent lines and points on the two tangent lines Prompts Arc Length enter or pick distance int on Pick P I of curve pick intersection of tangent lines nea on Pick pnt on 1st Tangent Line pick pt nea on Pick pnt on 2nd Tangent Line pick pt Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite Tangent lines should be drawn before execution Draw Commands 45 2 Tangents Chord Length Function This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known Chord length It prompts for the chord length the P I and points on the two tangent lines Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite Tangent lines should be drawn before execution 3 Point Curve Function This command draws an arc between three points The rst point is the PC the second is a point on the arc and the third is the PT The points can either by picked on screen or spe
324. on SurvStar DOS data collection method Both the MDB and ASCII methods for GIS feature code prompting can be empolyed in Carlson Field Only the ASCII method can be employed in SurvStar To create GIS prompting for ASCII and MDB GIS features you need to input the following elds in the dialog box 1 First eld is Current GIS File In this box the GIS code name needs to be input This GIS code name is very important because it identi es the group of data elds The GIS code below is named MH83 2 The next eld is Template MDB File All MDB GIS prompting is stored in one Template Microsoft Access MDB le named here To create a new MDB choose New MDB 97 or 2000 or to load an existing MDB Template le choose Open MDB at the bottom right in the dialog The Template MDB le here is named SKI RESORT MDB 3 The next eld to input is Category Name at the bottom right GIS feature codes can be categorized e g STRUCTURES UTILITIES ROAD FEATURES At least one category must be created because to Export a GIS File to the Template MDB le this routine requires a category to export the GIS code under Ater inputing a category name pick New Category to create this categoty in the Template MDB le 4 This next step requires you to input several elds to de ne the actual GIS prompting for this GIS feature The GIS prompting is input under FIELD NAME FIELD PROMPT and LIST VALUES Field Name correspon
325. on intact You can read SHP les into Field and after completing all mapping convert these GIS features back into ESRI SHP les The SHP Export command converts drawing entities and GIS links in Carlson Field into SHP les for input into ESRI s Acrview product These routines are useful GIS data collection tools since the majority of surveying and civil engineering maps are created in the Autocad drawing DWG format and the majority of GIS produced maps are made in the ESRI shape SHP format Carlson Field combines these two formats effortlessly and seamlessly The GIS professional can stay with ESRI s Arcview SHP format while all eld and GIS mapping can still be done in the Autocad drawing environment The Import SHP File dialog displays the Output MDB le to add data to and the source SHP le to be imported SHP les are similar to entities in one layer in Autocad You must specify the table name to store the data in the MDB database and the layer name for the entities to be created Typically these names are the same or near equivalent as the SHP le name Once these names are entered the Import Polylines from SHP button is highlighted Pick this button to import the SHP les entities and database ESRI Arcview creates primarily three types of SHP les Points Arcs and Polygons Both Arc and Polygon SHP les are brought into Carlson Field as polylines in the drawing and data stored in a table in an MDB database le Poi
326. on polyline Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 26 Reduce Polyline Vertices Function This command removes points from a polyline without signi cantly changing the polyline The offset cutoff is the maximum amount that the polyline can move when removing a point For example in a polyline with three points in a straight line the middle point can be removed without changing the polyline Prompts Enter the offset cutoff lt 0 1 gt 5 Select polylines to reduce Select objects pick polylines Tested PolyLines gt 1 Total number of vertices 10 Number of vertices removed 1 Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Smooth Polyline Function This command smooths the selected polylines using a modi ed bezier method that makes the smooth polyline pass through all the original points and only smooths between the original points The looping factor controls smoothing amount A higher factor gives more looping Prompts Enter the looping factor 1 10 lt 5 gt 7 Enter the offset cutoff lt 0 05 gt Press Enter This is the same reducing lter described above Select polylines to smooth Select objects pick polylines Smoothed 1 PolyLines Total original vertices 9 Total nal vertices 50 Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Add Polyli
327. onverting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Carlson points Convert Eagle Point to Points Function This command converts Eagle Point point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks These point block formats are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes The Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities can be directly used on Eagle Point points without using this command Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite Eagle Point points Convert LDD MDB to CRD Function This command converts an Autodesk Land Development Desktop LDD point database le into a Carlson CRD le The LDD point database always has the le name of POINTS MDB and is stored in the LDD project directory Pull Down Menu Location Points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 78 Prerequisite an LDD point database le Convert CRD to LDD MDB Function This command converts a Carlson CRD le into an Autodesk Land Development Desktop LDD point database le in Access MDB format The LDD point database always has the le name of POINTS MDB So to specify the LDD le to create you only need to specify the directory path and not the le name This path corresponds to the LDD project directory The conversion program has point protect so that if a point number from the CRD le already exists in the LDD le then you will be prompted t
328. op up dialog box titled List Points Report appears as shown below Scroll up or down to review the coordinate points and Note data To create a custom report of the coordinate and note data pick the Use Report Formatter toggle in the List Points dialog This method will display a list of all the coordinate and note eld names and you can choose the order of elds to report from this list The Report Formatter can also output to Excel and Access Edit Coordinate and Note Point Data The Input Edit command in Coordinate File Utilites allows you to edit Note data Coordinate File Utilites is found in the Points drop down menu From the Coordinate File Utilities dialog pick Input Edit Point The Edit Assign Point pop up dialog box both reviews and edits coordinate and note data This pop GIS Data Collection 315 GIS Data Collection Page up box displays only one point s coordinate and note values at a time To go to a speci c point number type the desired point number and hit Enter The coordinate and note values are displayed for this point number To Chapter 3 Field User Guide 316 display the next or previous point pick Next or Previous To edit any value pick that box and edit accordingly To edit note values you must pick the note value and hit enter on the keyboard This will display the value in the edit box Edit the note value in this edit box and hit Enter to update this value If more than three lines are displayed in the
329. ope staking that allow exability for de ning the slope design In this example to keep Life Simple choose the 3D polyline option within Slope Staking as shown below This allows you to just pick a 3D polyline to stake from The User Entered method requires that you have stored a centerline le and asks you to enter the desired station offset and elevation each time this is good for complicated state highways with variable pivot points for the slope stakes The Design Files options is good on simple industrial access roads and subdivision streets where you have never changing template pro le and centerline The Section File approach requires that you enter 2 point sections that start at the left pivot and stop at the right pivot and between stations the program will interpolate 2 Either in the of ce or in the eld draw a 3D polyline or a 2D polyline at a xed elevation representing the design break or pivot line from which the slope staking occurs This polyline needs to be drawn before starting slope staking The thing to remember about slope staking is that it starts from the given design and goes out to nd the catch on the original ground which never matches plan So it is a necessary eld thing The road shoulder is given The 2 1 slope is given But where that 2 1 slope catches existing ground Chapter 3 Field User Guide 296 is not given It is shown on the plans but needs to be measured to actu
330. or creates a raw le RW5 that contains various lines of data records that could be likened to a surveyor s eld book You can specify point coordinates job information notes and the angles and distances that make up traverse or sideshots records Once the raw data is created or read it can be processed reduced to coordinates that are stored in the current coordinate le CRD le The raw le can also be created or appended using the Locate Point Traverse Sideshot and Inverse commands on the COGO menu To store the data inputs from these commands into a raw le rst run the Raw File ON OFF command on the COGO menu The raw les created by TDS data collector programs are also compatible without conversion The le name exten sion of the raw le is RW5 The command Data Collectors on the Tools pulldown menu of Cogo module has options for reading other data collectors native le formats and converting them to RW5 les Also under the File menu for Edit Process Raw File there is an Import menu for converting raw data from other formats When you select the Edit Process Raw File command you are prompted to specify the name of the raw le RW5 The current coordinate le is used automatically To change the current coordinate le use the Set Coordinate File command in the Points menu If no coordinate le is current the program will prompt for a coordinate le CRD that you want to work with Edit Process
331. ordinates for point 1 then pick the Create Point button In the Create Point dialog enter point 1 Northing 5000 Easting 5000 Elev 100 and then click OK Step 5 Set the Backsight Method to Azimuth and type 0 zero for the Bksight Azi Input the Instrument Height and Rod Height Step 6 Sight the total station toward an object assumed to be due north The gun total station is zeroed in Total Station Setup dialog box by picking Zero Hz A Message dialog pop up box appears and says Done Check the screen on the total station to see if it is reporting zero for the horizontal angle If yes pick OK to close this Message box and OK again to exit the Total Station Setup dialog box If the horizontal angle has not changed the total station con guration settings could be wrong Check that the proper equipment is selected in Con gure Field Step 7 To toggle on ASCII GIS prompting pick the Options F6 button Then pick the GIS Options at the bottom of the Point Options dialog In the GIS Options dialog check on the Store Data in Note File and GIS File Automatically by Point Description toggles Pick OK to close GIS Data Collection 313 Chapter 3 Field User Guide 314 GIS Options and OK again to close Point Settings Step 8 You are ready to collect points from this setup with the total station and prism pole In the Desc eld type the point description that corresponds to an ASCII GIS prompting le e g SMH for the GIS prompting
332. ork should be set to Master It makes sense to make the base unit a Master and all rovers Slaves These settings will be handled automatically by the Con gure Base and Con gure Rover routines So there generally isn t any reason to set the Local Radio Type manually The Local Antenna Power Level allows you to con gure your radio to use more or less power The less power the radio has the less it will be able to communicate over longer distances It may be useful to change the power level if you re rover is not travelling far from your base and you re trying to conserve battery power Within the Navcom Radio Setup menu you will be able to access the following status information for all visible Navcom units on the network External Power Indicates whether the unit is plugged into an external power source On or Off Battery A Indicates whether a well charged battery is plugged into Battery Port A On Good or Off Low Battery B Indicates whether a well charged battery is plugged into Battery Port B On Good or Off Low Status Indicates whether the unit is sending out corrections BASE or ROVER If more than two units are present you can access this information for the additional units by selecting the desired unit s radio ID from the Remote Radio ID dropdown menu Con gure RTCM Submenu Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 328 Note To access this menu rst con gure the unit as a BASE and set the Correction Type to either RT
333. orrection that are sent to the rover If your radio has a TX light it should begin ashing Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 250 Field Commands 251 Saving Base Settings to a File It is always recommended to save the base position to a le if you are going to return to the same site survey again You can setup on the same base position recall the base REF le and enter the new antenna height Then you can use the alignment le from the rst day in the rover and not have to re align When you save the base antenna position to a le it is stored with a REF extension denoting base reference le By default it goes in the Data directory Input reference lename and pick Save and OK Con guring the Rover After the base is con gured unplug the base receiver from the Carlson Field computer and plug in the rover receiver In Equipment Setup toggle the Station Type from Base to Rover Then pick Exit This will con gure the receiver as a rover From the Field dropdown pick the command Monitor GPS Position The Status is reported as either Autonomous Float or Fixed If the rover is Autonomous it is not getting any corrections from the base If the status is Float the rover is receiving corrections but has not found the xed solution Once the solution becomes Fixed the rover is locked on to the base corrections and is calculating an accurate position Align GPS To Local Coordinates Function Carlson Field r
334. ort 279 GIS Settings 229 GPS Settings 222 255 256 Grid File 5 143 155 157 158 grid le 42 146 149 151 152 154 155 158 Grids from Contour Maps 150 Guardrail Expansion 202 Hatch 44 161 Help Commands 292 Hold PC point 183 Hold PI points 183 horizontal distance 79 92 135 144 175 177 179 180 199 228 268 horizontal scale 52 128 194 218 Icon Point Symbols 57 Image 31 32 47 48 277 286 Image Adjust 32 Image Clip 31 image le 32 47 49 277 286 Image Inspector 285 Import DXF File 14 Index 345 Import SHP File 284 Import Text ASCII File 63 67 Impulse Laser 322 InnerSpace Tech depth sounder 323 Input Edit Centerline File 181 Input Edit GIS Data 276 Input Edit Point 62 315 Input Edit Pro le 193 195 Input Edit Section File 212 Input Edit Super Elevation 210 Inquiry amp Settings Commands 49 Insert 3 43 48 56 76 91 124 133 159 162 163 194 212 Insert Symbols 132 Installing Carlson Field 3 Instrument Height 83 230 313 Interpolate Entity 87 Interpolate Points 86 Introduction 1 2 296 Inverse 79 82 136 Inverse with Area 135 136 Isolate Layer 40 61 Join Nearest 21 26 30 Land Development Desktop 78 79 Laser Atlanta 323 Laser Offset Settings 225 latitude longitude 223 Layer Linetype Control 39 Layer Control 120 Layer ID 50 Least Squares 100 102 104 Leica 28 79 236 238 275 324 326 Leica Disto 323 Leica GP
335. orth under Con gure Field gt GPS Settings If you specify a scale factor in that dialog box it will be applied to all points recorded One point alignment is useful for data collection on a new site In this case you can set up the GPS base receiver anywhere convenient Then position the rover over a point preferably one you can nd again and add this point as your one alignment point by reading the GPS point and entering a local coordinate like 5000 5000 100 Now the local coordinate system is set around this rst point at 5000 5000 100 Field Commands 255 This method is commonly used for small topo or stockpile RTK GPS surveys When collecting or staking data at distances greater than 2 miles from the base both the horizontal and vertical errors will begin to increase gradually Therefore you should use a multiple point alignment for large projects Alignment Method 3 This method is useful if you are arriving on a job which has already been surveyed It assures that your survey is in the same coordinate system as the original survey Using control points this method transforms the GPS coordinates to an existing local coordinate system This method takes pairs of GPS coordinates and the corresponding local coordinates to de ne the translation rotation and scale of the alignment In Con gure Field gt GPS Settings there is a choice for the transformation as Plane Similarity or Rigid Body Plane Similarity will apply a scal
336. ositions The default is 99 0 At a lower con dence interval the system solves much faster If the system incorrectly solves the position then the position error will be much greater than the reported RMS value Position Update Rate is the frequency that GPS positions are calculated and reported Fast CPD is a toggle On or Off Fast CPD toggled On will allow approximating the rover s position if your position is lost brie y Off is the default Fast CPD is generally toggled on when Dynamics is set to Automobile When Carlson Field functions start the program uses the settings speci ed in Equipment Setup to con gure the GPS receiver The Save Settings to Receiver uploads the settings in the Carlson Field dialog to the receiver so that the next time the receiver is turned on these settings are still set even without connecting to Carlson Field Otherwise Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 234 Carlson Field must be connected to the receiver to setup these options Send Command to Receiver allows experienced users to type in commands using Ashtech GPS receiver commands to set or report internal settings See the Ashtech operations manuals for a complete list of Ashtech GPS receiver commands Reset Sensor Memory will reset the receiver memory reinitialize the communications ports and reset the modem Saved settings on the receiver will be returned to their default values Radio Baud Rate allows you to change Paci c Crest radio baud sett
337. page up and page down keys to pan and zoom the display Pressing enter ends the routine Prompts Select objects select entities with attached data GIS Commands 277 Arrow keys Pan PageUp Down ZoomOut In Zoom Pick left lower and right upper corner Move pointer over entity with Gis Data Enter to End move cursor over entities with data Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite MDB GIS Prompting must be created in De ne Template Database and entities must have linked GIS information GIS Inspector Settings Function This command sets up the elds to the display when using GIS Data Inspector Each GIS table code can have different display options stored in the GIS Inspector Settings command GIS Inspector Settings reads all the points and entities with GIS information currently linked in the drawing and displays a list of the linked data tables under the Available GIS Table column When a GIS Table code is highlighted i e GAS the elds for this GIS table are displayed to the right in the Select Fields column Up to 6 elds or lines of GIS data can be de ned for display for each GIS code table including one picture To add a eld to the display list double click on the eld name To remove a eld from the display list highlight the GIS table to remove from and then use the Clear Settings buttons The Last Option button will remove the last eld to display from the current GIS table Th
338. picking the Start Carlson Field icon This start icon is displayed in the lower right of your screen when the Show Startup Icon option is on as set in Con gure Field under General Settings You can close the Start Carlson Field icon for the current drawing session by clicking the X in the icon title bar To bring back the Start Carlson Field icon you can use the F11 key The Start Carlson Field icon is only displayed when no commands are running The other way to show the Carlson Field function menu is to pick the Menu F11 button while running other Carlson Field commands This method allows you to switch between Carlson Field functions without having to exit back to the CAD menu For example you can switch from Point Store directly to Stakeout Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 220 Con gure Field Function This command sets the equipment type communication parameters and other Carlson Field options Make sure the Equipment Type box shows the correct GPS or Total Station equipment that you ll be using The down triangle button to the right of this box brings up a list of the equipment types to choose from The eight buttons in Con gure bring up the dialog boxes which are used to change Carlson Field s default settings Explanations for each are shown below Field Commands 221 General Settings If you are using a total station Rod Height is the distance from the prism to the ground For GPS Rod Height is the distance from the center o
339. point for the text and the text height rotation and layer The File button stores the report to a speci ed le There is a File option to create a new report le or append an existing le The Print button sends the report to the printer The Find button will search for text in the report You can use the Hide button to put the Report Viewer window to the side of the desktop and give focus back to the drawing This option allows you to return to working in the drawing without closing the report You can re activate the report by picking on the minimized report viewer icon Standard Report Viewer 5 Chapter 1 Introduction 6 Field Reference Guide 2 7 File Commands The following are the self explanatory commands in the File pulldown menu New Creates a new drawing Open Opens an existing drawing Close Closes the current drawing Save Saves the current drawing with its current name or as unnamed dwg if no name is speci ed Save As Gives the option of saving the current drawing with a different name Print Prints or plots the current drawing Exit Exits Carlson Field The other commands are explained in greater detail below Project Contains management controls for data drawing and project les This command has a sub menu consist ing of three items as follows Set Data Directory Drawing Explorer Project Explorer Display Edit File Import DXF File Export DXF le Toolbars Preferenc
340. polated values So extrapolated grid areas are not as accurate as grid areas within the limits of the data The GRD le has the following format Line 1 is the lower left Y coordinate Line 2 is the lower left X coordinate Line 3 is the upper right Y coordinate Line 4 is the upper right X coordinate Line 5 is the X direction grid resolution Line 6 is the Y direction grid resolution The rest of the lines are the Z values of the grid intersects starting from the lower left moving in the left to right direction and ending at the upper right If the intersect has no value the letter N is saved instead of the Z value Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 150 Grids from Contour Maps A grid le can be created from contours represented as polylines with elevation The program calculates the elevation of each grid corner by looking for contour intersections in eight directions N S E W NE SE SW NW and then interpolating the elevation between the two steepest intersections To accurately model the surface it might be necessary to add entities in addition to the contour polylines For one spot elevation points can be added for the high and low points Otherwise the grid model will plateau at the last contour Also 3D barrier polylines need to be added on long narrow ridge and valley contours because in these areas the program will nd the same contour when it looks for intersections in the eight directions When all eight inter
341. pro le For example consider a road pro le that is drawn and then you use Input Edit Pro le to change a vertical curve length When you run Draw Pro le to redraw the pro le the program will detect that this pro le is already in the drawing If you select to erase the existing pro le then the program will erase all the entities used to draw the old pro le including the grid and annotation When the pro le contains a vertical curve the vertical curve annotations can be drawn Likewise the manhole annotations may be drawn for a sewer pro le First either a Vertical Curve Text Road Commands 195 Options or Pro le Sewer Settings dialog box appears which has some simple content and appearance op tions See the Design Sewer command for a description of the sewer options Select the OK button when you are done making changes and then pick the vertical position for the vertical curve or manholes The horizontal alignment is determined by the pro le Plan amp Pro le sheets can be drawn using the Draw Sheet and Draw Plan options The Block Name is the name of the drawing le in the Carlson support directory that is used for the pro le sheet You can use a customized pro le sheet by specifying a different Block Name or by editing pro le dwg in the support directory The Sheet Width is the pro le width in inches on the sheet The View Lower Y and Top Y control the size of the plan view window on the pro le sheet The Lo
342. pty or non existing le The dialog below shows the layout of this editor In the upper left corner is the Top Row number which is the number of the row at the top of the display Next to Top Row is Current Row which is the number of the row that is currently being edited To set the current row locate the cursor in one of the edit boxes in the row and press Enter Road Commands 193 Then there are six columns for the possible elds in a pro le Which columns are active depends on the type of pro le generic road pipe sewer or crossing Six rows are visable at a time To view different rows use the scroll bar on the right The Pro le Name edit box is an optional identi cation name used by multiple pro les in Draw Pro le On the right is a column for Check Stations which report the elevation at the speci ed stations The Check Stations are not stored in the pro le This is a design tool for viewing the elevations at certain stations while adjusting the pro le data The last line has seven action bottons Insert adds a new row into the pro le after the current row Delete removes the current row The Translate option adds or subtracts to stations or elevations Next and Previous are used for multiple pro les only Next goes to the next pro le in the pro le le while previous moves to the previous pro le Pro le Number in the upper right displays the sequential number of the active pro le for multple pro le
343. r might cut other objects Scale Function This command changes all the dimensions of a selected object Scaling changes dimensions equally in the x and y directions hence scaling cannot change the aspect ratio of an object Prompts Select boundary object pick an object to be scaled press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Base point pick base point lt Scale Factor gt Reference 2 objects will be scaled to 2 times their original size and placement will be such that the distance of each point to the base point will also be increased by the same scale fractional scale factors like 0 3 will reduce the size of objects The scale factor must be a positive real number lt Scale Factor gt Reference type ref to choose scaling by reference Reference length lt 1 gt Choose the length to be the reference It can be entred in two ways from the keyboard or by entering the endpoints of a line that needs to be scaled the reference option is more useful for the second situation New length Choose the new length that the reference length has to change to The scale factor will then be the new length divided by the old length Once again the new length can be speci ed in two ways from the keyboard and by two points in the drawing The reference option is most useful in the situation where a line or an object needs to be made exactly the size of an existing line in the drawing Extend Func
344. rate points Suggestion When walking in light to heavy canopy the rover might remain Float and display RMS accuracies of over a foot sub meter or more Setting your GPS RMS Tolerance high and turning off Store Fixed Only will allow storing wetland and LOD limits of disturbance points under canopy that require only sub meter tolerances USCG beacon DGPS sub meter RTK GPS will always use these settings Projection Type de nes the datum coordinate system to be used for converting the latitude longitude from the GPS receiver into cartesian coordinates For the United States two separate horizontal control systems have been devel oped by the Federal Government State Plane 1927 and State Plane 1983 For international use the UTM Universal Transverse and Mecator System should be selected The Lat Lon option will convert the latitude longitude from degrees minutes seconds format into decimal degrees This option is useful when working in a decimal degrees lat lon coordinate system Zone For State Plane projections you must select the correct state zone that you are working in For UTM the Automatic Zone option will have the program automatically use the correct UTM zone for your location Otherwise for UTM you can manually set a speci c UTM zone This manual option applies to working on the border between zones and you want to force the program to always use one of those zones Important Coordinates of surveyed points will be inaccurate
345. rawing which allows you to update the le after editing the drawing with commands such as Erase Move Rotate or Change Elevations Another handy option is the Draw Entities by Point Number which allows the user to input point number ranges and plot Lines Arcs Polylines or 3DPolys Coordinate les have either numeric or alphanumeric point numbers Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine or less digits and letters i e point number 7A The type of point number format is displayed at the top title bar of the dialog shown on the next page Use the Copy CRD File option to change the point number format Coordinate File Utilities Options Point Protect Toggle Toggles point protection on and off You may want to toggle point protect off before executing the F option explained previously This way you are not prompted for overwriting each time a coordinate is updated Open CRD File Allows the user to switch to another le When you exit Coordinate File Utilities this will be the current or logged le that you work with in Carlson Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 66 Copy Merge CRD File Copies a coordinate le to another le name This can be used to make a backup of your coordinate le Also there is an option to specify the copied le format as either numeric or alphanumeric so that you can change the format of the original Map Points from 2nd File This routine adds point to the current CRD le from points stored in a
346. rd consists of a point number northing easting elevation and descrip tion When processing this data will be stored as a point in the coordinate le DS Description The description record is an additional note appears in the spreadsheet editor and printouts This record is not used in processing Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 92 CL Closing Shot The closing shot record is the traverse record where the foresight point is the closing point for the traverse This record is used by the adjustment commands in the Process menu There should be only one CL record in the raw le If there is no CL record the process adjustment routines will prompt for which shot is the closing shot AB Angle Balance The Angle Balance is the traverse record that the Angle Balance routine in the Process menu uses to compare the angle between the occupied point and foresight point of this record with a user speci ed refer ence angle There should be only one AB record in the raw Raw File gt c sc14 data survey rw5 CRD File gt c sc14 data survey crd Note Survey Example PntNo Northing Easting Elevation Desc 1 5000 5000 100 START OcPt BsPt SetAzi 1 InstHgt RodHgt 5 32 6 0 OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc TR 1 2 AR 268 5330 711 420 89 4050 P2 InstHgt RodHgt 5 43 6 0 OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc TR 2 3 AR 262 5448 457 760 89 3236 P3 InstHgt RodHgt 5 4 6 0 OcPt FsPt HorzAngle Slope
347. rect for Earth Curvature adjusts the calculated points for the effect of the Earth s curvature Typically this adjustment is small and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal The Reference Closing Point is an optional eld for entering the coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with This reference closing point is used to calculate the closure Without using this option the program will by default use the starting coordinate as the reference closing point After picking OK for the rst dialog a Traverse Points dialog appears for entering the starting and ending point numbers The program reads the raw le to set the defaults for these point numbers which are used to calculate the closure The difference between the ending point and the reference closing point is the closure error and the sum of the traverse distances from the starting to the ending point is used as the total distance traversed After picking OK for the second dialog the program starts processing the raw le from the top record down The result is displayed in the standard report viewer which can save print or draw the report Process gt Angle Balance This process method applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates The angle balance takes the angular error divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each traverse line by this amount The angular error is the difference Chapter 2 Field Reference Gui
348. reen that appears depends on whether you are using total stations or GPS as described below When you reach the target point click the Store button Carlson Field reports the difference between your current position and your target position At this point you can choose to store this staked out point as a new point in the coordinate le Field Commands 265 When the target stakeout point has an elevation Carlson Field also reports the elevation difference between the target and current elevations This cut ll is also in an edit box that allows you to change the value for labeling For example you may want to round the cut ll number to an even number to label on the stake with a mark to indicate where this even number occurs When you change the cut ll label from the original value Carlson Field will report the offset for this mark For total stations Carlson Field will also report the zenith angle for locating Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 266 this mark There are also elds in the report dialog for entering vertical offsets to get additional cut ll values For example if the target point is for the road surface and you want to also get the cut ll to an 18 inch subgrade then enter 1 5 as the vertical offset GPS Stakeout After you click Start to begin staking the point Carlson Field changes the dialog box to the one shown below The dialog shows the target point the current position northing easting and elevation
349. riangulation le t that can be used in the Elevation Difference command Given data points that represent the surface this command can create a nal contour map with labeled smoothed and highlighted contours The data points can be points inserts lines polylines and points from ASCII or CRD les In order to force Triangulate amp Contour to interpolate elevations between two points that de ne a straight line in the surface such as points on a rigde wall or road a barrier line must exist between the points A barrier line can be speci ed as a 3D polyline or line In fact all lines and polylines are treated as barrier lines Triangulate amp Contour has many options which are speci ed in the dialog box shown here With this command you can do any combination of drawing the triangulation network lines drawing the contours drawing triangulation network 3D Faces and writing a triangulation le The triangulation options are in the top section of the dialog while the contouring options are at the bottom All the Triangulate amp Contour options can be set in Con gure Carlson Survey as defaults Con gure Carlson Survey also has an Auto run Contour option which skips the dialogs when running Triangulate amp Contour If Triangulate amp Contour reports zero points found and fails to do anything when you re using points then those points are probably located at zero elevation To x this problem you can either choose
350. ring gt Point Press Enter Enter Bearing Qdd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 145 1041 for NE 45d10 41 Chord Length lt 200 46 gt 200 Is this arc in the correct direction lt Yes gt No Press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None Raster Image Function This command allows you to manage raster images 1 The Image Manager dialog box lists all the image les attached to the current drawing You can view the parame ters and details for selected images You can attach new image les and detach locate reload and unload existing images List View This button lists the image de nitions attached to the drawing Each image name appears only once regardless of how many times you attach insert the image You can sort the list of images by name status loaded unloaded or not found type TIFF for example date size or the saved path and le name By default Carlson Field displays the list alphabetically by image name To select multiple images hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a speci c column click that column s heading To change the width of the column drag the line between the column headings to the right or left Carlson Field saves and restores the settings when you reopen the dialog box To change an image name select it and then click it again or select it and then press F2 You cannot edit names of images th
351. ription matching Delete Points Deletes points in the le by de ning a range of point numbers to delete or by picking a polyline that de nes a perimeter from which points inside or outside the perimeter are deleted Screen Pick Point Pick a point on the graphics screen and add or update it s coordinate values to the CRD le This command does not plot a point point attributes or point symbol Use the Locate Point command to do this Scale Points This command scales points in a coordinate le The northing easting and optionally the elevation are multiplied by the speci ed scale factor You can use this routine for metric English conversion or a speci c conversion by choosing the Use Customized Scale Factor option and specifying the desired Scale Factor in the edit box The Scale command in the Edit menu can be used to scale points on the screen from a reference point but this does not update the coordinate le To update the coordinate le using the points on the screen use the Update from Drawing option in Coordinate File Utilities Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 70 Translate Points This command translates points in a coordinate le The delta X Y and Z can be entered directly or calculated from original and destination coordinates The coordinates can be entered directly or speci ed by point number Any points in the drawing will be updated automatically in addition to updating the coordinate le The
352. rkers etc are disable These options may all be accessed with the submenus accessible through the Control button 11 Ensure that the Synch time of the Rover and Base are the same This setting may be accessed by rst pressing Control and then cycling through the menus until the MASKS SYNCH TIME option is available Trimble 4700 4800 Hardware and Equipment 1 Make sure that the computer s serial port is connected to the 4700 4800 in it s COM1 port typically the port that a data collector is normally plugged into Power should be supplied on COM2 and any radio used for RTK should be plugged into COM3 2 All other equipment antenna wires etc should be set up as normally directed by the manuals Software Con guration 1 After selecting the Trimble 4700 equipment type from the con gure eld menu open up Equipment Setup This should bring up a new window dialog box with the following options a Receiver Type Select whether you are using a 4700 or 4800 receiver b Station Type Choose what type of RTK station you are setting this receiver up as a base or rover c RTK Correction type Select the type of Corrections you would like a base station to transmit Note that CMR messages should be used for most precision applications as RTCM is only capable of producing less accurate oating precision positions d Radio Baud Rate The baud rate of the radio port This should be left at the default setting of
353. row selection triangle to choose the value for each GIS prompt If no values are shown you can type any input for that value Pick Previous or Continue to go backwards or forwards Exit ends the GIS prompting The above procedure stores ASCII GIS information into one Note le with the same name as the current coordinate le Review section 10 to plot list and edit Note les in Carlson Field Chapter 3 Field User Guide 312 GIS Data Collection Page 9 Point Store ASCII GIS using Total Station The Point Store command in Field can store both GIS information and survey information with eld collected points The following procedure details the steps needed to collect points with GIS and survey information using the Point Store command and Total Station equipment Before running this procedure create GIS prompting les to use with the De ne Note File Prompts command Step 1 Pick Point Store in the Field drop down menu Step 2 If no coordinate le CRD has been selected for the current drawing then Tsunmai will prompt you to load an existing or new CRD le Pick New to create a new CRD le For the CRD le name type in GIS JOB001 and pick Save to create this new coordinate le Step 3 Pick Setup F3 to bring up the pop up dialog box titled Total Station Setup The total station and computer running Carlson Field must be connected by serial cable Step 4 Type in 1 for the Occupied Point If there are no co
354. rrent equipment type GPS Settings Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 222 The RMS Tolerance checks the RMS values when reading GPS positions The RMS is the accuracy value reported by the GPS receiver There are separate settings for the horizontal and vertical RMS values The RMS root meaned squared value means that the reported coordinate is within the RMS value of the true coordinate to a certain con dence level The con dence level depends on the GPS receiver Typically it is a 98 con dence If either RMS value exceeds the user de nedtolerance while storing points Carlson Field will default to No when it asks if you want to store the point You are required to choose yes to override the tolerance check and store the point Suggestion When GPS RTK systems loose lock and go Float both the horizontal and vertical RMS values typically jump up to sub meter 1 or higher values In Carlson Field one foot is the default for the GPS RMS Tolerance Some operators set the GPS RMS Tolerance low to 0 2 to check for high RMS values while still Fixed Store Fixed Only The position of the GPS rover is considered either Autonomous Float or Fixed based on the solution status from the GPS base corrections When you are storing points and the Store Fixed Only box is checked Carlson Field will only store points if your position is Fixed We suggest you leave this box checked It ensures that you do not record inaccu
355. run in where slope becomes at Station for super at normal crown rate in where slope equals negative of normal crown rate Station to begin full super where slope reaches full super slope Station to end full super where slopes begins to transition from full super back to normal Station for super at normal crown rate out where slope equals negative of normal crown Station to end super runoff where slope becomes at Station to end transition where slope returns to normal crown rate The Calculate Stations button calculates the stations for begin run in normal crown rate in normal crown rate out and end super run out To calculate these stations the values with an must be entered These values are the begin transition begin full super end full super end transition normal grade slope and slope of super full must be entered The Compound Curve option allows you to specify a second superelevation slope for a compound curve In addition to specifying the second slope the starting and ending stations for this slope must also be entered Road Commands 211 Input Edit Section File Function This program can be used to enter or edit data stored in a section le SCT le The section data consists of sta tions offsets elevations and descriptions This command also has utilities for translating the offsets and elevations deleting stations from the le intersecting the outslopes of one section le with another co
356. ry 139 Offset Polyline 29 Offset Stakeout 167 OmniStar Otto 334 On Line Help 292 Pan 34 196 278 285 341 Path nder 241 Pattern Point Survey 275 PC PT Radius Point 46 PC Radius Chord 46 PC Cogo 94 Place Image by World File 49 Plot 69 154 215 216 219 315 Plot 3D Grid File 153 157 158 Plot Triangular Mesh 164 Index 346 Point Check By Robotics 275 Point Defaults 57 59 83 116 Point ID 50 234 point number format 15 57 66 Point Number Report 74 Point Number Settings 58 Point Protect 64 66 81 82 97 Points Commands 57 Point Settings 140 225 300 301 305 312 315 Point Store 147 166 225 226 257 258 260 262 269 271 300 303 305 309 311 313 Polyline 16 21 26 30 42 61 119 129 138 140 141 172 185 193 285 Polyline Info 51 Polyline to Centerline File 192 Polyline Utilities 26 29 Preferences 15 Prepare Story Stake 177 Previous 33 194 220 312 317 Project 8 13 14 172 175 223 Project Explorer 13 radius point 46 80 88 137 138 182 Raster Image 47 RAW 2 raw le 91 94 98 100 103 105 107 257 305 Redraw 37 Reduce Polyline Vertices 27 Regen 37 235 registration 3 4 293 Remove Polyline Arcs 28 Remove Polyline Segment 28 Remove Polyline Vertex 29 Renumber Points 70 106 repackaged ix Report Print Speci cations 15 Report Viewer 5 Resection 274 Restore Due North 38 Restore Layer 40 Reverse Polyline
357. ry select the symbol to be moved on the tree and click an Up or Down button as many times a needed to reach the desired category The symbols are sorted alphabetically within each category while categories are remaining in the order placed to allow the more frequently accessed categories be on top Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite None 4 Sided Building Function Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 134 Often only two sides of a building are surveyed in the eld This routine completes the building by drawing the other two sides 4 Sided Building creates a parallelogram given two connecting lines or given a polyline with two segments With two lines there is an option to make the parallelogram as a polyline or as 4 lines Prompts Pick a 2 sided building pick a line Pick another side pick an adjoining line Convert the lines into a polyline lt Y gt N Press Enter Enter a width for the polyline lt 1 00 gt Press Enter Pick a 2 sided building pick a polyline Enter a width for the polyline lt 0 00 gt Press Enter Pick a 2 sided building Press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Keyboard Command 4sided Prerequisite A polyline with two segments or two adjoining lines File Name lsp poly3d exp Inverse with Area Function This command generates a report of the bearing and horizontal distance between a series of points and calculates the area of the closed gure de ned by
358. s The Edit button brings up the Edit Station dialog which shows a graphic of the section on top a list of the offset elevation points in the middle and the function buttons on the bottom To add an offset point pick the Insert button Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 212 and then type in the offset elevation and description in the edit boxes Left offsets are entered as negative numbers To edit an offset point highlight Road Commands 213 the point from the list and then edit the values in the Offset Elev and Desc edit boxes The Sort button will sort the list of offsets from lowest to highest left to right The Up button will move the highlighted offset point up in the list Likewise the Down button moves the highlighted offset point down in the list The Delete button erases the highlighted offset and elevation from the list After inputting or editing press the OK button to return to the Stations List dialog and keep any changes you have made Select the Cancel button if you want to cancel changes made to the current station When focus returns to the Stations List Dialog you can select any of the buttons on the left side of the dialog to process the stations as explained below The Translate option allows you to add or subtract a distance from the offsets to adjust or shift the centerline You can also adjust the elevations up or down When using this option you are prompted for the range of stations to operate on and the values to
359. s State Plane Grid Factor Elevation Earth Radius Laser Offset Settings There is an option to use a laser for reading the distance and angle for offset points When this option is enabled you can choose the laser equipment type and communication parameters The serial port for the laser must be different than the GPS which requires at least two serial ports on the computer When using a laser for offsets the program will read the current position from the GPS and then read the laser for the distance and angle to the point This combination allows you to calculate points that cannot be directly reached by the GPS There are two methods in the Point Store command to use the laser when this option is enabled The Point Store dialog will have a new Laser button which will bring up another dialog that allows you to take multiple shots from the laser The other method is to click on the Offset toggle in the Point Store dialog Then when you do the Read function the program will read the GPS position and then pop up a dialog for taking one offset shot Point Settings Beep for Store Point This option will make a triple beep to indicate when a point is stored in the coordinate le User Entered Point Notes Point Notes are additional descriptions that can be stored with a point A regular point consists of a point number northing easting elevation and 32 character description These points are stored in a CRD le Point Notes are a way to add
360. s snapped to or not depends on whether the point comes within the aperture box or not The size of the aperture box can be changed made smaller for ner selection or made bigger to nd points easily Set Environment Variables Function This command setsvarious system variables for the AutoCAD engine Type to see a list of the variable names and their current settings Points Commands All the routines in this menu operate on points in a Carlsoncoordinate le crd Coordinate les are binary les that contains point numbers northings eastings elevations anddescriptions The rst time a command references a coordinate le the program prompts for thename of the coordinate le to use From then on that coordinate le is the current coordinate le Another coordinate le can be used by choosing Set Coordinate File or Open CoordinateFile in Coordinate File Utilities Whenever asked for point numbers you can enter any combination with commas and dashesor All to use all points For example 1 3 7 20 23 would use 1 2 3 7 20 21 22 23 Coordinate les have either numeric or alphanumeric point numbers Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine or less digits and letters i e point 7A The type ofpoint number format is set when the coordinate le is created This setting is found under General Settings in Con gure Each point is drawn by three entities point block point node and symbol The point block isa BLOCK wit
361. s command allows you to select the code table le to use and replacement characters To choose a different code table pick the Select button in the upper left corner Sort Table This sorts the code table by either code name or layer Report Codes Points This routine prints the code table or the data le to the screen le or printer A useful option here is to print the data le CRD Points and choose Sort by Codes which will group the data points by distinct codes Code Table by CRD This command will create code table de nitions based on the data le eld descriptions COGO Commands 131 Example drawing results using the example points and example code de nitions Code De nitions Edit To edit a code de nition highlight just one of the de nitions in the list Then select the Edit button Add The new code de nition is inserted in the list in the position after the currently selected one If none are selected for positioning the new code is placed at the top Only one code de nition may be highlighted before running this routine Cut This command will remove the highlighted code de nitions from the list and puts them in a buffer for retrieval with Paste Paste This command will insert the code de nitions put in the buffer by the Cut command These codes will be inserted after the row of the currently highlighted code or at the top Set Process Data File Set CRD File This command loads
362. s not allow arcs in 3D polylines Removing arcs is also a prereq uisite to some Leica Site Manager commands that don t handle arcs such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid le This process can add many vertices to the polyline Prompts Select polylines to remove arcs from Select objects pick polylines Offset cutoff lt 0 5 gt Press Enter This is the max that any point on the arc will be allowed to shift Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Remove Polyline Segment Function Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 28 This command removes the user speci ed segment from a polyline A polyline segment is the section between two vertices of the polyline There are two options for removing the segment Either the two vertices of the removed segments are averaged together to keep polyline continuous or the segment is left missing in the polyline which creates two separate polylines The key words Continuous and Break respectively identify these two options Prompts Break polyline at removal or keep continuous Break lt Continuous gt Press Enter Select polyline segment to remove pick point on polyline Select polyline segment to remove Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Remove Polyline Vertex Function This command removes the user speci ed vertex from a polyline Prompts Select polyline vert
363. s option off for the FH for re hydrant code to drawn them at zero Then the GND code could have this option on to draw the ground shots at their elevations Random Rotate This option will randomly rotate the symbol For example this option could be used for tree symbols to have the trees drawn in various orientations Line Width This is the width for the line work Distinct Point Layer When this toggle is selected the line work is created in the layer de ned in the Layer eld and the points are created in the speci ed distinct point layer For example you could have DRIVEWAY for linework and DRIVEWAY PNT for the points Points from D scdev DATA nugent2 crd Highest point number 207 26T 25 BLC1 BUILDING 11 19 20 77 78 BLC3 BUILDING 42 45 CWL 34 36 58 CWL1 64 66 CWR 35 59 CWR1 65 67 DECK 28 29 DWL1 DRIVEWAY LEFT 36 38 41 DWL2 DRIVEWAY LEFT 61 63 DWR1 39 40 46 47 DWR2 60 62 EL 32 56 ER 33 37 47 57 FPC1 CHAIN LINK FENC 10 26 FPC2 CHAIN LINK FENC 10 14 FPC3 CHAIN LINK FENC 15 16 FPC4 CHAIN LINK FENC 17 53 FPC5 CHAIN LINK FENC 54 55 FPW4 WOOD FENCE 18 26 GAR2 6 7 27 79 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 130 PAT1 48 50 52 PAT2 68 70 77 POOL 22 24 80 82 RC 30 31 SHD1 8 9 12 51 TL 84 87 92 TP 13 83 UP UTILITY POLE 71 73 W 74 76 100 points have 32 distinct codes Example Sort by Codes point report Code Table Settings Select Code Table Thi
364. s that follow are optional h You can verify that the rover is receiving correction by clicking the MONITOR INCOMING CONNECTION and then clicking AUTOREFRESH The open window shows the time since each correction type was last received delta time In NCT RTK mode the delta time of 5b should stay around 1 second and the delta time of message 5c should not go above 30 seconds If these numbers are high or if they read NEVER try repeating the setup process or calling Carlson Software technical support i Click SAVE SETTINGS AND EXIT and then choose MONITOR GPS POSITION from the FIELD menu The STATUS display should eventually go to LOCK Troubleshooting Base Rover Con guration If you ve con gured a base to output corrections and you re rover does not appear to be receiving the corrections try each of the following in order 1 Verify that your BASE and ROVER are both set to the same correction type 2 Under Con gure Radio check that your ROVER is set to slave and that your BASE is set to master 3 Under Con gure Ports check that both your base and your rover s RTK Data Ports are set to the proper value Usually Radio Port 4 Under the Edit Base Position check that your BASE is set to a valid position Note that if the given position is too far away from the position the BASE is reading the BASE will not send corrections 5 If you re trying to use RTCM make sure the BASE and ROVER have the same station ID s
365. s the layer symbol number and whether points will be drawn with descriptions and elevations Carlson Field s Field to Finish code table can override these defaults The symbol used for default points is displayed You can choose another symbol by changing the Symbol name or by selecting one from the table that the Select Symbol button brings up Default point settings are used for points whose descriptions don t correspond to any category on the Field to Finish code table Label Descriptions and Label Elevations Control whether these two items of information appear on your drawing next to each point Locate on Real Z Axis will record points with their true elevations If this setting is off all points recorded will have an elevation of zero Layer for Points indicates the layer where all default points will be drawn For points using a code on the code table the code table will determine their layer Number of Readings speci es how many times Carlson Field will read from the instrument in the Read function of the Point Store command This applies to both GPS and total stations The readings will be averaged to nd a more accurate position Direct Reverse Tolerances are used with total stations to check the pairs of direct and reverse horizontal angles vertical angles and distances When these values are off by more than the tolerance the program will display a warning Field to Finish is explained fully in the Field to Finish command de
366. s to the point on an object that forms a normal or perpendicular with another object Tangent Tangent snaps to a point on a circle or arc which would form a tangent to this object if selected as the second point of a line arc or polyline Nearest Nearest snaps to the nearest point object that which is created by the Locate Points command or the point on other objects nearest to the selection point Apparent Intersection Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent point of intersection of objects that do not actually intersect in 3D space but appear to intersect on screen Quick When multiple snap options are in action Quick snaps to the rst eligible point on the rst object that the routine nds If Quick were not selected then the command would search for the point nearest to the center of the crosshairs Since this can take a long time in complex drawings Quick can be useful in those cases Clear All The Clear All button clears all selection boxes so that a fresh selection or set of selections can be made Aperture Size Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 56 When atleast one of the Object snap modes is on the cursor turns to an aperture box if the user is in the draw mode that is when drawing lines polylines curves etc The points for these curves to be drawn are picked automatically depending on the nature of snap selected and where the selection point is picked on the screen Whether a point i
367. sections are the same contour the interpolated grid elevation equals the contour elevation instead of rising up the ridge or dipping in the valley The 3D barrier polylines force interpolation along the ridge or valley To draw these polylines set the OSNAP to Nearest and run 3D Polyline under Draw Then draw the polyline by picking the contour polylines where the barrier polyline crosses them Prompts GRiD File to Create File Selection Dialog Enter a name for the grid le The default directory is the Carlson Field data directory Use position from another le or pick grid position File lt Pick gt Press Enter Using the position from another le will apply the lower left and upper right corners and the grid resolution of the another grid le to the current one Pick the Lower Left grid corner pick a point for the lower left limit of the grid Pick the Upper Right grid corner pick a point Make GRiD File dialog box In this dialog you specify the grid resolution and whether or not to include data points with zero elevations You can specify the resolution by entering the number of grid cells in the X and Y directions By the Dimensions option you to set the X and Y size for each grid cell Select the points lines and polylines to grid from Select objects pick the objects that will de ne the surface model Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite Entities that de ne the surface DTM Commands 151 Extrapo
368. sed to align to an existing local coordinate system At least two pairs of local and Field Commands 253 GPS coordinates must be entered In addition to the northing and easting transformation SurvStar will also translate the elevation from the GPS system to the local The elevation difference between the two systems is modeled by a best t plane An alignment is only valid if the base receiver setup has not changed since the alignment points were recorded In order to use an alignment when returning to a site you must set up the base receiver in the same position and enter the same LAT LONG coordinates for the base The Align GPS to Local Crds menu item brings up the alignment dialog box There is more information than to t in one window so use the View button to switch between viewing the local coordinates and the GPS Lat Lon Each line in the box represents one alignment point Each point in an alignment le relates a speci c Lat Lon Elv to a speci c Northing Easting Elevation for your local coordinate system Carlson Field will use the current alignment le every time that the GPS is read It provides the necessary adjustment to properly convert that position to your coordinate system In the local points view the HRes column shows the horizontal residual and the VRes column shows the vertical residual The residual is the difference between the actual point and the point calculated using the alignment trans formation In GP
369. set codes apply to 2D and 3D polylines A single set of offset codes can be used to offset the polyline a set amount For example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP 12 531 533 103 EP This would create a polyline connecting points 10 11 and 12 and an offset polyline with a 2 5 horizontal and 0 5 vertical offset The direction of the horizontal offset is determined by the direction of the polyline A positive horizontal offset goes right from the polyline direction and a negative goes left Polyline without smoothing Polyline with smoothing The horizontal and vertical offset amounts apply starting at the point with the offset codes until a new offset code or the end of the polyline Only one horizontal and vertical offset can be applied to 2D polylines For 3D polylines multiple offset codes can be used to make a variable offset For example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP OH5 5 OV 75 12 531 533 103 EP OH7 5 This would offset the rst point horizontal 2 5 and vertical 0 5 the second point horizontal 5 5 and vertical 0 75 and the third point horizontal 7 5 and vertical 0 75 When a point from the data le has a description that does not match any of the de ned codes the point will be drawn with a default method This default is to draw a point in the MISC layer with no linework To set your own default de ne a code called SC DFLT The unmatched points will
370. size of the inserted block on screen by checking that option If that option is not checked in the dialog box then the user needs to specify the insertion parameters for the block by giving the coordinates of the insertion point the scale in all three directions and the angle of rotation By default the insertion point is 0 0 0 the scale on each axis is 1 and the angle of rotation is zero with respect to the positive X axis The user can also choose to explode the block after insertion Pull Down Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Text Function Draw Commands 43 This is the basic command for inserting text in the drawing The user is prompted for a base point justi cation or text style The Justi cation option allows the user to choose how text ows with respect to the base point selected for writing the text The style option allows the user only to know the current text style A desired text style can be set or selected using the Text command under the Inq Set pulldown menu The text appears on screen as it is typed but is not placed at its nal location until the user presses Enter Location of the text object placement can be changed even during typing After pressing Enter at the end of one line of text the routine prompts the user for another line of text below the insertion point of the last text object The user can enter another line of text or end the command by pressing Enter Each line of t
371. so contain different options that are speci c to that type of total station Geodimeter Total Station Setup The three methods of connecting to the Geodimeter include Station RPU and GeoRadio The Station option is for connecting directly to the instrument The RPU is a remote control panel The GeoRadio is a radio for remote control of the instrument For the GeoRadio the Station Address and Remote Address set the radio addresses and the Radio Channel sets the radio channel The intensity of the instrument Tracklight can be set to Off Low or High The Geodimeter On and Off buttons are for putting the instrument in sleep mode to save power There are four different read methods STD mode has a 3 5 second measurement time for each point It is usually used when a normal degree of angle and distance accuracy is required TRK mode uses automatic measured values that are updated 0 4 seconds after making a contact with the prism Rep STD mode measures distance automatically every 4 seconds Fast STD mode measures distance in 1 3 seconds It is used when the demands on precision are low Leica Total Station Setup The Connection Mode chooses between connecting Carlson Field directly to the instrument or to a radio for remote control The EDM Mode sets the instrument distance measurement mode for standard shots All the possible modes are listed in this dialog including tracking and re ectorless Be sure to choose a mode that is supported by
372. sounder is plugged in Carlson Field requires two serial points on the computer when working with a depth sounder one for Depth Sounder 317 the GPS and the other for the depth sounder The depth sounder serial port must be separate from the GPS serial point Starting Out Before working with the depth sounder we suggest that you make sure the GPS system is working properly with Carlson Field De activate the depth sounder by setting the Model to None in the Depth Sounder Settings dialog box Set up the GPS system that you are using and plug the rover receiver into the COM port for the GPS Go to Monitor GPS Position under the Field menu Check that the information being output is correct Are the latitude and longitude readings what they should be Are the north and east coordinates aligned to your job coordinate grid Are the HRMS and VRMS low enough less than one Is the status xed If it s autonomous or oat this rover could be having trouble receiving the radio corrections the base receiver should be broadcasting If everything is working properly exit the monitor screen and start the depth sounder setup Measure the vertical distance from the GPS antenna to the surface of the water This distance will be called the rod height Go to the Con gure Tsuanmi gt General Settings window and enter this measurement in the Rod Height box Plug the depth sounder into the depth sounder COM port on your computer Go to the Con gure Field
373. speci ed description from the existing section le The Slope to Rock applies in Earthwork amp Final Contours when using a Rock Section File The cut slope will be the Slope to Rock up to the rock surface After reaching the rock surface the regular cut slopes apply Ditch Grades continue the template surface grades when in cut The Ditch Grades list contains each ditch grade in order from the regular template Any number of ditch grades can be added by picking the Add Ditch button To create a V ditch add just one ditch grade such as slope ratio 1 distance 1 This makes one side of the V The pivot point for the cut slopes will be the bottom of the V and the other side of the V will be made be the cut slope For a ditch with a at bottom you could have two ditch grades such as slope ratio 1 distance 1 and then slope percent 0 distance 1 Fill treatment is similar to cut Up to ve slopes for different depths can be speci ed Slopes in Series and Smooth Transitions work the same way as cut Berm Grades are the ll equivalent to Ditch Grades Fill treatment does have some extra options Guardrail Expansion will extend the last template surface grade the speci ed Shoulder Distance when the ll is greater than the Min Depth The Force Ditch option will apply the Ditch Grades from cut when the ll depth is less than the Max Depth The Minimum Depth for Berm Grades will only draw the Berm Grades when the ll depth is greater than the
374. ssing and overwrite the CRD le coordinates with the calculated raw le coordinates or cancel the processing to go back to the editor to change foresight numbers The Create Point Notes option will generate a note le NOT named after the coordinate COGO Commands 97 le The note le contains additional descriptions for points With this option active the text from all note records DS records will be stored to the note le for the foresight point number preceding the note records The Use Report Formatter option allows you to customize the process results report by selecting the layout of the elds to display The report formatter can also output the report to Excel and Access Without the report formatter the program generates a standard results report The Scale Factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the traverse and sideshot records The Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup option will calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record This scale factor is calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and foresights points At these points the scale factor is calculated as the state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth radius SF Grid Factor Elev Earth Radius In order to calculate these state plane scale factors the traverse coordinates must be in state plane coordinates When this option is selected the program will prompt for the state plane zone to use The Cor
375. stablished coordinates on the site Alignment Choose a point on site and do a one point alignment For the local alignment point enter the coordinates that you would like to use ie 5000 5000 100 Under Con gure Field gt GPS Settings The One Pt Align Azimuth option chooses between using true north geodetic or state plane north grid To use real world ground distances set the Project Scale Factor under Con gure Field gt GPS Settings Otherwise the default scale factor of 1 0 will collect points on state plane distances Scenario One known state plane coordinate and you want to work in the state plane coordinate system Alignment Either setup the base over the known state plane coordinate or do a one point alignment on this known state plane point In Con gure Field gt GPS Settings set the One Point Align Azimuth to Grid and set the scale factor to 1 0 Scenario Multiple known control points Alignment Choose two or more control points to align to It is best to use control points around the perimeter of the site Use as many control points as are available or enough to envelope the site In Con gure Field gt GPS Settings set the Transformation to Plane Similarity to t the GPS points onto the control points and set the Project Scale Factor to 1 0 After making the alignment stake out another control point ideally one the is not used in the alignment to make sure the alignment is good Chapter 2 Field Reference Gu
376. t This distance is also reported as how far north south and how far east west to go and as how far in out and left right to go To in out and left right distances are relative to the rodman facing the instrument Keep moving the rodman and picking the Read button until you reach the point Then pick the Store button For robotic total stations operating remotely there is a Continuous button that puts the instrument in track ing mode with continous measurements In the graphics view the large X shows the point being staked out and the triangle represents your position Also the location of the instrument is shown with an icon and the backsight is shown as temporary line Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 268 Auto Points At Interval Function This command stores a point whenever the distance or time from the previous point exceeds the user speci ed interval This command only applies to GPS and robotic total stations If you will be collecting a large number of points at once Auto Points at Interval can be a useful tool For example you may want to plot the edge of a road Once you start Auto Points you can walk along that edge of road and let Carlson Field record your position automatically The Auto Points at Interval dialog box resembles the Point Store dialog box with the addition that you can set the interval to record points You can set it to store a point every time you move a certain distance by selecting Distance and entering
377. t To Database option will store additional elds for each point in a Microsoft Access database The database to store the data is set in the Output File line The Template File is a database that de nes the elds to record See the De ne Template Database command for more information Field Commands 229 Equipment Setup Function with Total Stations Selecting the Equipment Setup command will send the user directly to a settings window that corresponds with the instrument selected in Con gure Field Equipment Setup for total stations will be discussed rst followed by GPS equipment This function for Total Stations lets you tell Carlson Field how you have positioned your total station The setup information in this command is required before taking shots Besides running this command from the Field pulldown menu you can also reach this command with the Setup F3 button from many of the other Carlson Field functions Occupied Point refers to the point your total station is setup on This point is de ned by a point number that references the current coordinate le The coordinates and description of this point are displayed below the point number The List button will bring up a list of the points in the coordinate le which you can review or select from If the coordinates for the occupied point are not yet in the coordinate le then you can pick the Create Point button to enter these coordinates The backsight can reference
378. t and staked points The staked point coordinate le can be speci ed by picking the Select Coordinate File button Check Total Station Turn Angle will compare the angle from the instrument and the angle to the target point If this difference is greater than the speci ed tolerance then Carlson Field will display a warning message Stakeout Tolerance controls the maximum difference between the target location and actual staked point When the staked point is beyond the tolerance Carlson Field displays a warning dialog GPS Number of Reads for Final Avg speci es how many times Carlson Field will read the GPS receiver position for the nal staked point These reading are averaged Averaging several readings while occupying one point yields a more accurate result but inevitably takes longer Total Station Scale Settings These settings apply only to total stations The Project Scale Factor is multiplied by the measured distance from Field Commands 227 the total station when calculating the foresight point coordinates A typical project scale factor for working in state plane coordinates is slightly less than one Factors greater than 2 0 or less than 0 5 are not allowed The Project Scale Factor can be entered directly or choose the Calculate button The Calculate function takes a state plane coordinate and calculates the project scale factor as the state plane grid factor minus the elevation factor Grid Factor elevation earth radius
379. t drawing it Smooth Contour This option activates smoothing on the contour lines Bezier smoothing holds all the contour points calculated from the triangulation and only smooths between the calculated points The Low High scale effects the smoothing bulge Polynomial smoothing applies a fth degree polynomial for smooth transition between the triangulation faces DTM Commands 161 Loop Factor This setting is an integer value that controls the smoothing and can range from 1 to 10 Lower integers have less looping or less freedom to curve between contour line points Likewise higher integers increase the looping effect Reduce Vertices This option attempts to remove extra vertices from the contour polylines which has the advantages of a faster drawing and smaller drawing size Offset Distance This value is the maximum tolerance for shifting the original contour line in order to reduce vertices The reduced contour polyline will shift no more than this value at any point away from the original contour line A lower value will decrease the number of vertices removed and keep the contour line closer to the original A higher value will remove more vetices and allows the contour line to shift more from the original Choose Types to Triangulate Dialog This dialog sets what types of entities are to be included in triangulation This dialog only appears if the Specify Selection Set Options in the main dialog is set Points 3D Polylines
380. t symbols have a POINT entity at the center of the symbol therefore the NODE ObjectSNAP mode should be used when snapping lines or other drawing entities to point symbols Prompts Enter to use preview point or select known Bearing base point Pick point or Point number pick point De ne bearing by Line Points Bearing lt P gt L Select Line that de nes Bearing select line Known distance base point Pick point or Point number pick point Enter Pick Distance 40 41 int on Pick Intersection point Enter to cancel pick point COGO Commands 85 Enter Point Number lt 55 gt Enter This prompt appears only if Automatic Point Numbering is set to No Enter Point Symbol Number lt 4 gt Enter This prompt appears only if point symbol prompting is set to Yes Symbol number four is located at the computed coordinate and labeled point number 55 Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite Run Drawing Setup to set defaults Distance Distance Intersect Function This command creates a point at the distance distance intersection from two base points The program prompts for two distances and two base points The two possible intersections A B are shown on the screen You can either pick near the desired intersection or type in the letter A or B The A intersection is clockwise from the rst point Prompts Select 1st base point Pick point or point number 1 Points
381. t you pick a point in the drawing to de ne the direction The drawing should contain the design surface entities The program will then calculate all the intersections with contours and 3D polylines between these two points The resulting horizontal distances and slopes are shown in a report dialog From this dialog there is an option to stakeout one or two offset points set back from the starting point at the speci ed offsets Road Commands 179 Story Stake By Polyline Function This command creates a report of cut ll slopes and distances of a line across a design surface The line is de ned as perpendicular from a polyline starting at a speci ed station and going a speci ed distance The drawing should contain design surface entities The program will calculate all the intersections with drawing contours and 3D polylines along the line For example the polyline could be a toe of slope and this routine would be used to create story stakes at an interval along this polyline The routine starts by selecting a 3D polyline from the drawing Then there is a dialog to specify the settings The Station is the distance along the polyline for the starting point of the story stake The Next Interval is used to increment the station for the next default station The Story Offset is the length of the story stake line from the starting point To have the story stake line go perpendicular right from the polyline enter a positive offset value To g
382. tal and vertical alignment With this method the program will prompt you to select the 3D polyline from the drawing For both the Points and 3D Polyline methods you can specify the starting station of the horizontal alignment When using the Design Files and Section File methods the horizontal alignment starting station comes from the centerline le Road Commands 167 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 168 After specifying the offset stakeout method Carlson Field prompts for the station and offset to stakeout as shown in the dialog The station should be entered as a number without the symbol The Next Interval eld is used to increment the stakeout station for the next stakeout point In addition to incrementing to the next interval Carlson Field will also pick up special pro le or centerline points between intervals Centerline special points include start point end point cuvre PC PT and spiral TS SC CS ST Pro le special points include start end vertical curve VC VT high points and low points For example if the current station is 100 and the interval is 50 and there is a centerline PC at 112 4 then the next station after 100 will be 112 5 followed by 150 The Station List button brings up a list of all the station intervals and special stations You can select a station to stakeout by selecting the station from the list and pressing OK There are two offsets to allow for separate offsets for the design elevatio
383. ted into the proper coordinates Pulldown Menu Location Tools Keyboard Command geotiff Inquiry amp Settings Commands The top section of the Inquiry Settings menu contains the inquiry commands Carlson Field settings commands are in the bottom section Many of these settings commands are prerequisite to proper Carlson Field operation Since only a few of the settings are set automatically by the Carlson Field con guration le the rest of the settings are speci ed with the commands in this section List Function This command displays information regarding any selected drawing object Information displayed depends on the selected object The listing can be alternately viewed in a large text window or the smaller window by pressing F2 All listings display the following common information Object type XYZ position relative to the current UCS Layer Depending on the object and settings the following additional information may also be displayed Thickness if greater than zero UCS coordinates if the object s extrusion direction differs from the Z axis 0 0 1 of the current UCS How color linetype and line weight are speci ed if they are not speci ed by layer Other information is object speci c Examples include areas and perimeters of closed objects lengths of linear objects etc The following example shows the listing for a simple closed polygon Inquiry amp Settings Commands 49 Point ID Functio
384. tellites with elevations less than this number will not be used in position calculation receiver default is 15 6 Select the Radio Settings button This will open another window with several selectable settings Select the Port number the radio is attached to on the front of the receiver the baud rate of the radio number of radio stop bits and radio parity These last three settings should be listed in the documentation for the radio being used Also select the desired format to use for sending and receiving messages from the bottomost option Exit this menu 7 If the GPS receiver is being con gured as a base station select the Con gure Base Station button from the Equipment Setup menu and proceed with step 8 Otherwise the receiver is ready for use 8 There will now be a menu with a few buttons to select a method of determining the base station s present location The options are gt Read From GPS R ead one or more position readings from the GPS and use this position or the average of several poss itions for the base station corrections gt Enter Lat Lon this option will bring up a menu to enter the exact Latitude Longitude and elevation of the receiver s position by hand gt Enter State Plane Coord This option will bring up a menu to enter the coordinates of the position of the base station according to the state plane coordinate system gt Read from File this option will read a coordinate set from a
385. ter The subgrades are listed from top to bottom order To add a template element highlight the position in the list above where to insert the element Then pick one of the element icons To change the order of an element highlight the element and pick the Move Up or Move Down buttons The Edit button edits the dimensions of the highlighted element The Remove button erases the highlighted element from the list There is no limit to the number of surface or subgrade elements Note that there is a Right Side Same as Left option When active this option only requires template design for the left side and will automatically mirror the design for the right side The template surface can be composed of three types of elements medians grades and curbs The median is a exible closed gure de ned in a clockwise direction Each median point consists of an X and Y offset The median must be closed and the program will automatically Road Commands 197 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 198 create the closing segment In the Median Design dialog the median is shown in the top display and bot tom has a list of median points The display shows the median in magenta and the grade lines in and out in green For the display the grade in comes from the left and the grade out goes to the right The median must de ne the Grade In point which is the point that ties into the incoming surface grade Also the Grade Out point must be speci ed for where the sur
386. th a template design le tpl le The template transition le de nes changes in grade distances or slopes during a speci ed range of stations The types of transitions is limited to only modifying existing template grades Template Transition does not allow curbs medians subgrades or cut ll treatment to be modi ed Also new template elements cannot be added and existing elements cannot be removed The rst Template Transition dialog shows a list of the transitions To add a transition click the Add button This brings up the second Template Transition dialog which shows the transition template at the top The middle sections list the template grades that can be changed To modify a grade highlight the grade and click the Edit button For example to Road Commands 207 change the EP grade from 12 feet to 18 feet highlight EP click Edit and change the distance to 18 The Begin Transition Station is where the normal template begins to transition to the modi ed template The Begin Full Template Station is where the modi ed template is used entirely The End Full Template Station is where the template starts to transition back to normal The End Transition Station is where the template has returned to normal Consider the stations shown below with a normal 12 EOP grade and a modi ed 18 EOP grade At station 500 EOP would be 12 feet Between 500 and 550 the EOP distance is interpolated from 12 to 18 So at 525 EOP would be 15 f
387. the rst grid le with Make 3D Grid File 2 Creating the second grid le with Make 3D Grid File 3 Running Two Surface Volumes One advantage to Two Surface Volumes is that you have more control in the creation of the grid les Also you can draw the grid les with the Plot 3D GRiD File routine so that you can view exactly what is being compared Another way to verify that the grid les model the surfaces correctly is to run the Contour From Grid routine and review the contours Two Surface Volumes also has more output options to check volumes Besides grid based volumes volumes can also be calculated between triangulation surfaces using the Volumes by Triangulation command Cross section end area is another volume method that is used by the Calculate Sections Volume command in the Section Pro le module Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 154 There are also options to specify inclusion and exclusion areas When inclusion areas are speci ed only the volume within this inclusion area is calculated Important whenever possible you should use a polyline that represents the limits of disturbed area as the inclusion perimeter Volumes within an exclusion area are not included in the calculations Inclusion and exclusion areas are represented by closed polylines and must be drawn prior to calling this routine If the grid contains grid cells that have no elevations you have the option to extrapolate elevations from the grid cells with
388. the base is con gured and transmitting its position and the rover is xed In most cases you cannot use Method 1 because you will not have setup the base on a point whose exact true position you know Therefore the base corrections are going to be off a certain distance north south and a certain distance east west This is why you want to do an alignment You are showing Carlson Field how to correct for the north south and east west offsets Any points surveyed with the alignment le active will be translated to their proper position To gather alignment points you put the GPS antenna over a point with known coordinates and Carlson Field records the GPS Lat Lon Elv and the Northing Easting Elevation you give it This point can be a local coordinate for example a stake you are calling 5000 5000 It can also be a true State Plane point Using one or more State Plane points will give you an alignment to true State Plane even if your base is not using its own true position Alignment Mehtod 2 This method uses one alignment point to translate the GPS coordinates to local or true State Plane coordinates Remember that if the base is set up over an arbitrary point the GPS coordinates can be off from true state plane by up to 200 feet This alignment method can be used to correct for this by translating the system onto true state plane coordinates You can choose if you want the coordinate system North to be Geodetic North or State Plane Grid N
389. the coordinate le to be processed CRD File Utilities This command allows you to view and edit the data le Draw Points Lines This command applies the code table de nitions to the data le to create the points and line work Draw Points Only This command creates only the points Draw Lines Only This command creates only the line work Pulldown Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite A data le of points with descriptions Insert Symbols Function This command inserts point and map symbols into the drawing The locations for the symbols can be speci ed by picking points by point numbers that reference the current coordinate le or by entering the northing and easting Selecting the Enter coords option allows you to insert the symbol by entering a northing and easting Using the Select entities option symbols can also be placed on arcs points lines or polylines Under the Options command you can turn prompting for rotation on or off With rotation off the symbol will be inserted horizontal to the current twist screen The symbol to insert is selected from the table shown below by double clicking on the symbol Symbols can be grouped by category One of the default categories is North Arrows The current symbol category is shown at the top of the dialog To view the symbol table for a different category pick the down arrow on the right side on the category and select a category name Within a category use the scrol
390. the distance you choose in the Interval box The distance will be taken in feet if your project is using English units or meters if your project is in Metric If you select Time the number in the Interval box will refer to the number of seconds between creating points Check the Draw Linework box to have your points connected by a line or polyline You can enter a description or choose from the code table just like in Point Store The Offset toggle will apply an offset to the calculated coordinates The horizontal offset is applied perpendicular either left or right to the direction of movement There is also an option for a vertical offset Pick Start to begin storing points Carlson Field will take a reading and store the rst point Then Carlson Field will continuously read the GPS or total station For distance interval method as each point is read the distance from the last point is calculated When the distance is greater than the speci ed interval a point is created and the point number is displayed in the dialog In practice the actual distance between stored points will be greater than the distance interval For example if the distance interval is 10 and the current distance is 8 9 then no point is stored Then you keep moving and the next distance is 11 4 which will store a point For time interval point storing after reading and storing the rst point Carlson Field will wait for the interval time to pass then read and store aga
391. the points Curve data can also be entered and reported The points can be either picked on the screen or entered by point number You can also enter a range of point numbers i e 1 9 The closure is reported using the total distance inversed and the difference between the starting and ending points as the closure error There is an option in Area Label Defaults to report the distances in both feet and meters The area can be labeled in the drawing using the settings from the Area Label Defaults command If you don t want to label the area press Enter at the pick label point prompt This command creates a polyline of the gure which can be erased or kept in the drawing Prompts Starting point number pick a point COGO Commands 135 Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end R for radius Radius point number or pick point pick a point Curve direction Left lt Right gt Press Enter End of Arc point number U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Inverse with Area PNTNO BEARING DISTANCE NORTHING EASTING STATION PP 5039 0449 4884 7516 0 0000 N 72d28 12 E 102 5847 PP 5069 9438 4982 5722 102 5847 CHORD BEARING S 62d41 50 E RADIUS 67 7503 CHORD 95 5331 DEGREE 85d LENGTH 106 0261 DELTA 89d39 55 TANGENT 67 3556 PP 5026 1236 5067 4625 208 6107 S 17d51 53 E 32 1815 PP 4995 4937 5077 3
392. the project Once a drawing is selected it will be added to the project tree along with any les related to the drawing Remove When any branch of the tree structure except the top root is selected you have the ability to remove it Keep in mind that removing any node of a tree structure will obviously remove any nodes that are contained under it File Commands 13 Up Down When you select any branch of the tree structure that can be moved the Up and Down buttons will be available This allows you to rearrange the items vertically Pulldown Menu Location File gt Project Keyboard Command prjxplore Display Edit File Function This command allows you to edit or review an ASCII Text le generated by any program The le contents are displayed in the Standard Report Viewer From this routine you can edit the text or print the le Pull Down Menu Location File Prerequisite A le to edit Import DXF File Function This command allows the user to import a DXF le Data eXchange File into the current drawing Drawings or objects created in other CAD systems can be used in Carlson Software by importing them using this command AutoCAD DWG les need not be imported they can be directly opened in Carlson Software Export DXF le Function This command allows the user to create a DXF le from the current drawing It gives the option to create a DXF le from the entire drawing or selected objects
393. then use the code SC DFLT de nition COGO Commands 119 A good way to check the data le for unmatched descriptions is to use the Print Table command and choose the Data Points and Distinct Code options This command will print the different codes in the data le and identify any unde ned codes Field to Finish will layerize the points and linework according to the code de nitions If the layers to use are not already de ned Field to Finish will create the necessary layers and assign different colors To have the same colors for these layers in all your drawings de ne the layers in the prototype drawing For example the BLDG layer could be de ned as magenta The prototype drawing is the default drawing that is loaded whenever a new drawing is created To de ne layers in the prototype drawing save your current drawing and then start a new drawing with the New command Don t give the new drawing a name just click OK Then de ne the layers as desired with the Layer command or Layer Control under the Display pulldown menu When done creating layers use the SAVEAS command and change to Drawing Template dwt under Save as Type In Carlson Field the default drawing template that the Field icon uses is Field DWT So you can overwrite this template or make a new drawing template If you make a new one you may want to edit the Carlson Field icon to use the new one To edit the icon highlight the icon with one click and then cl
394. tine applies a least squares adjustment to the data stored in the LSQ associated with the current RW5 le The closing errors are distributed among the other points using the Method of Least Squares Ref Wolf P R and Ghilani C D 1996 Adjustment Computations John Wiley and Sons NY Third Edition After the adjustment the rest of the raw le is processed to recalculate the sideshots There is an option to draw standard error ellipses around the adjusted points The ellipse axes are multiplied by Ellipse Scale Factor to make the ellipse larger for easier viewing The least squares process report shows the input data and the results For each point the amount adjusted and the standard error in X and Y are reported The Reference Standard Deviation is based on the sum of the residuals and the initial estimated standard errors The Chi Squares test is a goodness of t test that checks the reference standard deviation with the least squares model Control Points Point Northing Easting 1 5000 000 5000 000 8 5000 000 5000 000 Distance Observations Occupy FSight Distance StdErr 1 2 711 409 0 018 2 3 457 745 0 017 3 4 201 295 0 017 4 5 497 024 0 018 5 6 223 972 0 017 6 7 233 872 0 017 7 8 387 073 0 017 Angle Observations BSight Occupy FSight Angle StdErr 7 1 2 268d53 30 7 617 1 2 3 262d54 48 6 869 COGO Commands 103 2 3 4 208d57 10 15 194 3 4 5 247d16 57 14 222 4 5 6 27
395. tine is similar to the Locate Point command with an additional check that makes sure there is an intersection at the picked point If there is not an intersection or interior polyline vertice at the point no point is created Prompts Pick Intersections dialog COGO Commands 83 int on Pick intersection point pick point int on Pick intersection point Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite None Bearing Bearing Intersect Function This command locates a point at the intersection of two lines The lines can be de ned by picking two points selecting a line or typing in a bearing After the lines are de ned a point symbol is located at the point of intersection The gure below shows a graphical example of this command Prompts Enter to use preview point or select 1st Base point Point number or pick point gt Enter Pressing Enter causes the program to use the point coordinates highlighted by the preview arrow De ne 1st angle by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing lt Bearing gt L Select Line or Polyline that De nes 1st Bearing select line 2nd Base point Point number or pick point pick point De ne 2nd bearing by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing lt Line gt Enter to use preview point or pick 1st point that de nes 2nd bearing Pick point or Point number pick point 2nd point that de nes 2nd bearing Chapter 2
396. tings Step 2 Enter Northing Easting Elevation Input the State Plane coordinates northing easting and elevation for the base position Important Note The State Plane coordinates entered must be within 100 meters of its true location on the globe Ideally the entered State Plane coordinates N E Z should be from an accurate post processed static GPS survey point or from a published NGS monument data sheet Step 3 Station ID Optional If you plan on doing post processing you can input a Station ID for the base GPS Antenna location Otherwise just hit OK Reminder Pop Box You are reminded to connect the radio to the correct port Base s Lat Lon Hgt position The Lat Long and Ellispsoid Height for the base position are displayed This position will be used for the corrections that are sent to the rover If your radio has a TX light it should begin ashing Step 4 Save Settings to File You have the option to save this base position as a le You ll be able to use this le if you set up in the same spot in the future Field Commands 247 Method 4 Read From Reference File Step 1 Pick Read From Reference File to select an existing base position REF le Step 2 Select Base Reference File to Load Pick the base position REF le to be loaded Use the up arrow folder to browse elsewhere for the REF le Position as Read from File The latitude longitude and elevation are read from the selected le
397. tion This command can extend objects to precise points de ned by intersection with other objects or points of inter section of other objects Objects to be extended can be lines and arcs as well as polylines This command has a sub menu consisting of three items as follows To Edge The Extend To Edge command allows the user to extend an object precisely to an edge with an object Prompts Select boundary object pick an object to be the boundary to which objets need to be extended to press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Edit Commands 19 Select objects to extend project edge undo pick objectsto be extended to the selected boundary Objects are automatically extended to the possible points of intersection of selected objects with the selected boundary The project option allows user to select projection mode UCS View or none The undo option cancels the last action of extension Pull Down Menu Location Edit Extend gt Prerequisite Object to trim and an edge or implied edge where it cuts or might cut other objects By Distance This command extends a line or polyline or creates new lines or polylines off of an existing one By speci ying a distance a new segment of the line or polyline can be drawn from the current position The current position and direction along the line or polyline is indicated by an arrowhead Extend by Distance starts by selecting an existing lin
398. tion de nes the grade elevation using road design les For each point the program nds the station offset for the point along the centerline and then applies the road design at that station to determine the grade elevation The required design les include a centerline cl template tpl and pro le pro There are also several optional design les such as superelevation The Points option reports the horizontal distance and cut ll between two points The points to compare can be in the same CRD le or separate les For the same CRD le option two ranges of point numbers are compared Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 144 For the separate le option the point numbers are used to match points between the les Survey Survey Design Design Pt Station Offset Elevation Pt Elevation HzDiff Bearing Cut Fill 1 1 10 315 R13 674 1007 410 4 1002 810 0 657 N71d28 57 E C4 600 2 0 77 654 R32 404 1001 180 5 1006 460 0 394 N39d12 34 W F5 280 3 1 00 150 R27 617 1005 120 6 1004 160 0 147 S49d37 22 W C0 960 Cut Sheet report example using Points option Pull Down Menu Location Cogo Prerequisite A coordinate le CRD le with points DTM Commands Elevation Difference Function This command reports the cut or ll between your current position and a design surface The design surface can be one at elevation a grid le a triangulation le a road design le or a section le DTM Commands 1
399. tize Sections XSec command and the section that you are digitizing has match break lines which forces you to digitize the station in two or more parts The Scale button will scale the station offsets and or elevations by the speci ed scale factor This function can be used to convert between English and metric units The Interpolate button option allows you to add or overwrite a station between two stations or projecting forward from two stations When the dialog appears specify the two known stations in the From and To Station edit boxes and the new station to interpolate in the Interpolate Station edit box Select the OK button to execute the function with the current settings or select the Cancel button to abort the process The Copy Station button allows you to copy a station that already exists to a new or existing station number Specify the existing From Station in the edit box then the new station number in the To Station edit box Select the OK button to execute the function with the current settings or select the Cancel button to abort the process The Tie Station button allows you to tie the outslopes into the reference second section le This routine rst brings up a dialog to specify the range of stations to process Next there is a dialog to set the slope to tie with The program will start from the left most offset and use this slope to nd the intersection with the reference section le Then the intersection from the right
400. to use as its stationary position There are ve methods to set the stationary base position Read from GPS Enter Lat Lon Enter State Plane Coord and Read From Reference File and Read From Alignment File Read from GPS This method takes one GPS reading from the base receivers autonomous position and uses it as its true position The autonomous position can be off of the actual position by 200 feet The base will calculate corrections based on this autonomous position If you set up the base with this method the rovers must be aligned since the corrections they are using are based on a true position that is not really true Enter Lat Lon requires you to enter the latitude and longitude for the position of the base antenna This is useful if you Field Commands 241 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 242 are setting up over a USGS monument whose lat lon you know It can also be used over a control point whose position is known from GPS post processing Enter State Plane Coord requires you to enter the State Plane northing and easting for the point that the base is occupying This is useful if you are setting up over a USGS monument whose coordinates you know Read From Reference File reads a previously saved base position le All of the other methods of setting up the base let you save the base position at the end of setup If you return to a site set up the base in exactly the same position use Read From Reference File t
401. ton Note File Utilities can be combined with the Create Links command to make GIS links between the point entities in the drawing and the Access database records The point entities can be drawn with the Draw Locate Points or Field to Finish commands PT ID 61 GIS FILE SMH gis Date 8 5 1999 Time 05 01 36 SMH SMH SIZE 30 TYPE No MANUFACTURER Other COMMENTS JSC HRMS 0 06 VRMS 0 08 Status FIXED GIS Commands 291 ROD HT 5 250 DOP 3 0 SAT 7 Portion of data from Note le Pull Down Menu Location GIS Prerequisite A note le not Help Commands On Line Help Function Carlson Field is using Microsoft HTML Help technology to display help les The help is accessible by pressing F1 anywhere or by going to Help gt On Line Help The help is content sensitive if command is being executed while F1 is pressed Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 292 Training Movies Function The tutorial and training movies are located on the Carlson Software CD in the Movies directory The Movies exe executable brings up a menu showing the available movies It is also available via the Help gt Training Movies menu command Select a movie from the list and then press the Display button About Carlson Software Function This command displays information on the version and registration of Carlson Field Your registration is your company name Each Carlson Field is licensed for use on only one computer
402. trol Function This is one of the most important settings in Site Manager It controls the units of angles and distances their precision and the directional conventions for displacement and rotations The units for displacement can be set to any one of those shown in the dialog box below Similarly any of the units for angles can be chosen The corresponding precision can also be speci ed The Direction button allows the user to select the default direction of the X axis This angle can be selected out of the standard East West North or South directions or any other can be speci ed by entering the value directly or specifying two points on the drawing to indicate the direction of the X axis The default direction for angle measurement can be set to be clockwise or counter clockwise Inquiry amp Settings Commands 53 Pull Down Menu Location Inq Set Prerequisite None Object Snap Function Using object snaps is a quick and ef cient way of locating exact positions on objects without having to know their Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 54 coordinates or drawing construction lines Example include drawing a line to the center of a circle or drawing a perpendicular wall at the mid point of an existing wall The command comes up with a dialog box which allows the user to select the type of snap and the aperture size within which the snap should work Prompts Running Object Snaps Dialog Box Options All the options for t
403. ts the station to slope stake The station should be entered as a number without the symbol Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 172 For the 3D Polyline method the starting station of the polyline is speci ed in the rst dialog For all the other methods the starting station of the alignment is set in the centerline le The Next Interval eld is used to increment the stakeout station for the next stakeout point The Read Current Position button will take a measurement from the GPS or total station to nd the station of your current position This current station is put in the Station eld The Pick Point button will prompt you to pick a point in the drawing view The station of this point is used to ll out the Station eld For the User De ned method this dialog also contains the offset and elevation of the pivot point For the 3D Polyline method this dialog also contains the pivot point offset and vertical offset from the 3D polyline to the pivot point For the design le method the centerline elevation at the stake out station is calculated using the design pro le and then the template is applied to calculate the pivot point Road Commands 173 For the section le method the pivot offset is interpolated from the section le For example if the stakeout station is 75 with offset right and the section le has offset elevation of 18 0 right 100 0 elevation at station 50 and has 20 right 102 0 elevation at st
404. ttached to the unit 2 Connect the prism to the top port of GeoRadio 3 Connect the bottom port of the GeoRadio to Carlson Field Then turn on the radio 4 Turn on the Geodimeter The Geodimeter starts with the screen for leveling the instrument When the instrument is leveled press ENT key to continue to the next step Now the instrument starts compensator calibration You can wait for calibration to nish or turn it off To turn calibration off press on F 22 enter 0 for comp This needs to be done when the instrument is turned on and before ENT is pressed 5 Next Geodimeter will ask for different values for pressure offset etc They can either be left like they are by pressing on ENT or they can be changed 6 Press F 79 it is the End of Transfer character which should be set to 4 7 To set radio and station channels press MNU and enter 1 for Set After set press 5 which will give the user opportunity to change channel station and remote address NOTE The channel station and remote address on the Geodimeter should match the channel station and remote address in Carlson Field 8 To set the Geodimeter for remote mode press on RPU then 3 for remote and 1 for ok you can answer NO to De ne Window If ENT is pressed the instrument will ask Aim to A Press Ent for which the user have aim to upper lower left boundary and press ENT for Aim to B Press Ent aim to the upper lower right boundary
405. u to select a new number override the previous coordinates or average the two measurements together Field to Finish Quick Overview Point Store Steps to draw using Field to Finish 1 Con gure Field Select the GPS or Total Station equipment in the rst dialog 2 In Con gure Field gt Point Settings select the code table to be used Enable Use Code Table For by checking Symbols Descriptions Linework and Layers 3 Initiate Point Store in Field 4 Press F7 for the Code button to select the de ned code UP from the Field to Finish code list 5 Press F8 to start linework or check Start under linework 6 Press F1 for the Read button to take a shot 7 Press F2 for the Store button to store this point Now move to the next location and hit F1 then F2 again to repeat steps 6 and 7 Notice a line between points 7 amp 8 draws with a T for telephone line and the symbol drawn is a utility pole symbol The symbol linework and layer are prede ned for the UP code in the Field to Finish code table If a line between the two points does not draw simple click in the join box and a line is drawn between the two points Remark In Linework after picking Start the next shot with the same description defaults to Cont continue automatically and the line continues to this next point When nishing linework you must select End to stop the Field To Finish 303 linework
406. ull Down Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite An image in the drawing Image Clip Function This command allows you to create new clipping boundaries for an image object Prompts Select image to clip Select an edge of an image Enter image clipping option ON OFF Delete New boundary lt New gt Enter an option or press ENTER The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously de ned boundary Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off Carlson Field automatically turns clipping back on Carlson Field prompts you to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible Delete Removes a prede ned clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image New Boundary Speci es a new clipping boundary The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal and consists only of straight line segments When de ning a clipping boundary specify vertices within the image boundary Self intersecting vertices are valid Rectangular is the default option If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt Carlson Field interprets the point as the rst corner of a rectangle Enter clipping type Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt Enter p or press ENTER Polygonal Uses speci
407. ults Point Number Settings control whether you will be prompted for point numbers by any of the routines that locate points When the Point Numbers toggle is off no X in the box points that are inserted have no point number plotted and no coordinate is stored in the CRD le If the Automatic Point Numbering toggle is off commands that locate a point will prompt for a point number If you have point numbering turned off and the point symbol number set to 0 no point will be plotted An exception to this is when you use the Locate Points command and use the Range option then a point entity is plotted Vertical Angle Prompting applies to creating points with commands such as Traverse The vertical angle is used to calculate the point elevation Separate Attribute Layers will attribute layer names based on the current point layer instead of the default attribute layer names Without this option the point The following truth table illustrates the effects of elevation settings Elevations Yes Real Z No Picked Point Labels point Prompts for elevation uses 0 for z coordinate Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 58 Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Elevations Yes Real Z Yes Picked Point Labels point Prompts for elevation for z coordinate Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate from le Elevations No Real Z No Picked Point No Label No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Point Number
408. umber of lines not to be processed at the start of the text le Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 64 Multiple les can be imported at once In the Select Text ASCII Files routine you can select multiple les by using the Shift or Ctrl keys while picking les You can also run Select Text ASCII Files multiple times The les to import are listed in the top scroll display window The point data from all the import les can be stored to the current CRD le or to separate les for each import le The separate le option will name the CRD les by the import le with a CRD le extension For example the import le job125 txt would create job125 crd The special formats of Leica gsi les TDS cr5 les Geodimeter obs raw les Laser Atlanta txt les Trimble pos les Zeiss txt les Traverse PC trv les Maptech and Benchmark dat les can be directly imported by choosing that File Format at the top of the dialog Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite A text le to read Export Text ASCII File Function This command outputs point data from the current Carlson coordinate le to an ASCII text le Specify the type of le you want to write with the Coordinate Order radio buttons There are several variations on point number northing easting elevation and descriptions as well as speci c formats for Leica Geodimeter Zeiss Maptech and D45 format You
409. under the Add menu to create and ll out the raw le as shown below Notice that the record from point 7 to 8 is set as a CL AB record This tells the program that point 8 is the closing point and that the angle from 7 to 8 is the closing angle For traverse adjustment the closing reference point is 1 and COGO Commands 107 Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 108 the closure error is the difference between point 1 and point 8 For angle balance the reference closing an gle is 358d0 42 178d0 42 180 The angle balance error is the difference between this reference angle and the angle from points 7 to 8 Now let s process using Compass adjustment with Angle Balance Choose Compass under the Process menu and ll out the dialogs as shown COGO Commands 109 Process Results Raw le gt d scdev data tsurvey rw5 CRD le gt d scdev data tsurvey crd Scale Factor 1 00000000 Correct for Earth Curvature OFF Starting Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 BackSight Azimuth 178d00 42 Angle Balance Angular Error 0 0039 for 7 traverse sides Adjusting Each Angle 0 0006 Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR268 5324 89 4050 711 32 5 32 6 00 5038 44 5710 27 103 29 3 AR262 5442 89 3236 457 76 5 43 6 00 4587 91 5791 22 106 36 4 AR208 5704 89 1803 201 31 5 40 6 00 4397 32 5726 47 108 22 5 AR247 1651 88 5235 497 12 5 40 6 00 4363 04
410. under the simplest possible con guration If you want to customize the con guration consult the reference manual A Preliminary setup steps Perform the following preliminary steps to initialize your computer for communication with your Navcom units 1 Startup the Carlson product you intend to use 2 Select CONFIGURE FIELD from the FIELD Menu 3 Select NAVCOM from the EQUIPMENT TYPE dropdown 4 Click the COMMUNICATION SETTINGS button Verify that the SERIAL COM PORT is set to the port you intend to use to communicate with your Navcom unit usually COM1 5 In the COM PORT SETTINGS box click DEFAULT and verify that baud rate 19200 parity NONE char length 8 and stop bits 1 6 Click OK and then click the GPS SETTINGS button 7 Under GPS SETTINGS set your HRMS and VRMS tolerance For single unit setup these numbers should be at least 10 For base rover con guration they should be around 0 01 8 Under PROJECTION TYPE select the coordinate plane you wish to use For state plane make sure you choose the proper ZONE 9 Click OK and then click EXIT B Single unit setup no corrections Before attempting a multi unit setup it is recommended that you rst try setting up your Navcom unit to output an uncorrected position The steps to do so are explained here 1 Mount your GPS Antenna on a tripod in a place where its view of the sky is not obstructed 2 If your antenna is separate from your receiver connect
411. unit setup using corrections from a base 1 Base Setup a Perform the preliminary and single unit setup steps described above b Attach the radio antenna to the radio port of your base unit c Select EQUIPMENT SETUP from the FIELD menu d Select a CORRECTION TYPE We recommend NCT RTK e CLICK the CONFIGURE BASE button f When prompted to enter a position enter the exact position of the base unit Note that the accuracy of your rover s calculation depends on this position being completely accurate g Enter a station ID of 0 The station ID is only used in RTCM mode h Verify that STATION TYPE now reads BASE i Base station setup is complete Click SAVE SETTINGS AND EXIT 2 Switch the device you re plugged in to After con guring the base unplug your serial cable from your base s port A and plug it into your rover s port A Note Whenever you switch the device you re plugged into be sure to close the Equipment Setup window rst 3 Rover Setup a Perform the preliminary and single unit setup steps described above b Attach the radio antenna to the radio port of your rover unit Chapter 4 Equipment Reference 332 c Select EQUIPMENT SETUP from the FIELD menu d Select a CORRECTION TYPE We recommend NCT RTK Note that this selection must match the selection made during base setup e CLICK the CONFIGURE ROVER button f Verify that STATION TYPE now reads ROVER g Rover setup is complete Step
412. uration try again or consult the Base Rover con guration troubleshooting section below Switching the device you re plugged in to Whenever you switch the device you re plugged into be sure to either close the Equipment Setup window or click Retrieve Settings from the top level Equipment Setup menu Troubleshooting Invalid Navigations If the Navigation Status menu reports an invalid navigation you re unit has not yet been able to calculate it s position The unit may need more time if less than 4 satellites are visible or an error is reported If you can t get a valid solution for a few minutes try raising the PDOP mask or lowering the Satellite elevation mask Troubleshooting Base Rover Con guration If you ve con gured a base to output corrections and you re rover does not appear to be receiving the corrections try each of the following in order 1 Verify that your BASE and ROVER are both set to the same correction type 2 Under Con gure Radio check that your ROVER is set to slave and that your BASE is set to master 3 Under Con gure Ports check that both your base and your rover s RTK Data Ports are set to the proper value Usually Radio Port 4 Under the Edit Base Position check that your BASE is set to a valid position Note that if the given position is too far away from the position the BASE is reading the BASE will not send corrections 5 If you re trying to use RTCM make sure the BASE
413. urrent station and the stakeout station is reported as the UP or DOWN distance The UP means that your current station is less than the stakeout station and you should move up the centerline Likewise the DOWN means that your current station is greater than the stakeout station and you should move back down the centerline When the catch point is located press the Store button to end the slope staking A report dialog is then displayed The Catch Pt is the actual station offset and elevation of the target catch point The Stake Pt is the as staked station offset and elevation of your current position The dialog also reports the horizontal and vertical distances from the catch point to the pivot point and the other template points The Store Catch Point option will record Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 174 the as staked coordinates of the catch point to the current coordinate le The Stake Offset Point is an op tion to locate an offset point The offset to stake can be entered as a distance from the catch point or as an offset from the centerline To locate the offset point the same stakeout function from the Stakeout command is used This function will guide you to the offset point When the offset is reached pick the Store button Then an Offset Point Report dialog pops up containing the station offset and elevation of the offset point and the horizontal distance vertical distance and slopes from the offset point to the catch po
414. w the XY plan This angle varies from 90 degrees to 90 degrees By default the value is 90 degrees which means the view is from the positive W axis or in other words from directly above Other values from 0 to 90 degress give slanting views from that particular inclination while negative angles give a view as if looking up at the XY plane The Set to plan view button in the dialog box restores the view to the default plan view of 270 degrees relative to the X axis and 90 degrees to the XY plane The user can select the units Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Zoom Point s Function This command centers the screen to a user speci ed point The point can be speci ed by either the point number or description The command searches the current Coordinate le which can be set with the Set Coordinate File routine in the Inq Set menu Besides centering the screen the magni cation can also be changed The default value is the current magni cation To zoom in enter a smaller value and to zoom out enter a greater value Prompts Find by point N umber or D escription lt N gt Press Enter Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 36 Point number or range of point numbers to nd lt 1 gt 8 8 4856 75 4747 20 0 00 Magni cation or Height lt 500 00 gt Press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Display Prerequisite A CRD le Keyboard Command zoompnt File Name lsp fpoint lsp amp lsp crdutil exp
415. water Example Code De nitions Hard Barrier This will tag the 3D polylines created with this code as hard barriers In Triangulate amp Contour contours are not smoothed as they cross hard barriers Separate Layers This controls the layers of the point and symbol attributes With None the point layers are the standard layers PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC and the symbol layer is PNTMARK With Points or Both the point attribute layers begin with the layer for the code followed by the attribute type For example the DWL code shown in this dialog has a layer name DRIVEWAY The point attributes would then be DRIVE WAYNO DRIVEWAYELEV and DRIVEWAYDESC With Symbols or Both the symbol attribute layer begins with the layer for the code followed by MARK COGO Commands 129 Smooth Polyline This applies a modi ed bezier smoothing to the polyline The smoothed polyline will pass through all the original points Connection Order The points of a distinct code can be connected in their point number order or by nearest found which makes the line by adding the next closest point Tie This speci es whether the line in open or closed Precision This is the number of decimal places to use for the elevation label Locate Pts on Real Z Axis This option will draw the points at the point elevation Otherwise the points are drawn at zero elevation For example you could turn thi
416. wer Y sets the bottom position of the plan view window and the Top Y sets the top of the window These values are entered as plotted inches relative to the bottom of the sheet With Draw Plan on the program will prompt for a centerline polyline from the plan view A plan view display window around this centerline is tted into the plan amp pro le sheet The plan amp pro le is drawn in Paper Space The Scale 1 1 option will draw the pro le at scale 1 in paperspace Otherwise the pro le will be drawn at the Horizontal Scale The Overlap STA option controls whether multiple pro le sheets have overlapping stations of one station interval Use the Tilemode command to switch between paper space and model space The viewport in the pro le sheet can be modi ed with standard commands such as Pan and Freeze Layer To work on the pro le viewport use the MSPACE command To return to the paper use the PSPACE command The program will draw multiple sheets if the pro le is longer than one sheet There are three approaches for drawing multiple pro les For one up to three pro les can be speci ed in the Pro les to Draw section of the dialog Another method is to call Draw Pro le multiple times To draw multiple pro les on the same grid create a grid with the rst pro le and then turn off the draw grid option of Draw Pro le when drawing each additional pro le The third approach is to create a single PRO le that contains
417. whether it is locked or unlocked frozen or thawed and whether it is on or off can also be controlled More than one layer can be selected at a time to make changes to multiple layers simultaneously Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Set Layer Function Allows the user to change the current layer to a different layer by picking an entity on that layer Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Change Layer Function This command allows you to change the layer of a group of entities by selecting the group of entities The layer name to assign can be either typed in or read from an existing entity by picking an entity that is on the layer that you want to change the group to Prompts Select entities to be changed Select objects pick entities Enter new layer name or pick entity with layer Enter lt Pick gt Press Enter View Commands 39 Pick entity with layer to change to pick another entity assigns the selected entities to the layer of this entity or Enter new layer name or pick entity with layer Enter lt Pick gt E for Enter Enter new layer name FINAL assigns the selected entities to the FINAL layer Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Freeze Thaw Layer Function This command will freeze or thaw a particular layer by picking entities on that layer Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Isolate Layer Function This command freezes all
418. x appears displaying your current position and the azimuth distance and slope from the starting point to your current position An arrow icon will appear on the drawing showing your location Pick the New Start button to set a new starting point Slope Inspector with Total Stations Before running Slope Inspector make sure that the occupied point backsight and instrument height are set correctly in the Equipment Setup command Then start Slope Inspector and read a measurement for the starting point A dialog box appears displaying your current position Pick the Read button to take another measurement Carlson Field will calculate the new point and report the azimuth distance and slope from the starting point to the new point An arrow icon will appear on the drawing showing your location Pick the New Start button to set a new starting point Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 176 Prepare Story Stake Function This command creates points with cut ll information stored in the note elds for the points Beginning at a point and facing a speci ed direction the cut ll information describes a design surface that is de ned by contours and 3D polylines in the drawing The program prompts you to pick the starting point followed by a direction point Then the intersections for all the contours and 3D polylines between these two pointsare calculated and the resulting horizontal distances and slopes are shown in a dialog In this dialog you c
419. y what points in the selected object must be mapped to what points in the nal position The user can do this using 1 2 or 3 points to specify the type of alignment Selecting just one source and destina tion point causes linear translation of the object Two point speci cation can cause objects to be rotated in the plane of the drawing before they are placed in their nal position Three point speci cation can cause three dimensional alignment Scaling is not achieved by this command the aligned object needs to be scaled explicitly Prompts Select object pick an object to be scaled press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection 1st source point pick rst point that is intended to be a tag point for the alignment 1st destination point pick the point that the rst source point is intended to go to 2nd source point pick second point that is intended to be a tag point for the alignment If you press lt Enter gt at this point linear alignment is executed 2nd destination point pick the point that the second source point is intended to go to 3rd source point pick third point that is intended to be a tag point for the alignment If you press lt Enter gt at this point the user is prompted to con rm whether it is a 2d or 3d alignment If 2d is selected which is the default selection planar alignment is executed If 3d is selected then further prompts as below will be seen A third souce point is
420. yards Fill volume 0 00 cubic ft 0 00 cubic yards Running total DTM Commands 157 Cut volume 82836 29 cubic ft 3068 01 cubic yards Report from the Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes option which calculates the cut and ll in different elevation ranges at a user speci ed interval and beginning at a user speci ed starting elevation ENTER for none Select objects Press Enter Specify Base Grid File Selection Dialog Choose a GRD le to process Extrapolate grid to full grid size Yes lt No gt Press Enter If you enter Yes to this prompt surface elevations will be computed for any grid cells that have null elevations Specify Final Grid File Selection Dialog Choose a GRD le to process Extrapolate grid to full grid size Yes lt No gt Press Enter Volume Report Options Pull Down Menu Location DTM Prerequisite Two grid les Keyboard Command volcalc2 File Name lsp volcalc lsp amp lsp volcalc arx This shows a grid drawn by Plot 3D Grid File and volume values drawn by the Draw Volume in Each Cell option of the Two Surface Volumes routine Cut appears as negative and ll as positive Notice that cells bordering Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 158 cut and ll regions contain a little of both Triangulate amp Contour Function Triangulate amp Contour provides all the functionality related to contouring in one routine Also besides contouring this command can create a t
421. ymbol insertion points Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 120 COGO Commands 121 1 5000 00 5000 00 0 00 TP 2 5173 74 5058 92 0 00 BLC2 3 5173 50 5037 12 0 00 BLC2 4 5215 13 5058 21 0 00 BLC2 5 5214 89 5036 41 0 00 BLC2 6 5129 71 5075 05 0 00 GAR2 GARAGE 7 5151 77 5074 93 0 00 GAR2 8 5125 42 4983 58 0 00 SHD1 9 5125 39 4974 92 0 00 SHD1 SHED 10 5125 16 4968 97 0 00 FPC1 FPC2 11 5166 79 4995 08 0 00 BLC1 12 5133 85 4983 55 0 00 SHD1 13 5230 78 4999 14 0 00 TP 14 5228 66 4965 99 0 00 FPC2 15 5227 78 4966 82 0 00 FPC3 16 5227 69 4983 04 0 00 FPC3 17 5227 66 4988 08 0 00 FPC4 18 5223 96 5014 21 0 00 FPW4 19 5215 13 4974 04 0 00 BLC1 20 5215 32 4994 61 0 00 BLC1 22 5155 30 5004 17 0 00 POOL 23 5152 01 5009 80 0 00 POOL 24 5133 17 5009 85 0 00 POOL 25 5138 99 5014 57 0 00 26T MAPLE 26 5125 35 5014 63 0 00 FPC1 FPW4 27 5151 76 5063 97 0 00 GAR2 28 5148 58 5015 25 0 00 DECK 29 5164 50 5014 90 0 00 DECK 30 5245 09 5081 15 0 00 RC 31 5246 17 4902 27 0 00 RC 32 5257 09 5081 15 0 00 EL 33 5233 09 5081 15 0 00 ER 34 5232 09 5081 15 0 00 CWL 35 5228 09 5081 15 0 00 CWR 36 5232 52 5010 11 0 00 CWL DWL1 37 5233 51 5011 48 0 00 DWL1 ER 38 5210 88 5009 85 0 00 DWL1 39 5210 90 4998 11 0 00 DWR1 40 5228 60 4997 00 0 00 DWR1 41 5228 52 5009 99 0 00 DWL1 42 5173 74 4948 98 0 00 BLC3 43 5173 50 4927 18 0 00 BLC3 44 5215 13 4948 26 0 00 BLC3 45 5214 89 4926 46 0 00 BLC3 46 5232 60 4996 52 0 00 DWR1 47 5233 61 4995 29 0 00 DWR1 ER 48 5215 20 4981 5
422. you can always bring this window back and modify your settings later by clicking the Options button from the File Transfer Utility screen The main screen displays les from your local PC directory on the left and lesfrom your data collector on the right If you wish to change the directory of either system click the Set Path button Select Local PC or Remote then type in the path name of the desired directory Click OK You may also choose to make a new directory or delete an existing directory from either computer by using the Make Directory and Remove Directory buttons Click on the le you wish to transfer and you will see it highlighted in the screen You may select multiple les at once by holding the Ctrl key and clicking on additional le names Once you have highlighted your les simply click the Transfer button to copy them from one machine to the other Once the transfer is complete the Transfer Complete message will appear If you do not get this message the transfer was not successful Check all your cables COM Port settings and available Disk Space displayed on the File Transfer Utility screen You may also choose to Delete highlighted les To avoid accidental deletion of les ensure that the Con rm Delete prompt is set to YES Finally when you have nished your le transfer session click Quit to return to Carlson Chapter 2 Field Reference Guide 90 Edit Process Raw File Function This program reads
423. your instrument Field Commands 231 When using the re ectorless mode the Rod Height should typically be set to zero When tracking is selected in Carlson Field functions the program will automatically put the instrument in IR Rapid Tracking mode during tracking and then return to the speci ed EDM Mode when tracking is done The intensity of the instrument Tracklight can be set to Off Low Medium or High Topcon 800 Remote Total Station Setup The Radio Type can either be Satel 3AS Satel 2AS or Other With Other Carlson Field does not send any radio setup commands So these radios must be con gured before running Carlson Field For the Satel 3AS radios you can set the radio frequency by Channel ID or by manually typing a frequency between 468 5 and 470 5 The EDM Mode sets the instrument distance measurement mode for standard shots When tracking is selected in Carlson Field functions the program will automatically put the instrument in Coarse mode during tracking and then return to the speci ed EDM Mode when tracking is done Wait Time is switched on when the instrument cannot track a prism due to an obstruction If after the wait time have elapsed the instrument does not switch back to tracking mode then searching mode is set Vertical range and Horizontal range set the search area Vertical range can be anywhere from 0 90 degrees and horizontal range can be anywhere from 0 180 degrees Track Indicator On if checked turns o

- Carlson Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents